CADWorx Plant User Guide

CADWorx Plant User's Guide

Version 2013 R2 (13.2)

November 2012

DICAS-PE-200007B

Copyright

Copyright © 2003-2012 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.

Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813

Terms of Use

Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks

Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, CADWorx, and CAESAR II are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States, and other countries. Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation, and/or its affiliates. AutoCAD, ObjectARX, and RealDWG are trademarks of Autodesk. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft 3D, L.L.C. Other brands, and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

CADWorx Design Review contains Autodesk® RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., copyright © Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved. Autodesk, Inc., 111 McInnis Parkway, San Rafael, California 94903 ("Autodesk") is a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to the extent that the Software Product contains RealDWG, and to the extent that the provisions herein relate to Licensee’s use of the Software Product containing RealDWG. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Autodesk, and are enforceable by Autodesk in addition to Intergraph.

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 3

Contents Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 15

Conventions .......................................................................................................................................... 15 Technical Support ................................................................................................................................. 16 What's New in Plant .............................................................................................................................. 18

Obsolete Commands ...................................................................................................................... 20 Online Help ........................................................................................................................................... 21

Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 23

Startup Defaults .................................................................................................................................... 23 Support Directory .................................................................................................................................. 23 MVSetup ............................................................................................................................................... 24

Setup Size/Spec Panel .............................................................................................................................. 25

Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 26 Configuration Settings .................................................................................................................... 28 Set Specification and Size .............................................................................................................. 43 Configuration Layers ...................................................................................................................... 44 Piping Rules ................................................................................................................................... 46 Convert Legacy Drawing ................................................................................................................ 51

Specification and Size ........................................................................................................................... 55 Optional Items ....................................................................................................................................... 55

Optional Component Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 55 Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 56 Spec ...................................................................................................................................................... 56 Size-Spec .............................................................................................................................................. 57 All .......................................................................................................................................................... 57 Editor ..................................................................................................................................................... 57 Change Size .......................................................................................................................................... 57

Change the size automatically ....................................................................................................... 58 Change the size manually .............................................................................................................. 58 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically ............................................................ 59 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually ................................................................... 59 Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically .............................................. 60

Change Specification ............................................................................................................................ 60 Change the specification automatically .......................................................................................... 61 Change the specification manually ................................................................................................. 61 Change the specification of a model with branches automatically ................................................. 61

Local Edit .............................................................................................................................................. 62 Modify a component ....................................................................................................................... 63 ISOGEN Data Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 64

Global Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 68 Modify multiple components ........................................................................................................... 69

Mode Convert ........................................................................................................................................ 70 Convert a component to a different mode ...................................................................................... 71 3D Solids ........................................................................................................................................ 71 Convert Isometric ........................................................................................................................... 71 2D Double Line ............................................................................................................................... 71

Contents

4 CADWorx Plant User's Guide

2D Single Line ................................................................................................................................ 71 Convert Existing ............................................................................................................................. 72 Convert to 3D enhanced................................................................................................................. 72 Convert from project data ............................................................................................................... 72 CWexplode ..................................................................................................................................... 72

Socket Weld .......................................................................................................................................... 73 Threaded ............................................................................................................................................... 73 Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 73 XREF Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 73

Palette Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 75

Spec View Palette ................................................................................................................................. 76 Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) ............................................................................. 76 Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette).................................................................................. 78

Line View Palette .................................................................................................................................. 79 Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ............................................................................. 79 Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ......................................................................................... 80

Support Modeler Palette ....................................................................................................................... 81 Insert a pipe support ....................................................................................................................... 83 Insert an elbow support .................................................................................................................. 84 Insert multiple pipe supports .......................................................................................................... 84 Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) .......................................................................................... 84

Insulation View Palette .......................................................................................................................... 88 Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) .......................................................................... 89 Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) .............................................................................. 90

Discontinuity View Palette ..................................................................................................................... 92 Pipe Support Report ............................................................................................................................. 93 P&ID View Palette ................................................................................................................................. 94

Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)................................................................................. 94 Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) ............................................................................ 96 Insert a drawing into the project ..................................................................................................... 97

Clash View Palette ................................................................................................................................ 97 Options Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 98 Layers Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 99

Assembly View Palette ......................................................................................................................... 99 Create an assembly ...................................................................................................................... 100 Edit an assembly .......................................................................................................................... 100 Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager ........................................................................ 101 Insert an assembly into the drawing ............................................................................................. 101 Edit an assembly path .................................................................................................................. 101

ISOGEN Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 103

ISOGEN Out ....................................................................................................................................... 104 Extract ISOGEN files .................................................................................................................... 105

ISOGEN Batch .................................................................................................................................... 106 Extract batch ISOGEN files .......................................................................................................... 106

ISOGEN Supplemental ....................................................................................................................... 107 Stop Sign ............................................................................................................................................. 108 ISOGEN Start Point ............................................................................................................................ 108 Offset Tap ........................................................................................................................................... 108

Place an offset tap ........................................................................................................................ 111 PCF Out .............................................................................................................................................. 112

Contents


Extract piping component files ..................................................................................................... 112 PCF In ................................................................................................................................................. 112 Tap ...................................................................................................................................................... 112

Place a tap .................................................................................................................................... 113 ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure .............................................................................................. 113 ISOGEN Information ........................................................................................................................... 113

Material List Definition .................................................................................................................. 113 SKEY Information ......................................................................................................................... 114 End Type Information ................................................................................................................... 121

LNum Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 123

Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 124 Line Numbering System Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 124

Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 125 Set line numbers based on a P&ID project .................................................................................. 126 Set line numbers based on the current drawing ........................................................................... 126 Set line numbers based on a component ..................................................................................... 126

Count ................................................................................................................................................... 126 Set the line count value ................................................................................................................ 127

Increment ............................................................................................................................................ 127 Decrement ........................................................................................................................................... 127 Assign ................................................................................................................................................. 127

Assign line numbers ..................................................................................................................... 128 Annotate .............................................................................................................................................. 128

Label components with line numbers ........................................................................................... 128 Line ..................................................................................................................................................... 129

Set the current line number to that of a component ..................................................................... 129 Line Isolate .......................................................................................................................................... 129

Pipe BOM / DB Panel ............................................................................................................................... 131

Bill of Material Setup ........................................................................................................................... 132 Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 133 Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 133 Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 133 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 134 BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ................................................................................ 134

Cut Pipe Bill of Material ....................................................................................................................... 134 Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 135 Cut BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................... 136

Total Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 136 Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 137 Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 137

Single Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 138 Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 139 Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 139

Export Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 139 Import Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 141 Delete Bill of Material .......................................................................................................................... 141 Tag Toggle Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 141 Tag Location ....................................................................................................................................... 141 Insert Tag ............................................................................................................................................ 142 Setup Live Database ........................................................................................................................... 142

Contents


Export Pipe .......................................................................................................................................... 143 Select Item Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 144

Import Pipe .......................................................................................................................................... 145 Audit Pipe Database ........................................................................................................................... 145 Synchronize Pipe Database ................................................................................................................ 146 C.G. Generator.................................................................................................................................... 147

Misc Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 149

Auto Connect ...................................................................................................................................... 150 Group On/Off ....................................................................................................................................... 150 Weld Size ............................................................................................................................................ 151

Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe ............................................................................. 151 Top Works Add ................................................................................................................................... 151 Top Works Change ............................................................................................................................. 151 System Out ......................................................................................................................................... 152

Generate a CAESAR II input file .................................................................................................. 152 User Shapes ....................................................................................................................................... 153

Create a user shape file ............................................................................................................... 157 Edit an existing user shape .......................................................................................................... 158 Create a user shape from points .................................................................................................. 162 Create a user shape from a polyline ............................................................................................ 164 Create a user shape from a block ................................................................................................ 165 Create a 3D user shape ............................................................................................................... 167 Create a 2D user shape ............................................................................................................... 168 Create a 2D single line user shape .............................................................................................. 170 Add a user shape to a specification ............................................................................................. 171 Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing ........................................................................... 172 Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing ..................................................................... 172

Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 173 Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 173

System In ............................................................................................................................................ 174 Read a CAESAR II input file ......................................................................................................... 175

Elbow Centerline ................................................................................................................................. 175 ISO Flag .............................................................................................................................................. 175 Dim Adjustment ................................................................................................................................... 175

Adjust a dimension to match a pipe ............................................................................................. 176 Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension .................................................................................. 176

System Visibility .................................................................................................................................. 177

2D Panel.................................................................................................................................................... 179

2D Representation .............................................................................................................................. 179 Create a 2D representation .......................................................................................................... 180

2D Representation Hidden .................................................................................................................. 180 Create a 2D representation with hidden lines .............................................................................. 180

Box ...................................................................................................................................................... 180 Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 181 Zoom Lock .......................................................................................................................................... 181

Turn on the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 182 Turn off the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 182

Zoom Factors ...................................................................................................................................... 182

Contents


Bolt ............................................................................................................................................................ 183

Auto Gasket ........................................................................................................................................ 183 Place a gasket automatically ........................................................................................................ 183 Place a gasket manually............................................................................................................... 184

Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 184 Place stud bolts automatically ...................................................................................................... 184 Place stud bolts manually ............................................................................................................. 184

Auto Weld ............................................................................................................................................ 185 Place weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 185 Place weld gaps manually ............................................................................................................ 186

Weld Total ........................................................................................................................................... 186 Count weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 186

Standard .............................................................................................................................................. 187 Place standard stud bolts ............................................................................................................. 187

Non Standard ...................................................................................................................................... 187 Place nonstandard stud bolts ....................................................................................................... 187

RT Panel ................................................................................................................................................... 189

Auto Route .......................................................................................................................................... 189 Start a new route .......................................................................................................................... 190 Continue Routing .......................................................................................................................... 191

Router ................................................................................................................................................. 191 Router commands ............................................................................................................................... 192

Buttweld LR .................................................................................................................................. 192 Buttweld SR .................................................................................................................................. 193 Threaded ...................................................................................................................................... 193 Socket Weld ................................................................................................................................. 194

Dimension Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 195

Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 196 Place automatic dimensions ......................................................................................................... 196

Horizontal ............................................................................................................................................ 196 Place horizontal dimensions ......................................................................................................... 196

Vertical ................................................................................................................................................ 197 Place vertical dimensions ............................................................................................................. 197

Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 197 Set the Elevation .......................................................................................................................... 197

Rotated ................................................................................................................................................ 198 Place rotated dimensions ............................................................................................................. 198

Horizontal with Tail .............................................................................................................................. 198 Place horizontal tailed dimensions ............................................................................................... 198

Vertical with Tail .................................................................................................................................. 198 Place vertical tailed dimensions ................................................................................................... 199

Change ................................................................................................................................................ 199 Change the Elevation ................................................................................................................... 199

Component .......................................................................................................................................... 199 Place component annotation ........................................................................................................ 200

Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 200 Place component elevation annotation ........................................................................................ 200

Coordinates ......................................................................................................................................... 200 Place coordinates ......................................................................................................................... 201

Tick Mark ............................................................................................................................................. 201

Contents


Place tick marks ........................................................................................................................... 202 ISO Text .............................................................................................................................................. 202 Height .................................................................................................................................................. 202

Graphics / Pipe Ends ............................................................................................................................... 203

System Prompts .................................................................................................................................. 204 Section ................................................................................................................................................ 206

Place a section graphic ................................................................................................................ 206 Detail ................................................................................................................................................... 207

Place a detail graphic ................................................................................................................... 207 Plan ..................................................................................................................................................... 208

Place a plan graphic ..................................................................................................................... 208 Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 209

Place an elevation graphic ........................................................................................................... 209 Arrow ................................................................................................................................................... 210

Place an arrow head graphic ........................................................................................................ 210 Weld .................................................................................................................................................... 211

Place a weld symbol graphic ........................................................................................................ 211 ISO ...................................................................................................................................................... 211

Place an isometric symbol graphic ............................................................................................... 213 Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 213

Place a miscellaneous graphic ..................................................................................................... 214 Instrument ........................................................................................................................................... 214

Place an instrument graphic ......................................................................................................... 215 Dots ..................................................................................................................................................... 215

Place a weld dot graphic .............................................................................................................. 216

Layers Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 217

Change Layer...................................................................................................................................... 218 Change the layer associated with an object ................................................................................. 218

Set Layer ............................................................................................................................................. 218 Set the active layer ....................................................................................................................... 218

Delete Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 218 Delete a layer ............................................................................................................................... 219

Layer Off ............................................................................................................................................. 219 Turn off a layer ............................................................................................................................. 219

Layer On ............................................................................................................................................. 219 Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command .............................................................. 219

Match Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 219 Match an object's layer ................................................................................................................. 220

Isolate Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 220 Display only the layer associated with an object .......................................................................... 220

Un-Isolate Layer .................................................................................................................................. 220 Turn on all layers .......................................................................................................................... 220

Previous .............................................................................................................................................. 220

Restraints Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 221

Reinforcing Pad................................................................................................................................... 222 Insert a reinforcement pad ........................................................................................................... 222

Reinforcing Saddle .............................................................................................................................. 222 Insert a reinforcement saddle ....................................................................................................... 223

Contents


Translational ........................................................................................................................................ 223 Place a translational restraint ....................................................................................................... 223

Anchor ................................................................................................................................................. 224 Place an anchor ............................................................................................................................ 224

Spring Hanger ..................................................................................................................................... 224 Place a spring hanger................................................................................................................... 225

Rotational ............................................................................................................................................ 225 Place a rotational restraint ............................................................................................................ 225

Snubber ............................................................................................................................................... 226 Place a snubber ............................................................................................................................ 226

Guide ................................................................................................................................................... 226 Place a guide ................................................................................................................................ 226

UCS Panel................................................................................................................................................. 227

Point and Shoot UCS .......................................................................................................................... 227 Flat ...................................................................................................................................................... 229 UCS Next ............................................................................................................................................ 230 Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 230 North ................................................................................................................................................... 230 South ................................................................................................................................................... 231 West .................................................................................................................................................... 231 East ..................................................................................................................................................... 232 UCS Object ......................................................................................................................................... 232

Steel Shapes Panel .................................................................................................................................. 233

Shapes ................................................................................................................................................ 233 Wide Flange Shapes .................................................................................................................... 236 Channel Shapes ........................................................................................................................... 237 Angle Shapes ............................................................................................................................... 238 Tee Shapes .................................................................................................................................. 239 Pipe Shapes ................................................................................................................................. 240 Tube Shapes ................................................................................................................................ 241 Flat Bar Shapes ............................................................................................................................ 242 Round Bar Shapes ....................................................................................................................... 243 Channel Shape with Lip................................................................................................................ 244 Angle Shape with Lip .................................................................................................................... 245 Z Shapes ...................................................................................................................................... 246 Angle Double Shape..................................................................................................................... 247

Steel Draw Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 249

Plate .................................................................................................................................................... 250 Place plate by points .................................................................................................................... 251 Place plate by closed polyline ...................................................................................................... 251 Place plate by curves ................................................................................................................... 252

Base Plate ........................................................................................................................................... 252 Place a base plate ........................................................................................................................ 254 Place a base plate with holes ....................................................................................................... 254

Steel Bolts ........................................................................................................................................... 255 Set Size by Component ...................................................................................................................... 257 Generic Attachment ............................................................................................................................ 257 User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 258

Contents


Loft ...................................................................................................................................................... 260 Single Line Steel ................................................................................................................................. 261 Frame Creation ................................................................................................................................... 268

Create a new frame configuration ................................................................................................ 269 Edit a frame configuration ............................................................................................................ 270 Place a frame in the drawing ........................................................................................................ 270

Frame Annotation................................................................................................................................ 270 Ladder ................................................................................................................................................. 271

Place a ladder interactively .......................................................................................................... 272 Place a ladder using key-ins ........................................................................................................ 273 Place a ladder with a cage ........................................................................................................... 273

Handrail ............................................................................................................................................... 273 Place hand rail by points .............................................................................................................. 274 Place hand rail by polyline ............................................................................................................ 275

Stair ..................................................................................................................................................... 275

Steel Edit Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 279

Cope .................................................................................................................................................... 280 Miter .................................................................................................................................................... 280 Cut ....................................................................................................................................................... 281

Cut members by line ..................................................................................................................... 281 Cut members by three-point plane ............................................................................................... 281

Union ................................................................................................................................................... 282 Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 282 Global Edit ........................................................................................................................................... 286 Global Edit All ...................................................................................................................................... 287 Annotate Component .......................................................................................................................... 289 Convert Solid ....................................................................................................................................... 289 Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 290 Select Control ...................................................................................................................................... 290 Auto Cope ........................................................................................................................................... 290

Steel BOM / DB Panel .............................................................................................................................. 291

Steel BOM Setup ................................................................................................................................ 292 Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 293 Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 293 Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 293 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 293 Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ....................................................................... 294

Cut Steel Bill of Material ...................................................................................................................... 294 Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 295 Cut BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................... 295

Total Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................... 296 Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 297 Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 297

Single Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 297 Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 299 Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 299

Export Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 299 Setup Live Database Steel ................................................................................................................. 300 Export Steel ......................................................................................................................................... 301 Import Steel ......................................................................................................................................... 301

Contents


Audit Steel Database .......................................................................................................................... 302 Synchronize Steel Database ............................................................................................................... 302 Export Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 303 Import Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 303 CG Generator ...................................................................................................................................... 304

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel ................................................................................................................ 305

HVAC .................................................................................................................................................. 306 Add an HVAC shape to the drawing ............................................................................................. 308 Modify an HVAC shape ................................................................................................................ 308

HVAC Shapes Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 308 Place an HVAC shape from the catalog ....................................................................................... 310 Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog ..................................................................................... 310

User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 310 Place a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................... 313 Modify a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................. 313

Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 313 Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 314 Modify a generic attachment ........................................................................................................ 314

Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 314 GC Edit ................................................................................................................................................ 315

Edit HVAC components globally .................................................................................................. 315 HVAC BOM Setup............................................................................................................................... 315

Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 317 Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 317 Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 317 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 317

Cut HVAC Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 318 Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 319 Cut BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................... 319

Total HVAC Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 319 Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 320 Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 320

Single HVAC Bill of Material ............................................................................................................... 321 Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 322 Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 322

Data Remove ...................................................................................................................................... 322 Remove CADWorx data from components .................................................................................. 322

Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 322 Change the layers associated with HVAC components ............................................................... 323

Export HVAC ....................................................................................................................................... 323 Export CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 323

Import HVAC ....................................................................................................................................... 324 Import CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 324

Audit HVAC Database ........................................................................................................................ 324 Audit the HVAC database ............................................................................................................ 324

Synchronize HVAC Database ............................................................................................................. 325 Synchronize the HVAC database ................................................................................................. 325

Toolbars.................................................................................................................................................... 327

Accessing and Docking the Toolbars.................................................................................................. 327 Aliases and Command Names ........................................................................................................... 328

Contents


Connecting to components ................................................................................................................. 328 Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 328 Plane versus Isometrics view modes .................................................................................................. 328 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling ....................................................................................................... 329 Buttweld .............................................................................................................................................. 329

Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 333 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 349

Flanges ............................................................................................................................................... 361 Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................................ 362 Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................................. 364 Blind Flange .................................................................................................................................. 365 Socket Type Flange ...................................................................................................................... 366 Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................................... 367 Lap Joint Flange ........................................................................................................................... 369 Stub End ....................................................................................................................................... 369 Long Weld Neck ........................................................................................................................... 370 Reducing Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................. 370 Reducing Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................... 372 Reducing Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................ 373

Flgd/BW Valves................................................................................................................................... 375 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 376 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 386

Lined ................................................................................................................................................... 389 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 391 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 393

Fiberglass ............................................................................................................................................ 394 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 397 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 405

Sanitary ............................................................................................................................................... 412 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 419 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 435

Victaulic ............................................................................................................................................... 447 Threaded/Socket ................................................................................................................................. 450


Thrd/SW Valves .................................................................................................................................. 481 Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 484 Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 493

Gaskets, Etc. ....................................................................................................................................... 495 Gasket .......................................................................................................................................... 496 Weld Gap ...................................................................................................................................... 497

Restraints ............................................................................................................................................ 497 Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 498


Operators ............................................................................................................................................ 504 Line Numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 504 UCS ..................................................................................................................................................... 505 Steel .................................................................................................................................................... 505 Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 507 Palettes ............................................................................................................................................... 509

Contents


Specification and Data Files ................................................................................................................... 511

Editing Component Data Files ............................................................................................................ 511

AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant ................................................................................................... 513

Modifying a User Profile ...................................................................................................................... 513 Creating a Base Profile ....................................................................................................................... 514 Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant .............................................. 514 Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database ............................................................... 516

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 517

Contents



This document provides command reference information and workflows for CADWorx Plant.

We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at: [email protected].

Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from eCustomer https://crmweb.intergraph.com.

Intergraph® gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as needed for non-commercial use at your company. You cannot print this document for resale or redistribution outside your company.

Conventions Before reviewing this guide, it is important to understand the terms and conventions used in the documentation.

Use the information below to identify the convention and the type of information.

Convention Type of Information

[Product Folder] The CADWorx installation folder on your computer, for example, C:\CADWorx. Substitute your installation folder anywhere this notation is used.

[AutoCAD Folder] The AutoCAD installation folder on your computer, for example, C:\AutoCAD 2000i. Substitute your installation folder anywhere this notation is used.

[CD-DRIVE] The CD-ROM drive on your computer. Substitute your CD-ROM drive letter anywhere this notation is used.

Command Line Items that need to be typed in or appear at the AutoCAD command line.

User Responses User responses to command prompts.

Commands CADWorx and AutoCAD commands.

Options Command line options.

CAPITALS AutoCAD system variables or keywords.

Key + Key Key combinations for which you must press and hold down one key and then press another, for example, CTRL+P or ALT+F4.

Preface

https://crmweb.intergraph.com/

Preface


Technical Support For the latest information on CADWorx Plant, visit Intergraph CADWorx and Analysis Solutions (http://www.coade.com/).

For current on-line support information, including knowledge base, technical tips, and downloads, visit eCustomer (https://crmweb.intergraph.com/ecustomer_enu).

In order to provide technical support, Intergraph CAS needs to know what version of CADWorx, AutoCAD, and Windows you are using. To determine this information, follow the steps outlined for the product you are using:

CADWorx Product Steps

Plant, P&ID, fieldPipe, or Steel Run the CADWORXABOUT command. A dialog box opens and displays the version information.

Close the dialog box to send the required information to the AutoCAD command line.

Copy the information from the command line, and email it to Intergraph CAS.

Equipment or PV Fabricator Run the EQUIPABOUT command. A dialog box opens and displays the version information.

Close the dialog box to send the required information to the AutoCAD command line.

Copy the information from the command line, and email it to Intergraph CAS.

Internet Publisher Version information is displayed at the AutoCAD command line when you start the software.

Datasheets Click Help > About to display a dialog box that contains the required information.

In addition to the information above, the table below lists the additional files that are usually required to assist Intergraph CAS in resolving your technical issues:

CADWorx Product

Additional Files Required by Intergraph CAS Support

CADWorx Plant (Piping, Steel, HVAC) Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.

If the model consists of several line numbers, indicate in the email which line numbers you are having issues with.

If the model consists of many drawing files with dependent reference drawings (XREFs), use the AutoCAD ETRANSMIT command to create a ZIP file of all the drawings used in the master model.

CADWorx Plant (component data file creation)

Email information about the part's dimension from the manufacturer's catalog.

http://www.coade.com/

https://crmweb.intergraph.com/ecustomer_enu

Preface


CADWorx ISOGEN Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files, any isometrics generated by ISOGEN, and the ISOGEN style files.


The ISOGEN.FLS file located in the ISOGEN style folder lists all the files used (*.OPL, *.MLS, *.FLS, *.DDF, *.POS, *.ALT, *.DWG*.DXF, *.FDF, *.ATT). Email all files listed in the ISOGEN.FLS file, including the ISOGEN.FLS file.

CADWorx Equipment Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.

CADWorx Equipment to PV Elite interface

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and PV Elite input file (*.PVI).

PV Fabricator Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and PV Elite input file (*.PVI).

CADWorx P&ID or CADWorx IP Email the complete P&ID project, which includes Project.CFG, Database.TBL, Map.TBL, and all the DWG, and MDB files. Usually, all of these files are located in one folder.

If the project has many P&ID drawing files, indicate which P&ID drawings and components you are having issues with.

If you are experiencing database errors, include the file [Product Folder]\P&ID\System\Sql_Error_Log.TXT.

If you are emailing MDB files, use a compression utility such as WinZIP. Most email servers have restrictions on transmitting MDB attachments.

CADWorx Steel Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.

If the model consists of many components, indicate in the model which components or location you are having issues with.

CADWorx Datasheets Email the datasheets MDB file and any datasheet file generated (XLS).

If emailing MDB / XLS files, use a compression utility such as WinZIP. Most email servers have restrictions on transmitting MDB / XLS attachments.

Preface


CADWorx Plant to CAESAR II interface

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and CAESAR II input file (*._A, *.C2).

Run the CADWorx GETALLSPECDATAFILES command to copy all specifications and data files used in the model into sub-folders under where the model drawing file is located.

Zip the contents of these folders and email the ZIP file to Intergraph CAS Support.


CADWorx Design Review or CADWorx Design Create

Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.


If the model consists of many drawing files with dependent reference drawings (XREFs), use the AutoCAD ETRANSMIT command to create a ZIP file of all drawings used in the master model.

CADWorx Design Viewer Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and the *.CDR file.

If you are attaching large or multiple files to your eCustomer log, use a compression utility such as WinZIP.

If you cannot attach your drawing files, then try to duplicate the issue in a new drawing with as few components as possible. If the issue can be duplicated in a new drawing, attach the duplicate drawing to Intergraph CAS.

For hardware lock issues, first verify that you have an Intergraph CAS hardware lock. CADWorx Plant Professional, CADWorx P&ID, CADWorx P&ID Professional, CADWorx Plant Ductile Iron, and CADWorx Plant Sanitary use the Intergraph CAS hardware lock for licensing. CADWorx Steel, CADWorx Steel Professional Plus do not use the Intergraph CAS hardware lock for licensing. For more information about hardware locks, see CADWorx Hardware Lock Identification in the CADWorx Installation Guide.

What's New in Plant Version 2013 R2 (13.2)

This user's guide has had the following changes for this release.

Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R2 - November 2012:

Program

You can now convert CADWorx legacy drawings using CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS. For more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing (on page 51) and CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box (on page 52).

Preface


You can now review drawings for legacy components using REVIEWLEGACYCOMPONENTS. For more information, see Find Legacy Components Dialog Box (on page 54).

You can now have CADWorx automatically add couplings between components with the Apply Auto Coupling Rule. For more information, see Apply Auto Coupling Rule (on page 49) in Piping Rules (on page 46).

You can now have CADWorx automatically check the line number when inserting components in a line with the Apply Line Number Rule. For more information, see Apply Line Number Rule (on page 50) in Piping Rules (on page 46).

You can now decide which items CADWorx automatically updates when using the Change Size, Change Spec, or automatic update of data options with the Apply Change Data Rule. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule (on page 51).

You can now have CADWorx audit your data on startup to check for removed XDATA using AuditDataOnStartup variable. For more information, see AuditDataOnStartup (on page 30).

You can now see which components have had XDATA removed by using the CWSHOWNOXD command. For more information, see Show Removed XDATA (on page 30).

You can now restore XDATA to components that have had XDATA removed by using the CWADDXD command. For more information, see Restore XDATA (on page 31).

Manual

A new topic was added detailing connection points and SKEY for ISOGEN export when dealing with user shapes. For more information, see ISOGEN Export Options (on page 159).

Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R1 - July 2012:

You can display help by typing MANUAL on the command line. For more information, see Online Help (on page 21).

You can now select your drawing environment type by the Drawing Prototype variable. For more information, see Drawing Prototype (on page 30).

You can now convert components into 3D Enhanced mode. For more information, see Convert to 3D enhanced (on page 72).

You can now update the project data of components in your drawing by using the CONVERTFROMPRJDATA command. For more information, see Convert from project data (on page 72).

You can now change CADWorx Components to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata by using the CWEXPLODE command. For more information, see CWexplode. (on page 72).

You can now edit the assembly path of an assembly using the ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS command. For more information, see Edit an assembly path (on page 101).

You can now redefine connection points for a user shape by using the EDITUSERSHAPE command. For more information, see Edit by redefining connection points (on page 159).

You can now use the PIPW1 (Buttweld pipe), PIPF1 (Socket Weld or Threaded pipe), and PIPFL1 (Flanged pipe) commands to draw single pipe components. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333).

ElbowCenterLines are only available in 2D and Isometric modes. For more information, see ElbowCenterLine (on page 34).

Detail information has been added to LayerByLineNumber. For more information, see LayerByLineNumber (on page 35).

You can now reload a project file after changes have been made by clicking Reload File. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

Preface


You can now stop xdata from appearing in the bill of materials or components by using the CONVERTEXISTING command. This command was previously known as the EXIST command. For more information, see Convert Existing (on page 72).

You can now refresh your project from changes made to your selected specification by clicking Reload*.prj File. For more information, see Spec View Tab (on page 76).

You can now reload the global file by right clicking and selecting Reload Global File. For more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 99).

Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 - March 2012:

You can now change the size of components by using the CHANGESIZE command. For more information, see Change Size (on page 57).

You can now change the specification of components by using the CHANGESPEC command. For more information, see Change Specification (on page 60).

You can now create assemblies using the CADWorx Assembly Manager. For more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 99).

You can now auto route all components using the ROUTE command. For more information, see Auto Route (on page 189).

You can now set Piping Rules for CADWorx. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) in Setup (on page 26).

Toolbars (on page 327) contain more information on how to model in 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329), Plane versus Isometrics view modes (on page 328), the Compass (on page 328), and on Connecting to components (on page 328) for the new features in CADWorx.

You can now change the variable setting in the Configuration Settings in CADWorx Plant Setup. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 28).

You can now set your specification and size in the CADWorx Plant Setup. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

You can now update your configuration layers in CADWorx Plant Setup. For more information, see Configuration Layers (on page 44).

CADWorx now incorporates a new Spec Editor program. For more information see Editor (on page 57) or the Spec Editor Users Guide.

Updated all panels and toolbars to reflect changes throughout the software.

Obsolete Commands These commands are no longer available in CADWorx Plant.

AUTOISO BREAKDIST CLASSICCLASH

C2ISO C2MULTI C2TEXT

CONVERTCL ELEV2PLAN ENDBREAK

ENDFLG ENDHIDDEN ENDPIPE

ENDPLAIN EXIST GEARELEV

HEAD INSERTMODE INSULATION

ISOCFG ISOOUT LEVERELEV

LINEPIPE NODEPLACE NORHTELEV

OFFSETCL OPERPLAN OSYELEV

Preface


PIPEIN PIPEOUT PUMP

RECT ROLLEDFLG ROLLEDPLAIN

SETANGLE SOUTHELEV SPECCHG

SPECCHGTOGGLE TANK VESSEL

VESSELOD WESTELEV 3DFOLLOW

Online Help To access the CADWorx Plant Help, type MANUAL on the command line, and then press ENTER. This help file includes the Plant book, the Spec Editor book, and the CADWorx Plant Tutorial.

Preface



S E C T I O N 1

Before you begin using CADWorx Plant, you need to set options and some basic configuration tasks.

Your project administrator needs to review and update the catalog (.cat) and project (.prj) file in the Spec Editor before modeling begins.

In This Section Startup Defaults ............................................................................. 23 Support Directory ........................................................................... 23 MVSetup ........................................................................................ 24

Startup Defaults When starting CADWorx Plant for the first time, you are prompted for the system of measurement to use in the drawing. This dialog box only displays the first time you start CADWorx. After that, the configuration file name and location is stored in the registry. The following options are available:

Imperial Measurements - Imperial Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Imperial.cfg file.

Metric Measurements - Imperial Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Metric.cfg file.

Metric Measurements - Metric Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Metric.cfg file.

Support Directory Drawings in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder should not be opened with CADWorx Plant. If a drawing is started in this folder, an error displays indicating that the software should not be run from this location. This stops CADWorx from initializing or preparing the support drawings. Directly open AutoCAD to modify these drawings.

To create a base profile, see Creating a Base Profile (on page 514).

Setup

Setup


MVSetup Plant menu: Utility > MVSetup

Plant uses the MVSETUP.LSP file supplied by AutoCAD. The software also supplies a simplified version of the MVSETUP.DFS file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder. If this file is deleted, the software recreates it.

The MVSETUP.DFS file can be modified to include additional title blocks. Plant uses these title blocks with the Setup (on page 26) function. The MVSetup routine has options that allow you to add and delete title blocks. Plant supplies its own title blocks for your convenience. Plant title blocks have attributes attached for ease of labeling.


S E C T I O N 2

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec

Command Name Command Line

Setup - Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawings. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

SETUP

Main Size - Specifies the specification, and the main and reduction sizes. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

SETSIZE, SETSPEC

Optional Items - Places a component when the component type in the specification has an optional component. For more information, see Optional Items (on page 55).

SPECOPTION

Size - Sets the main and reduction size by selecting a component. For more information, see Size (on page 56).

COMP2SIZE

Spec - Sets the current specification by selecting a component. For more information, see Spec (on page 56).

COMP2SPEC

Size-Spec - Sets the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component. For more information, see Size-Spec (on page 57).

COMP2SIZESPEC

Editor - Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).

SPECEDIT

Change Size - Modifies the size of the components selected. For more information, see Change Size (on page 57).

CHANGESIZE

Change Specification - Modifies the specification of the components selected. For more information, see Change Specification (on page 60).

CHANGESPEC

Local Edit - Modifies the properties of an existing component. For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62).

CEDIT

Global Edit - Modifies the properties of multiple components. For more information, see Global Edit (on page 68).

GCEDIT

3D Solids - Converts selected components to 3D solid mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 3D Solids (on page 71).

CONVERTSOLID

Convert Isometric - Converts selected components to isometric mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and Convert Isometric (on page 71).

CONVERTISO

Setup Size/Spec Panel



2D Double Line - Converts selected components to 2D double line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 2D Double Line (on page 71).

CONVERTDOUBLE

2D Single Line - Converts selected components to 2D single line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 2D Single Line (on page 71).

CONVERTSINGLE

Socket Weld - Sets the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. For more information, see Socket Weld (on page 73).

—

Threaded - Sets the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. For more information, see Threaded (on page 73).

—

Settings - Displays the current drawing settings. For more information, see Settings (on page 73).

CURRENT

Xref Edit - Views sizes or information within the component XREF. For more information, see Xref Edit (on page 73).

XCEDIT

Spec Change Toggle - Turns the TAG value update on or off. SPECCHGTOGGLE

Setup

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup

Setting toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: Setup

Command line: SETUP

Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing. This command displays the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box.



CADWorx Plant Setup Dialog Box

Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing.

Current Drawing - Displays the current default values for Specification / Size. Sets the Colors, Drawing Mode, and Fitting Mode.

Specification / Size - Displays the current settings for the specification and size:

Main Size - Displays the main size set for the drawing.

Reduction Size - Displays the reduction size set for the drawing.

Specification - Displays the specification set for the drawing.

Colors - Sets the default colors in the drawing:

Compass - Sets the compass color. The compass can also be turned off here.

Dimension - Sets the dimensions color. The dimensions can also be turned off here.

Highlight - Sets the highlight color.

Drawing Mode - Sets the default drawing mode:

3D Solids - Draws components in 3D mode.

2D Double Line - Draws components in 2D with double lines mode.



2D Single Line - Draws components in 2D with a single line mode.

3D Enhanced - Draws components in 3D enhanced mode.

You can convert the drawing to another mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70).

Fitting Mode - Specifies the fitting mode for hub-based components. Select one of the following:

Socket - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the socket welded section of the specification.

Threaded - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the threaded section of the specification.

Configuration Settings - Sets the values for the configuration. For more information, see Startup Variables (on page 28).

Specification / Size - Sets the specification and sizes of the drawing. Specification must be set before sizes can be set. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

Configuration Layers - Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors of the layers. Default layers are provided. You can add and delete layers.

Piping Rules - Sets the piping rules in the drawing. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46).

Save As - Saves the current configuration.

Load - Loads a saved configuration.

Apply & Close - Accepts the settings and closes the dialog box. Settings are immediately applied to the current drawing.

Cancel - Cancels the operation.

Help - Displays the CADWorx Plant Users Guide help file.

Configuration Settings Specifies values for the selected configuration setting.

The default drawing template, Imperial.dwt (Metric.dwt for metric) is also stored in the registry. Each time the software is started, the default template is used.

The drawing parameters are setup during installation for imperial or metric in the setup profile. If you want to change the configuration setting to the drawing parameters, use the SystemMeasure (on page 41) variable to change the drawing settings.

Configuration Settings - Displays variables to change. Change variable values in the text box list. For more information, see Startup Variables (on page 28).

If the configuration settings permission is set to read-only, only the Cancel button is available.

Startup Variables

Provides default drawing and component values. You can modify the variables in the configuration setting as needed. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 28). The most recent configuration settings are stored in the registry and are used the next time you start Plant.



Topics Drawing Prototype ......................................................................... 30 AlphaSizeControl ........................................................................... 30 AuditDataOnStartup ....................................................................... 30 AutoDimensionBox ........................................................................ 31 BomBoltControl .............................................................................. 31 BomScheduleDirection .................................................................. 32 BomScheduleSpacing ................................................................... 32 BomTagGridFactor ........................................................................ 32 BomTagOptimize ........................................................................... 32 BomTagRadiusFactor .................................................................... 32 BomTagSpacingFactor .................................................................. 32 BoltRoundControl .......................................................................... 33 CADWorxMaterial .......................................................................... 33 CAESARMaterial ........................................................................... 33 CAESARMemory ........................................................................... 33 CAESARTolerance ........................................................................ 33 CAESARVersion ............................................................................ 34 DataBaseCodesISOGEN ............................................................... 34 DimensionsExcludedSlope ............................................................ 34 DimensionsExistingISOGEN ......................................................... 34 ElbowCenterLine ........................................................................... 34 FittingWidth .................................................................................... 35 HVACLibraryDirectory ................................................................... 35 ISOGENDefaultStyle ..................................................................... 35 LanguageFile ................................................................................. 35 LayerByLineNumber ...................................................................... 35 LibraryDirectory ............................................................................. 37 LineNumberSystem ....................................................................... 37 PipeDescriptionCat ........................................................................ 38 PipeSupportDirectory ..................................................................... 38 PipeSupportSetting ........................................................................ 38 SaveLastProfileUsed ..................................................................... 39 SingleLineWidth ............................................................................. 39 SpecificationDirectory .................................................................... 39 SpecificationDefaultProject ............................................................ 39 SpecSizeOverride .......................................................................... 39 SteelCopeBoltDistance .................................................................. 39 SteelCopeWeldDistance ................................................................ 40 SteelLibraryDirectory ..................................................................... 40 SteelNeutralAxis ............................................................................ 40 SteelPartNumberFile ..................................................................... 40 SteelRoundControl ........................................................................ 40 SteelRoundUnit .............................................................................. 41 SteelToolTipSetting ....................................................................... 41 SyncOnStartUp .............................................................................. 41 SystemMeasure ............................................................................. 41 TemplateDatabaseFile ................................................................... 41 ToolTipSetting ................................................................................ 41 TopWorksSetting ........................................................................... 42 UseObjectsFromXrefs ................................................................... 42 WeldDotSize .................................................................................. 42 WeldGapToDB ............................................................................... 42



Drawing Prototype

Default value: English/Inch Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric

Enables you to select a drawing environment type:

Metric/Metric - Uses the Metric dimensions with Metric pipe sizes.

English/Inch - Uses the Imperial dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.

Metric/Inch - Uses the Metric dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.

AlphaSizeControl

Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10

Controls the number of decimal places used in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to zero places no decimals in Alpha Size. Setting the variable to a value from 1 to 9 places 1 to 9 decimal places in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to 10 suppresses trailing zeros in Alpha Size.

Example with a value of 0:

For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4 1/2" or 6" would be 6"

For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60


For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.500" or 6" would be 6.000"

For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50.000 or 60.3 would be 60.300


For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.5" or 6" would be 6"

For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60.3

If you want decimals to display in Alpha Size in Imperial or Metric, the recommended setting is 10.

AuditDataOnStartup

Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1

Controls when CADWorx checks components for removed XDATA when opening a drawing.

0 - Checking for removed XDATA is turned off.

1 - Checking for removed XDATA is turned on.

Show Removed XDATA

Command line: CWSHOWNOXD

Highlights components where XDATA has been removed.

1. Type CWSHOWNOXD on the command line, and then press ENTER.

2. Type S on the command line or E to select the entire drawing, and then press ENTER.

3. Select the component that you want to change, and then press ENTER.

Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option in step 2.

The components with XDATA removed highlight in the drawing.



Restore XDATA

Command line: CWADDXD

Restores removed XDATA from a selected specification to a CADWorx component.

1. Type CWADDXD on the command line, and then press ENTER.




Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option in step 2.

The XDATA is added to the component(s).

To restore the xdata of a component, you must use the original specification from that component.

AutoDimensionBox

Default value: No Allowed values: No, Yes

Controls boxes around rolling offset automatic dimensions when using Automatic . When set to Yes, a box is drawn for the rolling offset.

For more information, see Automatic (on page 196).

BomBoltControl

Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3

Specifies bolt placement in the Plant ISOGEN bill of material schedules.

0 - Places the quantity for a set in the pre-CADWorx 2002 format, such as:

QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = (8) Studs with nuts

1 - Places the quantity for total bolts, and strips the set number from the long description, such as:

QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = Studs with nuts

2 - Places the quantity for a set, the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the bolt diameter to the long description, such as:

QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = (8) 3/4" Studs with nuts.

3 - Places the quantity for total bolts, strips the set number from the long description, places the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the bolt diameter to the long description, such as:

QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = 3/4" Studs with nuts

When this option is set to 1 or 3, the long description of the bolt must contain the number of bolts in the set enclosed by parenthesis. The software uses the value in parenthesis as the new quantity. The number is then automatically removed from the long description when displayed in the material list.



BomScheduleDirection

Default value: Yes Allowed values: No or Yes

Specifies the direction of the bill of materials schedule.

No - Places the bill of materials schedule in the upward direction, with the column headings at the bottom.

Yes - Places the bill of materials schedule in the downward direction, with the column headings at the top.

BomScheduleSpacing

Default value: 0.25 Allowed values: Positive real

Controls the spacing on the bill of material schedule.

BomTagGridFactor


Controls the bill of material tag grid density on the drawing.

When BomTagOptimize (on page 32) is set to 2, set this variable to 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, or 3.0.

BomTagOptimize

Default value: 2 Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2

Specifies the tagging algorithm used for the bill of material.

0 - The tagging algorithm is off.

1 - The algorithm is on, but does not stack any tags.

2 - The algorithm is on. Flange, bolt, and gasket tags are stacked.

BomTagRadiusFactor


Controls the radius of tag bubbles. Bubbles are sized using this factor multiplied by the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE.

BomTagSpacingFactor


Controls how far bill of materials bubbles are spaced from the model or components within the drawing.



BoltRoundControl


Specifies the rounding for bolt length calculations.

0 - No rounding is performed.

1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.

2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.

3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.

CADWorxMaterial

Default value: No Allowed values: No or Yes

Controls CADWorx material generation when using System In . For more information, see System In (on page 174).

No - The software bases component descriptions in CADWorx on the material types in CAESAR II. The CADWorx component name is combined with the CAESAR II material type.

Yes - The software bases component descriptions in CADWorx on the specifications. Material types from CAESAR II are ignored.

The component name is defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Prgm.tbl file.

CAESARMaterial


Controls CAESAR II material generation when using System Out . For more information, see System Out (on page 152).

0 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the pipe

material defined in Spec Editor . This does not apply if the component was originally created in CAESAR II.

1 - Provides basic material types in CAESAR II (1-17) corresponding to the component material long description in the specification.

2 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the actual component material long description in the specification.

When using CAESAR II version 3.23, only option 1 can be used.

CAESARMemory


Specifies the amount of computer RAM used when importing a large CAESAR II input model. This variable is not required, but is helpful if the import is failing. The value is multiplied by megabytes.

CAESARTolerance


Specifies the tolerance for items that are not transferring correctly to CAESAR II. For example, hangers placed on a skewed line sometimes fail and require a larger tolerance factor.



CAESARVersion

Default value: 5.20 Allowed values: 5.20 or 2011

Specifies the format of the CAESAR II .c2 input file created by CADWorx. The value should match the version of CAESAR II that you are using.

DataBaseCodesISOGEN


Specifies how CADWorx ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system.

No - The DataBaseCodes system is not used. CADWorx Plant creates generic item code combinations for each run of ISOGEN, starting at 1 for each run. Components with identical long annotation and specification file names are given the same item-code combination.

Yes - ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system.

If this option is set to Yes and a valid DataBaseCodes system is not established, bill of material generation within ISOGEN is not correct.

DimensionsExcludedSlope


Specifies the minimum percentage slope (rise/run) for automatic dimensioning of the vertical leg

of sloped pipe when using Automatic . If the pipe slope is under the specified value, then the vertical leg dimension and the associated hatched graphics for the rise are not placed. The horizontal dimension is still placed.

For more information, see Automatic (on page 196).

DimensionsExistingISOGEN


Controls ISOGEN isometric representation of existing components.

0 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are dimensioned.

1 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are not dimensioned.

2 - Existing components are exported with solid lines and are dimensioned.

Individual ISOGEN dimension settings override this setting. For more information, see ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64).

ElbowCenterLine

Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0 (off) or 1 (on)

Controls square elbow centerlines on elbow-type components. When set to 1, an additional square centerline is drawn without drawing square elbow graphics. These lines appear in 2D double line and Isometric modes only.

You can also control this variable by setting the Elbow Centerline in CADWorx Plant menu: Utilities > Drawing Control > Elbow Centerline.



FittingWidth


Specifies the appearance of all flanged, socket welded, and threaded fittings. When set to 1.0, the software draws fitting hubs or flange ODs at 100% of the width specified in their data file. This variable is useful at a value of 0.7 when drawing socket weld and threaded type hub fittings where the hubs overlap.

HVACLibraryDirectory

Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\HVAC Allowed values: Valid directory name

Defines the location of the data files folder used for HVAC components.

ISOGENDefaultStyle

Default value: <none> Allowed values: Full path to an Isogen.fls file

Specifies the ISOGEN style used by ISOGEN Out and ISOGEN Batch .

For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104) and ISOGEN Batch (on page 106).

When this variable is defined, ISOGEN Out does not display the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box.

LanguageFile

Default value: English.dic Allowed values: A valid and properly formatted language file

Specifies the language of all Plant dialog boxes and prompts. The specified file must be present in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder for proper operation of Plant.

LayerByLineNumber

Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4

Specifies the layers for component placement.

0

a. Solid:

i. the layer name of the solid is based on PRJ layer entry.

ii. "_" is placed in front of the layer name: For example: 150 spec is on layer _150.

iii. The color of the solid is set according to the table below:

Component level color PRJ

Spec level color PRJ

Spec layer color in model DWG file

Entity Color Set to By Layer

Same Color Same Color Same Color

Entity Color Set to component level PRJ

Same Color Same Color Different Color

Entity Color Set to By Layer

Same Color Different Color Same Color

Entity Color Set to component level PRJ

Same Color Different Color Different Color



b. Center line

i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting.

ii. The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting.

iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting.

iv. Any changes to Setup > Layers > Centerline Settings changes the existing centerlines in the DWG file.

1

a. Solid

i. The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name.

ii. The color of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.

iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.

iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file.

b. Centerline: Same implementation as Solid.

2

a. Solid:

i. The layer name of the solid is based on the Line Number name.

ii. The color of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.

iii. The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.

iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing solid in the DWG file.

b. Centerline:

i. he layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting.



iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing centerline in the DWG File.

3

a. Solid

i. The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name.

ii. The color of the solid and center line has the same implementation for solid color as LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in the table above.

iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.

iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file.

b. Centerline: Same implementation as the Solid.



4

a. Solid:

i. The layer name for solid is based on the Line Number name.

ii. The color of the solid has the same implementation for solid color as LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in table above.

iii. The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.

iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing solid in the DWG file.

b. Centerline:

i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl setting.



iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing centerline in the DWG file.

LibraryDirectory

Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant Allowed values: Valid folder name

Defines the location of the component data files folder used with a specification. Each component type has a separate sub-folder. For more information, see Specification and Data Files (on page 511).

This folder can be set as read-only.

LineNumberSystem

Default value: 1 Allowed values: 0 (off), 1 (on), or 2 (static)

Specifies the line number system.

0 - Line numbers are manually entered.

1 - Size, spec, and count number are used for the line number

2 - Count number is used for the line number.



PipeDescriptionCat

Default value: 0 Allowed values: 0 through 6

Specifies the addition of end types to the long description and DataBaseCodes variable for:

Small-bore threaded or socket-welded pipe when using Thrd/SW Pipe . For more information, see Thrd/SW Pipe (on page 455).

Nipple components when using Nipple . For more information, see Nipple (on page 456).

Small-bore pipe that is broken by an inserted component when using Router . For more information, see Router (on page 191).

The following end descriptions are provided:

BBE - Bevel x bevel

BOE-TOE - Bevel x threaded

BOE-POE - Bevel x plain

PBE - Plain x plain

POE-TOE - Plain x threaded

TBE - Threaded x threaded

0 - End types are not added to any components.

1 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for pipe and nipples.

2 - End types are added to long descriptions for pipe and nipples.

3 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for pipe only.

4 - End types are added to long descriptions for pipe only.

5 - End types are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for nipple only.

6 - End types are added to long descriptions for nipples only.

This setting works in conjunction with Apply Pipe End Prep Rule. Both must be set to display, (Automatic for Apply Pipe End Prep Rule and 1 through 6 for PipeDescriptionCat) or the PipeDescriptionCat does not display on the Long annotation of the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Apply Pipe End Prep Rule (on page 49).

PipeSupportDirectory

Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\PipeSupport Allowed values: Valid directory name

Defines the location of the pipe support parametric data files used with the current configuration settings.

PipeSupportSetting


Specifies the layer for pipe support component placement.

0 - The pipe support is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.

1 - The pipe support is placed on the same layer as the connecting pipe or elbow component.

2 - The pipe support is placed on a new layer. The layer name is derived by appending the component layer name and the pipe support layer name. For example, if the pipe solid is on layer _150, and the pipe support layer name is SUPT, then the pipe support is on new layer _150SUPT.



SaveLastProfileUsed


Specifies whether CADWorx saves the last profile used on exit.

When a drawing file is double-clicked in Windows Explorer, or if AutoCAD is started using an icon without specifying any profile, AutoCAD always loads the last profile used.

No - Prevents CADWorx from saving the last profile used.

Yes - Allows CADWorx to save the last profile used.

SingleLineWidth


Specifies the default width for a single line pipe.

SpecificationDirectory

Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec Allowed values: Valid folder

Provides the location of the specifications folder.


SpecificationDefaultProject

Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec Allowed values: Valid folder

Specifies the spec default project file name.

This is the data file where all the specification information for all components is stored. This file can be opened using the Spec Editor. When modeling the information is accessed using this file to create the components. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).

SpecSizeOverride


Controls the ability to override component specification and size. If override is turned off, you are not able to draw out of spec or out of size.

Yes - Overrides the specification and size limits.

No - Limits drawing to values within specification and size limits.

SteelCopeBoltDistance

Default value: 0.5 (Imperial) 15 (Metric) Allowed values: Positive real

Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the bolted method of Cope

. For more information, see Cope (on page 280).



SteelCopeWeldDistance


Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the welded method of Cope

. For more information, see Steel - Cope (on page 280).

SteelLibraryDirectory

Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_I ([Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_M for metric) Allowed values: Valid folder name

Locates the data file used for drawing Steel. The data files can be located anywhere on the computer, local network, or wide area network.


SteelNeutralAxis


Specifies the location of centerlines for steel channels and angles.

0 - The centerline is drawn at the X--column value specified in the channel or angle data files.

1 - The centerline is drawn at the midpoint of the flange.

2 - The centerline is drawn on the inside of the flange. Use this value if channels and angles are coped with other members.

3 - The centerline is drawn on the outside of the flange. Use this value if channels and angles are mitered with other members.

SteelPartNumberFile

Default value: SamplePartNumbers.dat Allowed values: Valid and properly formatted part number file

Specifies the file containing part numbers that can be automatically entered for a steel member component. When a steel member is drawn, the software searches the data file for a matching member type and member name. If found, the software then retrieves the part number and saves it with the member component.

SteelRoundControl


Specifies the rounding of values read from the steel data files.

0 - No rounding is performed.

1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on page 41).

2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on page 41).

3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on page 41).



SteelRoundUnit


Specifies the rounding multiple of values read from the steel data files. This variable is used with SteelRoundControl (on page 40).

SteelToolTipSetting

Default value: 4235 Allowed values: Positive integer

Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a steel component. Click the ellipsis in the value box next to SteelToolTipSetting to open the Tool Tip Data Selection dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then displayed for those settings.

SyncOnStartUp


Controls the synchronize option on opening a drawing with an external database:

0 - Turns off the synchronize option when a drawing is loaded into AutoCAD.

1 - Asks if the software should synchronize the drawing with the external database.

2 - Synchronizes the drawing with the external database without prompting.

When you click Synchronize , values 0 and 1 provide a prompt. Value 2 synchronizes without any prompts.

SystemMeasure

Default value: English/Inch Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric

Specifies the unit system:

Metric/Metric - Uses the metric system with metric input.

English/Inch - Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input.

Metric/Inch - Uses the metric system with nominal inch input.

TemplateDatabaseFile

Default value: Pipe.mdb Allowed values: Valid Microsoft Access database file name

Specifies the database file that is used with a bill of material.

ToolTipSetting

Default value: 8405 Allowed values: Positive integer

Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a component. Click the ellipsis next to ToolTipSetting in Configuration Settings to open the Tool Tip Data Selection dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then displayed for those settings.



TopWorksSetting

Default value: 1 Allowed values: 0 through 4

Specifies the layers for top works component placement.

0 - Top works are not added to the valve even if a top works file is set in the specification file.

1 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is combined with the valve solid to create one solid.

2 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and center line. The top works solid is placed on the same layer as the valve solid.

3 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and center line. The top works solid is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.

4 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and center line. The top works solid id placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings. The layer name is derived by appending the valve layer name and the top works layer name. For example, when the valve is on layer _150, and the top works layer name is TOP, the top works solid is on layer _150TOP.

UseObjectsFromXrefs


Allows objects from Xrefs (external references) to be used during the selection process.

No - Objects from Xrefs are not used.

Yes - Objects from Xrefs are used for the current command.

WeldDotSize


Specifies the default weld dot size on single-line, butt-welded piping components.

WeldGapToDB

Default value: Yes

Allowed values: No or Yes

Sets automatic weld gaps to database on or off.

Yes - Weld gaps are shown in the Bill of Material schedule.

No - Weld gaps are not shown in the Bill of Material schedule



Set Specification and Size

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup > Specification / Size

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Main Size

Setting toolbar: Main Size

Setting toolbar: Specification

Command line: SETSIZE, SETSPEC

Displays the Set Specification and Size dialog box in which you specify a .spc drawing specification file, a main size and a reduction size.

Browse - Enables you to open the project specification needed for your drawing.

Reload File - Reloads the project (.prj) selected for any changes made in the specification editor. Alternatively, type RELOADPROJECTFILE on the command line and press ENTER.

M - Sets the selected row as the main size.

R - Sets the selected row as the reduction size.

OK - Accepts the selected main and reduction sizes and closes the dialog box.

Cancel - Cancels the operation.

CADWorx Plant specifications are delivered to the [Product Folder]\<sSubProduct>\Spec folder. CADWorx P&ID also provides specifications delivered to the [Product Folder]\P&ID\Spec folder. If Plant and P&ID are used together, you should select specifications from a single folder. For more information, see SpecificationDirectory (on page 39).

The list of available sizes is controlled by [Product Folder]\Plant\System\SetSize.Tbl (English/inches), SetSizeA.tbl (Metric/inches), and SetSizeM.tbl (Metric/mm).

Set Specification & Size Dialog Box

1. Click Setup > Specification / Size. Alternatively, click Main Size or type SETSPEC or SETSIZE, and press ENTER.

The Set Specification & Size dialog box displays.

2. Click Browse.

The Open window displays.

3. Navigate to the proper specification, and click Open.

The Specification list populates.

4. Select a specification from the list. This must be done before sizes can be selected.

The Main / Reduction size populates.

5. Select a main size and a reduction size from the list. They can be selected in any order.

6. Click OK.

The specification and main and reduction sizes are set.



Configuration Layers Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors of the layers. Default layers are provided. You can add and delete layers.

The default layers are mandatory for use with Plant and cannot be deleted. See the tables below.

Layer changes made in this dialog box affect the current drawing session similar to the AutoCAD LAYER command.

The commands in this dialog box are inactive if the configuration settings permission is set to read-only.

Layer Name - Specifies the layer name. The layer name can be anything that is allowed by AutoCAD. Wild card characters and spaces are not allowed. Click Update to change the name.

New - Adds a new layer with a default name. New layers are created when the drawing is initialized with Plant. Access this option by right-clicking in the layer name column.

Delete - Removes the selected layer from the list. You cannot delete default layers. Access this option by right-clicking in the layer name column.

Linetype - Specifies the line type for the selected layer. Select a value in the Select Linetype dialog box.

Line types are defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support\Cfm.lin and [AutoCAD Product Folder]\UserDataCache\Support\acad.lin files.

Color - Displays the Select Color dialog box for selecting the color of the layer.

CADWorx Plant, Plant, PV Fabricator Layers

Layer# Default Name Layer is used for

Layer1 System Non-graphical components

Layer2 Border Border drawing

Layer3 BOM BOM graphics

Layer4 Cl Centerline of piping components

Layer5 Dim1 Dimensions

Layer6 Dim2 Dimensions

Layer7 Equip Plant components

Layer8 Exist Existing components

Layer9 Graph Graphics annotations (Arrows, Section, Plan, Detail Labels)

Layer10 Steel Steel components

Layer11 Text Text annotations

Layer12 Viewl Viewports

Layer13 Cl_Steel Centerline of steel components

Layer14 HVAC HVAC components

Layer15 Cl_HVAC Centerline of HVAC components




Layer16 TopWorks Valve TopWorks solid

Layer17 Clash Clash entity

Layer18 Supports Pipe Support

Layer19 CADWorx1 Future use

Layer20 CADWorx2 Future use

Layer21 to Layer100

(User Defined) (User Defined)

CADWorx P&ID Layers


Layer1 System Non-graphical components

Layer2 Border Border drawing

Layer3 Major-1 Major Process Lines 1

Layer4 Major-2 Major Process Lines 2

Layer5 Minor-1 Minor Process Lines 1

Layer6 Minor-2 Minor Process Lines 2

Layer7 Inst-1 Instrument Lines 1

Layer8 Inst-2 Instrument Lines 2

Layer9 Elec1 Electrical Lines 1

Layer10 Elec-2 Electrical Lines 2

Layer11 Equip Plant

Layer12 Text Text

Layer13 Graph Graphics

Layer14 Exist Existing

Layer15 to Layer100

(User Defined) (User Defined)

If the Cl and Cl_Steel layers are frozen or turned off, some CADWorx commands might not function because data is stored on the centerline that is on these layers.



Piping Rules Sets the piping rules for the drawing. These rules govern how the drawing is affected for each piece of pipe or component drawn. The options you select affect the responses you receive from the system.

Topics Apply Size Rule ............................................................................. 46 Apply Specification Rule ................................................................ 46 Apply End Type Rule ..................................................................... 47 Apply Pipe Length Rule ................................................................. 47 Apply Weld Insertion Rule ............................................................. 47 Apply Gasket Insertion Rule .......................................................... 47 Apply Bolt Insertion Rule ............................................................... 47 Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule ........................................................... 48 Apply Pipe Healing Rule ................................................................ 48 Apply Branch Table Rule ............................................................... 48 Apply Flange Insertion Rule ........................................................... 48 Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule ................................................... 48 Apply Pipe End Prep Rule ............................................................. 49 Center Line .................................................................................... 49 Apply Auto Coupling Rule .............................................................. 49 Apply Line Number Rule ................................................................ 50 Apply Change Data Rule ............................................................... 51

Apply Size Rule

Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic, Show Options

Sets the system to check the size of components when components are inserted.

No - Does not check the size of components when components are inserted.

Automatic - Checks the size of components when components are inserted.

Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the component being connected to.

Apply Specification Rule


Sets the system to check the specification of components when components are inserted.

No - Does not check the specification of components when components are inserted.

Automatic - Checks the specification of components when components are inserted.




Apply End Type Rule


Sets the system to check the connection between two components.

No - Does not check the connection of components when components are inserted.

Automatic - Checks the connection of components when components are inserted.


Apply Pipe Length Rule


Sets the system to check the pipe length when pipe is inserted.

No - Does not check the pipe length of components when components are inserted.

Automatic - Checks the pipe length of components when components are inserted.


Apply Weld Insertion Rule

Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic - Buttweld Only, Automatic - Socket Weld Only, Automatic - Buttweld and Socket Weld

Specifies auto insert of weld gap to components.

No - Does not insert weld gaps.

Automatic - Buttweld Only - Inserts weld gaps on buttweld connections only.

Automatic - Socket Weld Only - Inserts weld gaps on socket weld connections only.

Automatic - Buttweld and Socket Weld - Inserts weld gaps on buttweld and socket weld connections.

Apply Gasket Insertion Rule

Default value: No Allowed values: No or Automatic

Inserts a gasket to a component automatically when needed.

No - Does not insert gaskets automatically to valves or flanges.

Automatic - Inserts gaskets automatically to valves or flanges.

Apply Bolt Insertion Rule


Inserts bolts to flanges automatically.

No - Does not insert bolts automatically to valves or flanges.

Automatic - Inserts bolts automatically to valves or flanges.



Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule


Places trimmed buttweld elbows in the drawing when using ROUTE.

No - Does not allow for trimmed buttweld elbows.

Automatic - Router allows for trimmed buttweld elbows.

Apply Pipe Healing Rule


Heals buttweld pipe when in-line components are erased.

No - Does not heal buttweld pipe for in-line components when erased.

Automatic - Heals buttweld pipe for in-line components when erased..

Apply Branch Table Rule


Sets the system to check the branch table when branch components are inserted.

No - Does not check the branch table.

Automatic - Checks the branch table when branch components are inserted.

Apply Flange Insertion Rule

Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic - Use Spec Setting, Automatic - Flange Socket Weld, Automatic - Flange Threaded, Automatic - Long Weld Neck, Automatic - Flange Weld Neck, Automatic - Flange Slip On, Show Options

Controls the rule of automatically inserting a flange. Sets the system for automatic type and insertion of flanges.

No - Does not allow for automatic insertion of a flange.

Automatic - Inserts selected flange type automatically.


Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule

Default value: Automatic - 2 Holes Allowed values: Automatic - 1 Hole, Automatic - 2 Holes, Show Options - Specify Input Angle

Specifies the bolt hole orientation of a flange.



Apply Pipe End Prep Rule


Sets the end preparation of connections in conjunction with PipeDescriptionCat. The description displays in the Long annotation of the Component Edit dialog box.

No - Does not set the end prep of components when components are inserted.

Automatic - Sets the pipe end prep of components when components are inserted.

Show Options - Displays option prompts to set or not set the pipe end prep.

The PipeDescriptionCat must be set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule must be set to Automatic for the pipe end preparation descriptions to appear.

If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to Automatic the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display.

If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to No the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display.

If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to Show Options you are prompted to set the pipe end preparation. Selecting No does not set the pipe end preparation and does not display a description. This is the case even with the PipeDescriptionCat set to 1 through 6. Selecting Yes displays the description unless the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0.

For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat (on page 38).

Center Line

Default value: On Allowed values: On, Off

Indicates whether the centerline of the components displays.

Apply Auto Coupling Rule

Default value: No Allowed values: No, Automatic - Pipe Breaks Only, Automatic - All Connections, Show Options

Sets the system to insert a coupling when routing components.

No - Does not add a coupling when routing components.

Automatic - Pipe Breaks Only - Adds a coupling when routing components with socket weld or threaded piping, when the pipe breaks at the maximum length. You must set the Apply Pipe Length Rule to Automatic or Show Options or couplings are not added.

Automatic - All Connections - Adds a coupling at all connections while routing.

Show Options - Displays option prompts, when routing, to inset a coupling. This happens when using socket weld or threaded piping or when the pipe breaks at the maximum length. You must set the Apply Pipe Length Rule to Automatic or Show Options or couplings are not added.



Apply Line Number Rule

Default value: Always Inherit Allowed values: Always Inherit, Show Options

Sets the system to check the line number of in-line components when a component is inserted based on the setting in line number Setup and according to the table below.

Always Inherit - Automatically inherits the line number of in-line components when a component is inserted.

Show Options - Displays option prompts for inheriting the line number on in-line components when components are inserted.

Line Number System Setup Apply Line Number Rule Setting Effect

System Off Always Inherit No Line Number Rule is applied

Show Options No Line Number Rule is applied

System On (Dynamic Size/Spec)

Always Inherit Inherit all header/parent line number parameters except the dynamic one such as Size and Spec

Show Options Show 3 different options:

1. Exact copy of parent line number.

2. Dynamic parent line number (the same parent line number except for the size and spec).

3. Current line number setup as listed in the Line Number setup.

System On (Static Size /Spec)

Always Inherit Inherit exact copy of header/parent line number

Show Options Show 2 options:

1. Exact copy of header/parent line number.

2. Current line number as shown in the Line Number setup.

For more information about Line Number System setup, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).



Apply Change Data Rule

Default value: Automatic Allowed values: Automatic, Show setting

Sets the system for items that do not update when using Change Size, Change Spec, or automatic updating of new data.

Automatic - Automatically updates the component with the information from the specification.

Show setting - Updates only the items not selected in the Apply Change Data Rule dialog box. Show setting only displays in the Apply Change Data Rule box after selecting the items from the Apply Change Data Rule dialog box. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box (on page 51).

Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box

Enables you to select the items that you want to update from the specification when using Change Spec, Change Size, or automatic updating of new data.

Automatic - Automatically updates all new data when using one of the above options.

Select data items that will NOT update with Change Size/Spec

Alpha size - Turns the alpha size update off.

Short Description - Turns the short description update off.

Tag - Turns the tag update off.

Long description - Turns the long description update off.

Database Codes - Turns the database codes update off.

Change the Data Rule update

1. Select the Apply Change Data Rule ellipsis.

2. Clear Automatic.

3. Select the items that you do not want updated, and then click OK.

Convert Legacy Drawing Default value: Off Allowed values: Off, Automatic, Show Options

Enables you to convert a 2012 drawing to 2013 components.

Convert Mode - Sets the software to recognize whether the drawing is a legacy drawing and convert it. There are three options:

Off - Indicates the software does not convert the legacy drawing when it is opened.

Automatic - Specifies that the software automatically converts the drawing to 2013 components when you open the drawing.

Show Options - Indicates that the software prompts you to convert the drawing to 2013 components when you open the drawing.

Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the 2012 components when a conversion is completed.

Yes - Indicates the software pulls data from the project file during the conversion.

No - Indicates the software pulls data from the legacy component during conversion.

Refresh all open palettes to update contents after running the CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS command.



CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup > Convert Legacy Drawing and then set Convert Mode to Show Options

Command line: CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS

Converts the components of a legacy drawing to 2013 components.

Available specifications in project - Specifies if there are any available specifications in the selected project for conversion.

Legacy specification used in model - Specifies the specifications that the software uses in the legacy model.

Match - Matches the selected specification in Available specifications in project to the specification listed in Legacy specification used in model.

Auto Match - Automatically matches the specification used in the legacy model without selecting a specification from the Available specifications in project box.

Backup current drawing - Creates a backup of the legacy drawing in the folder where the legacy drawing resides.

Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the legacy components when a conversion is completed. When Use new spec data is selected, data is pulled from the selected specification in Current Project.

Current Project - Specifies the current project from which the software converts the legacy drawings.

Browse - Enables you to select a current project.

OK - Accepts the settings and converts the model.

Cancel - Cancels the legacy conversion.

Help - Accesses the online help file.

Convert Legacy using Automatic option

Set Convert Mode to Automatic.

The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components when a legacy drawing is opened.

Convert Legacy using Show Options option

1. Set Convert Mode to Show Options. For more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing (on page 51).

The CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box displays.

2. Click Browse.

The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select a PRJ file, and click Open.

The specifications display in the Available specifications in project box.

4. Select a specification used in the model in the Legacy specification used in model box.

5. Select a specification in the Available specifications in project box, and click Match.

Clicking Auto Match automatically selects the matching specification for the drawing based on the specification used in the legacy drawing. If you want to use a different specification for the 2013 drawing, such as 300, you must click Match instead of Auto Match.



6. Select Backup current drawing to create a backup the drawing. This is the default option.

OR

Clear Backup current drawing so that a backup of the drawing is not created.

7. Select Use new spec data to use the spec data from the current project. This is the default option.

OR

Clear Use new spec data to use the spec data from the legacy drawing.

8. Click OK.

The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components.

Convert Legacy using the CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS command

1. Type CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS on the command line, and press ENTER.

The CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box displays.

2. Click Browse.

The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select a .prj file, and click Open.

The specifications display in the Available specifications in project box.

4. Select a specification used in the model in the Legacy specification used in model box.

5. Select a specification in the Available specifications in project box, and click Match.

Clicking Auto Match indicates that the software automatically selects the matching specification for the drawing based on the specification used in the legacy drawing. If you want to use a different specification for the 2013 drawing, such as 300, you must click Match instead of Auto Match.

6. Select Backup current drawing to create a backup the drawing. This is the default option.

OR

Clear Backup current drawing so that a backup of the drawing is not created.

7. Select Use new spec data to use the spec data from the current project. This is the default option.

OR

Clear Use new spec data to use the spec data from the legacy drawing.

8. Click OK.

The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components.

If you notice that a component does not convert to a 2013 component then the component may not be listed in the 2013 specification that you have chosen.

The software alerts you with a message if you do not have any legacy data in the drawing.

You must convert an inch drawing to an inch specification and a metric drawing to a metric specification.



Find Legacy Components Dialog Box

Command line: REVIEWLEGCAYCOMPONENTS

Enables you to search the drawing for legacy components and display the information based on the Search Options.

Search Options

Tag - Finds the legacy components based on the tag. Click in the Tag box to display components filtered by tag in the Components filtered by: Tag box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific tags.

Code - Finds the legacy components based on the code. Click in the Code box to display components filtered by code in the Components filtered by: Code box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific codes.

Line number - Finds the legacy components based on the line number. Click in the Line Number box to display components filtered by line number in the Components filtered by: Line number box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific line numbers.

Short annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the short annotation. Click in the Short annotation box to display components filtered by short annotation in the Components filtered by: Short annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific short annotations.

Long annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the long annotation. Click in the Long annotation box to display components filtered by long annotation in the Components filtered by: Long annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific long annotations.

Components filtered by: <Search Options type> - Displays the findings of the Search Options. When the software detects a legacy component the information based on the search option selected, displays in the box. The heading of the Components filtered by box is dynamic and changes depending on the Search Options item you have selected. The heading also displays the number of records for each item selected. Selecting a record displays a red arrow indication the component containing the selected information in the drawing.

OK - Closes the Find Legacy Components dialog box.



Cancel - Cancels the Find Legacy Components dialog box.

View Log File - Displays a log file of the conversions you made when using CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS.

Specification and Size Sets the specification and size using the Set Specification and Size dialog box. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

Optional Items CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Optional Items

Setting toolbar: Specification Option Toggle

Plant menu: Accessory > Specifications > Optional Items

Command line: SPECOPTION

Places a component on the drawing when the component type in the specification has an optional component (such as when a 300 lb. orifice flange is in the 150 lb. specification).

Click the command to toggle between two methods:

1. The command line message is: All components will be dialoged...

When a component type is selected, all components of that component type appear in the Optional component dialog box. For more information, see Optional Component Dialog Box (on page 55).

2. The command line message is: Specification dialog turned off...

When a component type is selected, the default component is selected for placement on the drawing. The Optional component dialog box does not appear unless the component size is out of the specification range or the component is not allowed by the specification. You can then select a component in the range. For more information, see Optional Component Dialog Box (on page 55).

Optional Component Dialog Box Specifies components for placement. Status, start size, end size, tag, long description, and short description are displayed for each component.

OK - Places the selected component on the drawing.

Default - Changes the selected component to the default component.

Using SpecSizeOverride

When the SpecSizeOverride (on page 39) variable is off, sizes are restricted to the specification range. If the selected size is not within the range, OK and Default are not available.

If SpecSizeOverride is on, the dialog box appears if the component size is not in the range. You can then select the needed component even when it is out of range.



The following table summarizes the dialog box behavior.

Component in specification?

Size in specification?

Dialog box appears?

SpecSizeOverride variable status

Dialog box behavior

Yes Yes No Off = 0 Normal operation.

Yes No No Off = 0 Error message.

Yes No No On = 1 Error message, but you can override.

Yes Yes Yes Off = 0 Dialog box shows all components including optional components, but does not allow override.

Yes No Yes Off = 0 Dialog box shows all components but OK is not available for components not in size range.

Yes No Yes On = 1 Dialog box shows all components and allows override.

No n/a No Off = 0 Error message.

You can use the Spec Editor to change components to optional components. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).

Size CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size

Setting toolbar: Size

Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size

Command line: COMP2SIZE

Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a component with the needed sizes. Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You can optionally reverse the main and reduction sizes.

Spec

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Spec

Setting toolbar: Spec

Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Spec

Command line: COMP2SPEC

Specifies the current specification by selecting a component using the needed specification.



Size-Spec

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size-Spec

Setting toolbar: Size-Spec

Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size-Spec

Command line: COMP2SIZESPEC

Specifies the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component with the needed values. Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You can optionally reverse the main and reduction sizes.

All

Setting toolbar: All

Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > All

Command line: COMP2ALL

Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and line number by selecting a component with the needed values.

This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable to 2. This is the same as having the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box selected. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

Editor Creates, views, and modifies specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77).

Change Size

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Size

Command Line: CHANGESIZE

Changes the size of the selected components based on available sizes. Sizes are based on the specification that you choose when initially setting up the drawing. This command has two functions Automatic or Manual.

Automatic - Automatically changes the entire component to the chosen size.

The Change Size command only changes the size of the line until it reaches a reducer. The software provides two options to replace a reducer to match the size change. The pipeline on the other side of the reducer maintains its size. The only way to change the size of the pipeline on both sides of a reducer is to select the reducer itself.

Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen size.

When using the manual option, the software forces you to select reducers for adjacent components that are not the same size. The manual option does not stop size changes at any point based on another component. However, unless the line on the other side of a reducer is selected it is not changed.



Large - Changes the large side of the component and anything attached to that side.

Small - Changes the small side of the component and anything attached to that side.

Both - Changes both sides of the component and anything attached to those sides.

Change current component - Changes the component to match the size change.

add Reducing component - Displays a list of reducing components.

caNcel - Does not change the size and cancels out.

What do you want to do?

Change the size automatically (on page 58)

Change the size manually (on page 58)

Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically (on page 59)

Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually (on page 59)

Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically (on page 60)

Change the size automatically

1. Click Change Size . Alternatively, type CHANGESIZE on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Press ENTER for automatic.

3. Select a component.

4. Select a size from the list that appears.

If a size is not available in the catalog for a component, the process stops, forcing you to start over.

5. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish.

Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component.

The entire drawing changes its size.

Change the size manually

When using the manual option, you must select similar components with like sizes, or the process does not work.


2. Type M for manual.

3. Select the components whose size you want to change, and press ENTER when finished.



4. Select a size from the list that appears.

The next prompt only displays if you have selected pipe lines that do not connect to each other but have a component in-between. If you do not receive the following prompt skip step 6 and continue.

5. Select the reducers as needed.


The specific components change size and add the reducers if needed.

Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically



3. Select a reducer.

4. Type Large, Small, or Both on the command line, and press ENTER.

5. Select a size from the list that displays. This is based on the choice you make in step 4.

If a size is not available in the catalog for a component the process stops, forcing you to start over.



The entire drawing changes its size.

If you change the size of a pipe on the small end of a reducer to the same size as the pipe on the large end of the reducer, the software gives you the option to change the component. If you do not change the component the process fails.

Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually

Use this option when you want to change the size of more than one reducer and the pipe lines to multiple sizes.



3. Select one or more reducers and press ENTER.

If you select more then one you might not be prompted for the sides of the reducer. This depends on the location of the chosen reducers.

4. If applicable, type Large, Small, or Both on the command line, and then press ENTER.



5. Select a size from the list. This list continues to show up for as many components as you selected.

If a size is not available in the catalog for a component the process stops, forcing you to start over.



The selected components change size.

If you change the size of a pipe on the small end of a reducer to the same size as the pipe on the large end of the reducer, the software gives you the option to change the component. If you do not change the component the process fails.

Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically




4. Select a size from the list that displays.

If a size is not available in the catalog for a component, the process stops, forcing you to start over.

5. Select all the branches in the model.

If you do not select all the branches the software prompts you to change the component. If you select No, the process fails. You may also be prompted if the size does not exist.

6. Select a component, or press ENTER to finish.

7. If prompted to fix the pipe by BOP, TOP, or Current, type an option, and press ENTER.



The selected system changes size.

Change Specification

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Spec

Command Line: CHANGESPEC

Changes the specification of the selected components. This command is based on two modes either Automatic or Manual.

Automatic - Changes all the components on the selected line to the chosen specification automatically.

The Change Specification command only changes the specification assigned to the system until it reaches a reducer. The software changes the assigned specification of the reducer, but the pipeline on the other side of the reducer keeps its original specification. The only way to change the pipe on both sides of a reducer is to select the reducer itself. Depending



on the arrangement, this action may only change the specification of the components adjacent to the reducer but not the specification of the entire model.

Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen specification.


Change the specification automatically (on page 61)

Change the specification manually (on page 61)

Change the specification of a model with branches automatically (on page 61)

Change the specification automatically

1. Click Change Spec . Alternatively, type CHANGESPEC on the command line, and press ENTER.


3. Select a pipeline.

4. Select a specification.



The entire drawing changes its specification.

Change the specification manually



3. Select the components whose specification you want to change, and press ENTER when finished.




The specification assigned to the selected components is changed.

Change the specification of a model with branches automatically



3. Select a pipeline.


If you do not select the branches in step 5, the specification changes only for the branching components. It does not change for the branch piping.

5. Select the branches.




7. Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of a component.

The specification assignment for the selected system is changed. If there is a reducer in the system, the new specification assignment only applies up to and including the reducer, not the pipeline on the other side of the reducer.

Local Edit CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Local Edit

Setting toolbar: Component Edit

Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Local Edit

Command line: CEDIT

Modifies the properties of an existing component on the drawing. This command displays the Component Edit dialog box.

Component Edit Dialog Box

Specifies properties for a component.

Alpha size - Specifies a size-only description of the component.

Short annotation - Specifies a short description of the component.

Long annotation - Specifies a long description of the component.

Line number - Specifies the line number of the component.

Tag - Specifies a tag for the component.

Code - Specifies a code for the component.

Weight - Specifies the weight per unit of a pipe component.

Sort sequence - Specifies the sort sequence of the component in the bill of material.

Length - Specifies a length for the component.

Component type - Displays the type of the component.

Specification - Displays the specification used by the component.

If Setup is used to create an external database, Synchronize can be used to change the specification in the database. For more information, see Setup Live Database (on page 142) and Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 146).

Coordinates

World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the components are automatically updated along with the pipe length.

Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175).

Miscellaneous

Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is shown as dotted and dimensioned.

Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress analysis information or insulation attached.



BOM Item Type

Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item.

Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item.

Offshore - Specifies an offshore type of bill of material item.

Misc - Specifies a miscellaneous type of bill of material item.

The selected item type appears on the bill of materials when the FLAG column is added

using Pipe BOM / DB > Setup . For ISOGEN, you must also sort by the FLAG column to group by type. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 132) and BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 134).

If Misc is selected when using ISOGEN, then ISOGEN treats the weld gap as a field-fit weld. Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase the cut piece add-on allowances for field-fit welds.

OK - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box.

Cancel - Cancels the operation without saving modifications, and closes the dialog box.

ISOGEN - Specifies data for the component in an ISOGEN drawing. Opens the ISOGEN Data dialog box.

ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64)

Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from a component, converting it to generic AutoCAD geometry.

Many commands in CADWorx use xdata in the components and do not function if the data is removed.

You can double-click a component to open the Component Edit dialog box.

Modify a component 1. Click Local Edit .

2. In the drawing, select a component.

The Component Edit dialog box appears.

3. Modify properties as needed.

4. Click OK.



ISOGEN Data Dialog Box Specifies ISOGEN properties for a component.

Symbol Information

Identifier - Specifies the identifier used by ISOGEN for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information.

Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN Identifier used by CADWorx and uses the value specified in Identifier.

SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information.

Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN SKEY used by CADWorx and uses the value specified in SKEY.



Message - Specifies the message displayed with the component on the isometric drawing.

Type - Specifies the type of graphic enclosing the message.

Message Types

Type Graphic

None No text or graphic

Unboxed Text only

Square

Pointed

Round

Circle

Triangle

Diamond

Double Circle

Ellipse

Text - Specifies the message text.

Spindle / Flat / Support Direction - Specifies a valve spindle direction, an eccentric reducer flat direction, or support direction.

Direction - Specifies the direction. Select North, South, East, West, Up, or Down.

Text - Specifies a text message with details on the direction.

ISOGEN option switch 80 (dimension to valve centers) is only available if the valve has a spindle direction set.

Flow Arrow - Specifies how flow arrows are displayed for valves.

As drawn - Displays the flow arrow in the direction that the pipe was drawn.

Opposite - Displays the flow arrow in the opposite direction.

View - Displays a preview of the flow arrow on the drawing.

ISOGEN option switch 17 controls the display of flow arrows.



Miter Pipe Export Options - Specifies how miter pipe is exported to ISOGEN.

Pipe with Welds - Exports each straight pipe run in the component as a linear pipe piece with mitered ends and welded connections.

Pipe with Welds Example

Type Graphic

None No text or graphic

Unboxed Text only

Square

Pointed

Round

Circle

Triangle

Diamond

Double Circle

Ellipse

Bend - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend.

Bend with Length - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend. The length of the component is also added to the Long Annotation of the component, allowing two bends with different lengths to have separate marks in the bill of material.

Bend with Length Example



Other

Spool - Specifies the spool identification. This value overrides the default spool value created by ISOGEN.

Sketch - Specifies a .dwg detailed sketch to display with the isometric drawing. For more information on detailed sketches, see the Information Notes,pdf and Detailed Sketches.pdf files in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils folder.

Dim Status - Specifies the dimensioning of individual components. Select Default, Dimensioned, Dotted Dimensioned, or Dotted Undimensioned.

Mark - Specifies the mark number for a component.

End Connections and Conditions - Specifies a set of conditions for up to four ends (End 1, End 2, End 3, and End 4).

Connection Type - Specifies the type of connection on the end

Connection Types

Connection Types Description Default Condition

Default

BS Ball and Socket Male

BW Butt Weld Unspecified

CL Clamped Male

CP Compression Female

FA Flared Male

FL Flanged Unspecified



Connection Types Description Default Condition

GF Gland Female

GL Glued Female

LC Liner (Clamped) Male

LR Liner (Reducing ) Male

LN Liner (Nut) Male

MP Male Part Hygienic Male

PF Push Fit Female

PL Plain End Male

SC Screwed Female

SW Socket Weld Female

View - Displays a red arrow at the selected end on the drawing.

Male, Female, Unspecified, or None - Specifies the end condition of the selected condition type. These options are only available when the end condition of the connection type can be changed. For example, SC, SW, CP, GL, and PF allow either male or female end conditions. Unspecified is used for welded and flanged end conditions.

Reference Dimensions - Specifies dimension to use as reference for the component.

On - Turns on reference dimensions.

Primary - Defines reference dimensions relative to the primary axes of the model.

Skewed - Defines reference dimension relative to the defined reference points.

Pick points - Allows you to select reference points in the drawing.

View - Displays the reference points in the drawing.

Message - Specifies text for the reference dimensions.

SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the reference dimensions. For more information, see SKEY Information.

Start Point - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the start point.

Reference Point 1 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the first reference point.

Reference Point 2 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the second reference point.

Global Edit CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Global Edit

Setting toolbar: Global Component Edit

Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Global Edit

Command line: GCEDIT

Modifies the properties of multiple components. This command displays the Global CEdit dialog box.

Global CEdit Dialog Box

Specifies properties for multiple components.



Each property initially shows no value. Any value modified for a property is changed for all selected components. Properties that are not modified are not changed in the selected components.

Alpha size - Specifies a size-only description of the component.

Short annotation - Specifies a short description of the component.

Long annotation - Specifies a long description of the component.

Line number - Specifies the line number of the component.

Tag - Specifies a tag for the component.

Code - Specifies a code for the component.

Weight - Specifies the weight per unit of a pipe component.

Sort sequence - Specifies the sort sequence of the component in the bill of material.

Coordinates

World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the components are automatically updated along with the pipe length.

Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175).

Miscellaneous

Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is shown as dotted and dimensioned.

Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress analysis information or insulation attached.

BOM Item Type

Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item.

Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item.

Offshore - Specifies an offshore type of bill of material item.

Misc - Specifies a miscellaneous type of bill of material item.

OK - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box.

Cancel - Cancels the operation without saving modifications, and closes the dialog box.

Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from the selected components, converting them to generic AutoCAD geometry.

Modify multiple components 1. Click Global Edit .

2. In the drawing, select two or more components.

The Global CEdit dialog box appears.

3. Define properties as needed.

4. Click OK.

The command line prompt indicates the number of updated components.



Mode Convert Mode convert commands change a piping component from one mode to another mode. The existing component is deleted and replaced with a component in the new mode.

Many possibilities exist, such as:

2D double line to 3D solids

3D solids to 2D double line

2D single line to 2D double line

2D double line, flat to 2D double line, north

Converting to different planes

Rebuilding an existing component in the same mode or plane

The specification layer name determines the layer to delete and replace. This layer name is prepended with an underscore, such as _150. Objects on other layers (without an underscore in their names) are not changed.

You can convert from one plane to another by changing planes and converting the component mode.

Example

The following tee was drawn once, copied to three other locations, then converted to different planes.



Topics Convert a component to a different mode ..................................... 71 3D Solids........................................................................................ 71 Convert Isometric ........................................................................... 71 2D Double Line .............................................................................. 71 2D Single Line ............................................................................... 71 Convert Existing ............................................................................. 72 Convert to 3D enhanced ................................................................ 72 Convert from project data .............................................................. 72 CWexplode .................................................................................... 72

Convert a component to a different mode

1. Select 3D Solids , Convert Isometric , 2D Double Line , or 2D Single Line .

2. Select the piping components to convert.

3. Press ENTER.

3D Solids

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 3D Solids

Setting toolbar: Solids

Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 3D Solids

Command line: CONVERTSOLID

Converts selected components to 3D solid mode.

Convert Isometric

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Convert Isometric

Setting toolbar: Isometric

Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > Isometric

Command line: CONVERTISO

Converts selected components to isometric mode.

2D Double Line

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Double Line

Setting toolbar: Double Line

Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Double Line

Command line: CONVERTDOUBLE

Converts selected components to 2D double line mode.

2D Single Line

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Single Line

Setting toolbar: Single Line

Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Single Line

Command line: CONVERTSINGLE

Converts selected components to 2D single line mode.



Convert Existing Command line: CONVERTEXISTING

Stops external data (xdata) from appearing in the bill of material or removes xdata from the components. After xdata is prevented or removed, the component is moved to the EXIST layer.

You can also execute this command in Global Edit or Local Edit . For more information, see Global Edit (on page 68) and Local Edit (on page 62).

If you use the CONVERTEXISTING command and you select Yes, you cannot change the components back. To change components in the existing layer, back and forth, you must select No when using this command.

1. Type CONVERTEXISTING on the command line, and then press ENTER.

2. Select Yes to remove all data from the components.

OR

Select No to not remove all data.

You can also do this in the Global Edit or Local Edit dialog boxes.

3. To convert all objects on the drawings,select All objects.

OR

To convert a specific component, select Components only.

4. Press ENTER to finish.

The components selected are converted.

Convert to 3D enhanced Command line: CONVERTENHANCED

Converts the selected components to 3D enhanced mode.

1. Type CONVERTENHANCED on the command line, and the press ENTER.

2. Select the components you want to convert to 3D enhanced mode, and then press ENTER.

The components convert to 3D enhanced.

Convert from project data Command line: CONVERTFROMPRJDATA

Converts the selected components to the project data changes made to the specification in the Spec Editor.

1. Type CONVERTFROMPRJDATA on the command line, and then press ENTER.

2. Select the objects you want to convert from previous data to the new project data, and then press ENTER.

The project data of the selected components is updated.

CWexplode Command line: CWEXPLODE

Changes the CADWorx component to an AutoCAD 3D solid with xdata included.

1. Type CWEXPLODE on the command line, and then press ENTER.


3. Select the component you want to change, and then press ENTER.

Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option.

The components are converted to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata included.



Socket Weld

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Socket Weld

Setting toolbar: Socket Weld

Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the socket welded section of the specification.

You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

Threaded

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Threaded

Setting toolbar: Threaded

Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the threaded section of the specification.

You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

Settings CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Settings

Setting toolbar: Current Settings

Plant menu: Utility > Settings

Command line: CURRENT

Displays the current drawing settings, such as main and reduction sizes, text and dimension sizes, line and drawing modes, and specifications. This command displays the Current Settings dialog box.

Most of these settings are changed using Setup . For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

XREF Edit Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Xref Edit

Command line: XCEDIT

Settings toolbar: Xref Edit

Views sizes or information within the component Xref. This command works in a similar fashion to the CADWorx CEDIT functionality. For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62). This function uses the same dialog box as Local Edit, but it does not allow you to modify any of the values. If a modification to a component is required from within an Xref, use the AutoCAD REFEDIT command to open that part of the Xref. Then use the Local Edit command to make any modifications necessary. After the required modification is completed, close the Xref with the REFCLOSE command.




S E C T I O N 3

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette


Spec View - Filters the available components based on the size and specification settings. For more information, see Spec View Palette (on page 76).

SPECVIEW

Line View - Isolates components based on their line number or their specification. For more information, see Line View Palette (on page 79).

LINEVIEW

Pipe Support Modeler - Inserts pipe and elbow support components. For more information, see Support Modeler Palette (on page 81).

PIPESUPPORTVIEW

Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add, modify, and remove insulation configurations that can be applied to CADWorx components. For more information, see Insulation View Palette (on page 88).

INSULATIONVIEW

Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of modeling issues. For more information, see Discontinuity View Palette (on page 92).

DISCONTINUITYVIEW

Pipe Support Modeler Report - Generates a report of all pipe supports found in the selection or in the entire model. For more information, see Pipe Support Report (on page 93).

PIPESUPPORTREPORT

P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database. For more information, see P&ID View Palette (on page 94).

PIDVIEW

Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D solids in the current drawing as well as any attached XREF drawings. For more information, see Clash View Palette (on page 97).

CLASHVIEW

Assembly View - Creates an assembly for use in a drawing. For more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 99).

ASSEMBLYVIEW

Palette Panel

Palette Panel


Spec View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Spec View

Palettes toolbar: Spec View

Plant menu: Palettes > Spec View

Command line: SPECVIEW

Filters the available components based on the size and specification settings. SpecView also provides a quick way to change the line number settings. Plant components are typically drawn using toolbars, or by typing the command name at the AutoCAD command prompt. The CADWorx SpecView palette provides an alternate method of inserting CADWorx components.

Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 76)

Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 78)

Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) Sets up the filter for the available components.

Main - Specifies the main size of the component.

Reduction - Specifies the reduction size of the component.

Specification - Specifies the specification associated with the component. The list is based on the SpecificationDirectory (on page 39) in the current configuration settings.

Set Spec and Size - Displays the Set Specification & Size dialog box. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

Start Spec Editor - Displays the Spec Editor software. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 77) or the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide book.

Line Numbering Setup - Displays the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

Line Number Drop Down Setup - Displays the Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box (on page 78).

Set size, spec, and line number by component - Sets the main size, reduction size, current specification, and line number to match a component that you select. For more information, see All (on page 57).

Reload *.prj File - Refreshes the changes made to the open .prj file in the specification editor.

Help - Displays the help file.

Palette Panel


Draw pipe components

1. Select the pipe spec to use from the list.

The software uses the default type (Buttweld).

2. If necessary, right-click and change the type.

3. Follow the prompts on the command line to place the pipe.

The software draws the pipe using the specified type.

Draw non-pipe components

1. Select the non-pipe component type to use from the list.

The software draws the component in plan view based on the current UCS.

2. Follow the prompts on the command line to place the component.

The software draws the component using the specified insertion option.

Spec Editor

CADWorx Plant I Tab: Setup and Size/Spec Panel > Editor

Spec View Palette > Start Spec Editor

Command Line: SPECEDIT

Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new specifications.

Spec Editor can also be used as standalone software and can be copied to any computer. It does not require a hardware lock (ESL) or a license manager. CADWorxSpecEdit.exe is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.

When opening the Spec Editor from CADWorx, the software loads the specification that you have specified in Plant. If you want to open a different specification, then select the specific spec in Project Data.

The Spec Editor stores all the components delivered with CADWorx. If you want to add a size for a component, you must first add it in the Data Table and the EndType Table in the Spec Editor. You cannot use a component size that has not been added to the catalog for the specification. CADWorx uses the SpecificationDefaultProject (on page 39) to locate the project file and access the components.

Optional components can be manipulated and created in the spec editor.

For more information, see the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide delivered with CADWorx.

Palette Panel


Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for adding items to the line numbering list that appears with the line numbering system. These values are stored in the DropDownList.TXT file. This file is located in the same folder as the current configuration settings.

Available Categories - Lists the categories for which you can assign dropdown items. Select an item from the list to make it the active category.

Dropdown Values - Lists the assigned dropdown items for the active category.

Add - Adds an item to the Dropdown Values list.

Remove - Removes the selected item from the Dropdown Values list.

Remove All - Removes all of the items from the Dropdown Values list.

Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) Controls parameters for customizing the appearance of the CADWorx Spec View palette.

View Options

Show optional components - Displays optional components in the CADWorx Spec View palette. If you select this option, always use the CADWorx Spec View palette to draw components. If you start the component placement from outside of the CADWorx Spec View palette, such as with a command line, SPACE to run last command, or a toolbar, CADWorx uses the default component based on the current size setting. This may not be the same component that was selected in the CADWorx Spec View palette.

Show all components - Displays all components listed in the specification file regardless of the current size set. If you select this option, always use the CADWorx Spec View palette to draw components. If you start the component placement from outside of the CADWorx Spec View palette, such as with a command line, SPACE to run last command, or a toolbar, CADWorx uses the default component based on the current size setting. This may not be the same component that was selected in the CADWorx Spec View palette.

Show socket weld - Displays socket-welded components in the CADWorx Spec View palette.

Show threaded - Displays threaded components in the CADWorx Spec View palette.

Show tag - Displays tags in the CADWorx Spec View palette.

Show long description - Displays long descriptions in the CADWorx Spec View palette.

Show short description - Displays short descriptions in the CADWorx Spec View palette.

Tree Options

View 1 (No tree or categories) - Lists components in numerical order based on the Sort Sequence set for the component in the specification file.

View 2 (One level tree with more categories) - Creates a category for each type of component. For example, butt-welded and socket-welded tees are listed in separate categories.

View 3 (One level tree with less categories) - Creates fewer categories than View 2. For example, all tees are listed in a single category.

View 4 (Two level tree with Spec Editor style view) - Displays a two-level tree that is arranged in the same sequence as the Spec Editor application.

Color Options

Main Size component - Specifies the color associated with main size components.

Main Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with main size optional components.

Reducing Size component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size components.

Palette Panel


Reducing Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size optional components.

Level 1 category - Specifies the color associated with level 1 category components.

Level 2 category - Specifies the color associated with level 2 category components.

Line View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Line View

Palettes toolbar: Line View

Plant menu: Palettes > Line View

Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate Palette

Command line: LINEVIEW

The Line View palette isolates components based on their line number or their specification. It also lets you locate components based on their description information.

Line View does not process any entities on locked layers.

Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 79)

Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 80)

Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) Controls parameters for isolating components based on their line number or specification. You can isolate an entire line number, or to isolate one line number and include surrounding buildings or equipment.

If components have been hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not listed in the Find tab.

Refresh List - Refreshes the line number list in the palette. Use this option if new line numbers do not appear in the list.

Show All Components - Makes all objects in the drawing visible.

Select Line Number by Component - Select a component in the drawing. The software uses the line number of this component to isolate the model.

Isolate Selected Line Numbers - Isolates the selected line numbers.

Set Layer Options - Displays the Line View Layer Selection dialog box so that you can include or exclude certain layers when Isolate Type is set to Layer Isolate. For more information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page 99). By default, all layers are visible for line isolate.

Help - Displays on-line help.

Right-clicking the line number list displays the Isolate Selected Line Numbers, Show All Components, and Refresh List options.

Isolate Options

Line Number - Lists all line numbers used in the drawing so that you can select one or more line numbers to isolate.

Spec - Lists all specs used in the model so that you can select one or more specifications to isolate.

Isolate Type

Palette Panel


Full - Displays the selected CADWorx components, and hides all non-CADWorx components such as buildings, equipment, and dimensions.

Partial - Displays the selected CADWorx components and all non-CADWorx components.

Layer - Displays the selected CADWorx components and hides all non-CADWorx components based on the layer setup.

Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive. For details on this option, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144).

Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) Controls parameters for locating components based on their description information.

Click the edit boxes to refresh the list of components. Type in the boxes to dynamically filter the list of available components.

If components are hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not listed in the Find tab.

Tag - Type tag text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays.

Code - Type code text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays.

Line number - Type line number text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays.

Short annotation - Type short annotation text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays.

Long annotation -- Type long annotation text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays.

Id Count - Type ID count text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text displays.

Right-Click Menu

Zoom - Zooms the current model space view to the component. Double clicking in the list of components also zooms to the component. Zoom does not work with XREFs that have been inserted into the base drawing with a rotation.

CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box. CEdit on an XREF component does not allow any changes to the component descriptions.

Refresh - Refreshes the list in the dialog box. Use this option if new components do not appear in the list.

Palette Panel


Support Modeler Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Pipe Support Modeler

Palettes toolbar: Pipe Support Modeler

Plant menu: Palettes > Pipe Support Modeler

Command line: PIPESUPPORTVIEW

Inserts pipe and elbow support components. Supports that are set up for pipe components are shown in black. Supports that are setup for elbow components are shown in blue.

For more information, see Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) (on page 84)

Configuration Setup

New - Creates a new pipe support assembly (.PSA) file. This command displays the Create New Pipe Support Assembly File dialog box so that you can specify the name and location of the file. The default path to the .PSA file is set from the PipeSupportDirectory in the configuration settings.

Save As - Saves your current settings to a pipe support assembly (.PSA) file. This command displays the Specify Pipe Support Assembly File dialog box so that you can specify the name and location of the file. The default path to the .PSA file is set from the PipeSupportDirectory in the configuration settings. The drop list displays the .PSA files that are available in the folder.

Drawing

Insert - Inserts the support selected in the list. Based on the type of support selected (pipe or elbow), the AutoCAD command line asks you to select the appropriate CADWorx component (pipe or elbow).

Single - Inserts one support onto the pipe. This option is only available for pipe supports.

Multiple - Inserts multiple supports onto the pipe. You specify the start point, end point, and spacing between the supports. This option is only available for pipe supports.

Free - Inserts a support without selecting a CADWorx component. The support is inserted using the current UCS settings. This option is only available for pipe supports.

Detect Steel - Detects CADWorx Steel components to set the correct size for the beam clamp if the beam clamp is used as the last component in the pipe support assembly.

Repeat Insert - Repeats the insert command for pipe type supports.

Modify

Regenerate - Recreates the support graphics based on what is set in the current .PSA file for support components that you select from the model. Use Regenerate any time you need to recreate a support based on a new assembly sequence or if the parametric values for the support have changed since the support was originally inserted into the model.

Replace - Replaces the selected components in the model with the support that is selected from the list.

Spec Change - Updates the spec information for the support based on what is currently set in the .PSA file.

File

Add - Displays the Add Support dialog box so that you can add a new assembly to the .PSA file. For more information, see Add Support Dialog Box below.

Modify - Displays the Modify Support dialog box so that you can modify an assembly in the .PSA file. For more information, see Modify Support Dialog Box below.

Remove - Removes an assembly from the .PSA file.

Palette Panel


Copy - Duplicates an assembly within the .PSA file.

Move Up - Moves an assembly up one position in the list.

Move Down - Moves an assembly down one position in the list.

Add Support Dialog Box

Modify Support Dialog Box

Controls parameters for modifying supports in the .PSA file.

Data Tab

Controls parameters for creating pipe support assemblies.

Directory - Displays the folder in which the current .PSA file is located.

File Name - Displays the name of the current .PSA file.

Support Name Specifies the name of the support. This name displays in the CADWorx Support Modeler palette. In modify mode, you can rename the support assembly.

Components Available - Displays the support components that you can use to make an assembly. After you select a type, the list box shows the available parametric data files (*.SUP) for that type of support. For elbow type supports, only Custom, Pipe, Plate, Rod, and Spring Hanger are available. For more information, see Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) (on page 84).

Open - Opens the selected parametric data file (*.SUP) in Notepad.EXE.

Type

Pipe - Specifies that the support is a pipe support. This option is only available when the support is first created.

Elbow - Specifies that the support is an elbow support. This option is only available when the support is first created.

Add - Moves the selected item from the Components Available list to the Components Selected list.

Remove - Moves the selected item from the Components Selected list to the Components Available list.

Components Selected - Displays the components in the assembly. The support is built using the selected components in the order shown.

Move Up - Moves the selected item one position higher in the assembly sequence.

Move Down - Moves the selected item one position lower in the assembly sequence.

Spec Tab

Controls parameters for setting the specification information for the support component.

Size

Start - Specifies the beginning size of a component.

End - Specifies the ending size of a component. For example, if the range of sizes is 1/2 in. to 1-1/2, in., type 1.5. Enter values as the nominal size, not the actual size.

Insulation Options

Increase support size if component is insulated - Automatically selects a larger size support component based on the insulation thickness. For example, a six-inch nominal size pipe (6.625 inch actual OD) has four-inch thick insulation (14.625 inch OD). This makes the total pipe

Palette Panel


diameter 6.625 inch actual OD plus 8 inch insulation OD. The software determines the support by looking it up in the data file.

Use next larger size if exact size is not available - Specifies that if the calculated support is not available in the data file, the next larger size support is selected.

Description

Tag - Specifies an optional tag description for the component.

Short - Specifies the abbreviated description for the component. This description is used by Component (on page 199) in CADWorx Plant.

Long - Describes the component. This description is used in the bill of materials schedule and Component (on page 199) in CADWorx Plant.

BOM

Sort - Locates a component item in the bill of material schedule. Type the needed value. Type 0 to place the item first in the schedule. Type 999 to place the item last. If the same sort numbers are used for different components, they are placed in alphabetical order.

Type - Specifies the type of bill of material item. Select Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or Misc.

Other

Index Code - Specifies the index, or pointer, for generation of database codes placed within components. Type a value, or click Edit Codes to select a value. Index code values are found in the file defined by the DataBaseCodes startup variable.

CAESAR II Type - Specifies the restraint type of the support for use in CAESAR II pipe stress analysis.

ISOGEN

SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for an isometric drawing. For more information, see SKEY Information .

Identifier - Specifies the identifier used by ISOGEN for an isometric drawing. For more information, see SKEY Information .

Sketch - Specifies a .DWG AutoCAD file containing details about the support. Select the file from the Select detail sketch file dialog box.

Message

Type - Specifies the format of text displayed with the support.

Text - Specifies text displayed with the support.

Insert a pipe support 1. Click Single on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette.

2. Select a pipe support from the list.

3. Click Insert.

4. Select the pipe from the model.

The Select Optional Values for [<support type>] dialog box displays.

5. Set the optional values to meet your requirements, and click OK.

6. Select the location on the pipe to insert the support.

7. Specify a rotation around the pipe and the length of the support.

The software places the pipe support in the model.

Palette Panel


Insert an elbow support 1. Select an elbow support from the list on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette.

2. Click Insert.

3. Select the elbow from the model.



5. Select the location to insert the support.

The software places the pipe support in the model.

Insert multiple pipe supports 1. Click Multiple on the CADWorx Support Modeler palette.

2. Select a pipe support from the list.

3. Click Insert.

4. Select the pipe from the model.


This dialog box only displays when optional items are available.


6. Select the beginning location for the supports on the pipe.

7. Select the ending location for the supports on the pipe.

8. Type the distance between the supports, and press ENTER.

The software places the pipe supports in the model.

Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) There are several types of support components that can be used to make an assembly. Each type has a data file which lists the parametric data needed to build the support. Sample data files are located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\PipeSupport\ folder. For each type, a sample drawing file shows how the data file parameters are used to draw the shape. For custom (TYPE=CUSTOM), a drawing file cannot be created for each size.

The top of the .SUP file has information about the support type (TYPE=) and unit system of the file.

The SHOWOPTIONAL setting can be used to control how different sizes are selected when the support is inserted.

SHOWOPTIONAL = 0 - Uses the exact size match if it is found in the data file. The Select Optional Values dialog box does not display.

Palette Panel


SHOWOPTIONAL = 1 - If multiple sizes are listed, a dialog box displays to select a size. In the example shown below, all 10" U bolts are shown in the dialog box for selection.

Palette Panel


SHOWOPTIONAL = 2 - Shows the entire content of the file. This setting is useful for components that are not based on the connecting pipe or elbow, such as plates, rods, and spring hangers.

Palette Panel


If several components in the assembly have the SHOWOPTIONAL setting of 1 or 2, a dialog box similar to the one below displays. Select the different components that make up the assembly. The rod, pipe, and spring hanger have an additional option for the length column in the data file. If the length column is set to -1, use the Enter length box to type the length of the component.

If SHOWOPTIONAL = 0 for all components in the assembly, the dialog box displays so that you can type the length of the component. The software prompts you for the length of the last variable-length component during the assembly insertion into the model.

Palette Panel


Insulation View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Insulation View

Palettes toolbar: Insulation View

Plant menu: Utility > Insulation Palette

Plant menu: Palettes > Insulation View

Command line: INSULATIONVIEW

Creates a data file with an extension .INU. In this file, you can add, modify, and remove insulation configurations. After you create the insulation configuration data file you can apply these configurations to selected components.

Model

Insulation

Palette Panel


Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) (on page 89)

Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) (on page 90)

Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) Controls parameters for creating a data file with an .INU extension. In this file, you can add, modify and remove insulation configurations that can be applied to CADWorx components.

Save - Saves the data in the Configuration Setup grid to the configuration file.

Save As - Displays the Save As Insulation Data dialog box to save the current data in the Configuration Setup grid to a new file.

Open - Displays the Open Insulation Data dialog box to load an insulation data file. The data contained in that file is displayed in the Configuration Setup grid and listed individually in the drop down categories.

Configuration Setup

Add to drawing - Saves the selected grid rows to the current AutoCAD drawing. If similar data already exists in the current drawing, it is not overwritten. All configurations that have been added, appear in the Apply tab of the palette.

Options - Displays the Insulation Options dialog box. For more information, see Insulation Options Dialog Box below.

Configuration Setup - Grid - Displays the content of the insulation data file in grid form.

Thickness - Specifies the actual insulation thickness value. Type a numeric value greater than zero. You can also select an existing value. This parameter is required to create an insulation configuration.

In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), type a value in inches.

In mixed metric units (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions), type a value in inches or millimeters based on the setting from the Insulation Options dialog box. If you type inch values, the software automatically converts to millimeters when the insulation solid is created in the model. If you type a millimeter value, no conversion is done.

In metric units (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), type a value in millimeters.

Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation configuration.

In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in3.

In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm3.

In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm3.

Mastic - Specifies the mastic description. This is an optional value.

Heat Tracing - Specifies the heat tracing description. This is an optional value.

Insulation - Specifies the insulation description. This is an optional value.

Jacketing - Specifies the jacketing description. This is an optional value.

User - Specifies the user description. This is an optional value.

Add - Adds the current values from the boxes to the grid. If similar data exists, the value is not added to the grid.

Modify - Modifies the currently selected row in the grid using the values currently shown in the boxes. Each box corresponds to a column in the grid.

Remove - Deletes the currently selected row in the grid.

Palette Panel


Add, Modify, and Remove only change the data currently displayed in the grid. The data in the insulation file is not updated until you click Save or Save As.

Insulation Options Dialog Box

Controls parameters for insulation options.

Insulation

Append "_I" to layer name - Adds the characters _I to the layer name to create the insulation layer name. For example, If the solid is on layer 1"-150-CWS, the insulation solid is on 1"-150-CWL_l. The insulation solid is grouped with the component solid and center line.

New Layer Name - Indicates that the software creates a new layer.

Name - Specifies the layer name for the insulation solids.

Color - Displays the standard AutoCAD color selection dialog box. Select the default layer color for the insulation.

Graphics

Show Graphics for Gasket - Indicates whether gasket graphics display.

Show Graphics for Weld gap - Indicates whether weld gap graphics display.

Show Graphics for User Shapes - Indicates whether user shape graphics display.

Metric/Inch Units system

Millimeter - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in millimeters in mixed metric units (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) situations.

Inch - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in inches in mixed metric units (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) situations.

Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) Controls parameters for applying configurations to CADWorx components.

For most CADWorx components, insulation is approximated with the use of single or multiple AutoCAD cylindrical components.

Available Configuration - Displays the currently saved insulation configurations in the current AutoCAD drawing.

Remove - Removes the highlighted row in the grid from the current drawing.

Select Mode

Select on screen - Indicates that you will select components in the drawing window.

Line number - Indicates that you will select components by line numbers.

Insulation Mode

Data/Graphics - Adds both the insulation graphic and data.

Data Only - Adds only the insulation data and no graphics.

Insulation

Add - Adds the insulation currently selected in the Available Configuration grid to components in the drawings. You are prompted to select CADWorx components. If any of the selected components are already insulated, this action is skipped.

Modify - Modifies existing insulation graphics and data.

Remove - Removes existing insulations graphics and data.

Refresh - Generates the graphics from the insulation data stored in the component's centerline. Use this option if insulation graphics were deleted or lost.

Palette Panel


Graphics

Add - Adds insulation graphics to components that have had their graphics removed. The data previously stored in the components is used to generate the graphics.

Remove - Removes the graphics from the selected components. The insulation data remains. These components do not show the insulation solid even if you later click Refresh.

Visibility

Isolate - Isolates insulation graphics by either selecting components on screen or by selecting line numbers from the list.

Hide/Show - Hides or shows the insulation graphics by selecting components on screen or by selecting line numbers from the list.

Show All - Shows all objects that have been previously hidden in the current drawing.

Report - Creates a complete report, in HTML format, about all of the insulation components in the model. The report is itemized by the different types of insulation data and calculates the total weight, volume, and length.

Filter - Filters the list of line numbers using wild cards. For example, type *25-1B* to limit the line number list to line numbers with 25-1B as part of the name. The text filter occurs regardless of where the text is in the line number name.

Edit - Displays the Insulation Global Edit <number> Objects dialog box so that you can edit the insulation data for all components having the selected insulation configuration.

Right-Click Menu

In Line Number selection mode, a right-click menu is available with additional options. The right-click menu changes what displays in the edit box.

Select All / Clear All - Selects or clears all line numbers in the list.

List Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only insulated line numbers.

List Un-Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only uninsulated line numbers.

List Data Only Line Numbers - Lists line numbers that have insulation data but no insulation graphics.

List Un-Insulated Components - Lists only uninsulated components.

List All - Refreshes the list.

Modify - Replaces the selected insulation data with the highlighted insulation in the Available Configuration grid. This change applies to all components in the selected line number.

Remove - Removes the insulation from all components in the selected line number.

Insulation Global Edit <number> Objects Dialog Box

Controls parameters for editing the insulation data on multiple objects. This dialog box applies the settings to all of the selected objects.

Thickness - Displays the insulation thickness value. You cannot edit this value.

Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation configuration.

In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in3.

In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm3.

In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm3.

Mastic - Specifies the mastic description. This is an optional value.

Heat Tracing - Specifies the heat tracing description. This is an optional value.

Palette Panel


Insulation - Specifies the insulation description. This is an optional value.

Jacketing - Specifies the jacketing description. This is an optional value.

User - Specifies the user description. This is an optional value.

Discontinuity View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Discontinuity View

Palettes toolbar: Discontinuity View

Plant menu: Palettes > Discontinuity View

Command line: DISCONTINUITYVIEW

Checks for different types of modeling issues, such as disconnected, un-connected, overlapped, and not on line.

Refresh - Refreshes the data in the grid.

Show All Types - Displays all issues in the grid.

Show Disconnected Only - Displays only disconnected and un-connected issues in the grid.

Show Not On Line Only - Displays only not-on-line issues in the grid.

Show Overlap Only - Displays only overlap issues in the grid.

Tolerance Settings - Displays the tolerance settings.

Color Settings - Displays the color and Auto Refresh settings.

Remove Selected Overlaps - Deletes the selected overlaps from the model .DWG file.

Export to File - Exports all data from the palette to a Microsoft Excel (*.CSV) file

Help - Displays the help file.

Tolerance Min - Specifies the minimum connection tolerance. Two components that are separated by a distance greater than the minimum tolerance but less the maximum tolerance ace are considered disconnected.

Tolerance Max - Specifies the maximum connection tolerance. Two components that are separated by a distance greater than the maximum tolerance are considered un-connected.

Color Arrow - Specifies the color for arrows.

Color Text - Specifies the color for text.

Auto Refresh - Indicates whether the software automatically updates the grid when you open the drawing.

# - Displays a number from the palette that coincides with the highlighted number in the drawing. The arrow and text color setting is used for the graphics drawn in the model.

Line Number - Displays the line number of the component.

Type - Displays the discontinuity type for the component.

Disconnected - Displays components that are not connected within the minimum tolerance.

Un-connected - Displays components that are not connected with in the maximum tolerance.

Overlap - Displays components that are duplicated at the same location. The number in parenthesis (n) is the number of overlapping components at this location.

Not on line - Displays components that are not connected to the pipe centerline (typically OLET type components).

Palette Panel


Gap - Displays the distance between the two components. This value is 0.0 for overlapping components.

Long Description - Displays the long description of the component.

Category - Displays the category of the component.

Component Type - Displays the command named used to draw the component.

(X,Y,Z) - Displays the global X-, Y-, Z-coordinates of the component center point.

Pressing CTRL or SHIFT while left-clicking lets you select multiple items from the list.

Left-click to zoom in to the location of the issue.

Right-click to change the AutoCAD view to the location of the issue without zooming.

Pipe Support Report CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Pipe Support Report

Command line: PIPESUPPORTREPORT

Generates a report of all pipe supports found. You can report on the pipe supports found on a selected item, or the entire model.

The software saves the report to a .CSV file which you can use with Microsoft Excel.

Palette Panel


P&ID View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > PID View

Palettes toolbar: P&ID View

Plant menu: Palettes > P&ID View

Command line: PIDVIEW

Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database.

You must set up the following items to use this palette:

1. Create a CADWorx P&ID project that uses the P&ID live database system.

2. Create a CADWorx Plant project that uses the Plant live database system.

3. With Microsoft Access, you must write database tables used by Plant and P&ID to the same Access file. With SQL Server and Oracle, you must write database tables used by Plant and P&ID to the same database.

4. Create associations between in-line components and the main process line in the P&ID

drawings with the Combine Process command. For more information, see "Combine Process" in the CADWorx P&ID User's Guide.

Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) (on page 94)

Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) (on page 96)

Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) Controls parameters for linking matched data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database.

Select Configuration File

The current configuration file (Project.CFG) displays.

Browse - Select a different Project.CFG file

Options - Displays available options.

Available Line Numbers - Displays line numbers that are in both the P&ID database and the Plant database.

Select - Specifies a component in the current Plant model drawing. The software sets the line number of this component to the current line number for P&ID View.

Component Type - Displays the component tables from the P&ID database.

Link - Links or unlinks P&ID and Plant components.

Help - Displays on-line help.

P&ID Data

P&ID ID_Count - Lists the P&ID ID_COUNT from the P&ID database.

Line Number - Lists the line number for the P&ID component.

Tag - Lists the tag for the P&ID component.

Size - Lists the size for the P&ID component.

Spec- Lists the spec for the P&ID component.

Drawing - Lists the drawing for the P&ID component.

Right-Click Menu

Palette Panel


Insert in model - Reads the size, spec, and component type from the P&ID database and inserts the component into the Plant model.

View P&ID drawing - Displays a preview of the P&ID drawing.

To zoom inside the viewer, use the two arrow buttons on the left side of the dialog box. Zooming inside the viewer can also be done by holding down the left mouse button while rotating the mouse scroll wheel. The viewer dialog box closes when you switch between drawings in the same session of AutoCAD. The dialog box must be started with every new AutoCAD session.

Left-click an item to update the P&ID drawing viewer dialog box if it is active.

Double-click an item to run the Insert in model command.

Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.

Options - Displays the Options dialog box so that you can set the colors of the items displayed in the P&ID and Plant data.

Plant Data

P&ID ID_Count - Displays the ID_COUNT of the P&ID component if a link between the P&ID component and the Plant component is made. The Plant database (PIPE table) saves the P&ID ID_COUNT in the RESERVE_10 column.

Line Number - Displays the line number of the plant component.

Tag - Displays the tag of the plant component.

Size - Displays the size of the plant component.

Spec - Displays the spec associated with the plant component.

Drawing - Displays the drawing associated with the plant component.

Description - Displays the description of the plant component.

Right-Click Menu

CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box.

Zoom - Zooms and highlight the component in the model.

List data from all drawings - Lists plant data from all drawings that have the line number.

List data from current drawing - Lists plant data from the open drawing.

Palette Panel


Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.

Options Dialog Box


Link components (on page 96)

Unlink components (on page 96)

Link components

1. Select the check box next to an item in the P&ID Data list and an item in the Plant Data list.

2. Click Link.

The P&ID ID_Count value in the Plant Data list updates.

Vales, reducers, and nozzles can be linked. Instrument components cannot be linked.

Unlink components

1. Select two linked components.

Link changes to Unlink.

2. Click Unlink.

The software removes the link between the two components.

Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) Controls parameters for unmatched data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database.

Line number from P&ID table with in-line components - Displays line numbers from the P&ID database that do not have corresponding line numbers in the Plant database.

Line numbers from Pipe table with in-line components - Displays line numbers from the Plant database (PIPE table) that do not have corresponding line numbers in the P&ID database.

Line numbers from P&ID table with no in-line components - Displays line numbers from the P&ID database that do not have any P&ID components associated with them in the P&ID database.

Export - Exports all data from the Unmatched tab to a report. The report is written to the same folder as the Project.CFG file. The file names of the reports are P&IDViewUnmatched1.HTML, P&IDViewUnmatched2.HTML, and P&IDViewUnmatched3.HTML.

Refresh - Refreshes the data presented in the Unmatched tab.

Line numbers - Displays line number information from the P&ID and Plant databases.

In-line components - Displays in-line component information from the P&ID and Plant databases.

Palette Panel


Insert a drawing into the project When a Plant drawing is opened from the current project, Plant attempts to insert it into the project. The Insert Drawing into Project Database dialog box opens to confirm this action.

When Insert Into DB is clicked, rows are added to the appropriate tables within the database. Plant drawings created without a database have xdata attached to each component that allows the software to automatically add rows into the appropriate tables.

Clash View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Clash View

Palettes toolbar: Clash View

Plant menu: Palettes > Clash View

Plant menu: Utility > Clash

Command line: CLASH or CLASHVIEW

Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D solids in the current drawing and any attached XREF drawings.

Settings

Clash On - Turns the clash system on.

Clash Off - Turns the clash system off.

Show Clashes - Displays clash entities that exist in the model.

Options - Displays the Options dialog box. For more information, see Options Dialog Box (on page 98).

Layers - Displays the Layers dialog box. For more information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page 99).

Refresh - Updates the clash list.

Export - Writes the clash list to a text file. The file is exported to the same folder as the model drawing file. The name of the file is the drawing name with _Clash.TXT appended.

Display by Status

New - Displays new clashes in the list.

Active - Displays active clashes in the list.

Resolved - Displays resolved clashes in the list.

Approved - Displays approved clashes in the list.

Palette Panel


All - Displays all clashes in the list.

Clash List

# - Displays the number assigned to each clash.

Component 1 - Displays the CADWorx data for the first component.

Component 2 - Displays the CADWorx data for the second component.

Status - Displays the clash status.

Type - Indicates whether the clash was from a CADWorx Insulation View-created component.

You can set the color of the grid items using the Options dialog box. For more information, see Options Dialog Box (on page 98).

Left-clicking an item in the list generates the clash entity in the model and zooms to the clash.

Right-Click Menu

Clash Status New - Changes the status of a clash to New.

Clash Status Active - Changes the status of a clash to Active.

Clash Status Resolved - Changes the status of a clash to Resolved.

Clash Status Approved - Changes the status of a clash to Approved.

Clash Zoom To - Zooms to the clash point.

Clash Viewer - Displays a dialog box with the two clashing components.

Clash Isolate Selected - Isolates the selected clash.

Clash Isolate All - Creates clash entities for all clashes, and isolates them. To remove all clash entities from the model, run the command CLASHDELETEALLOBJECTS.

Clash Show All - Shows all components in the drawing.

Options Dialog Box Controls parameters for setting options on clash objects.

Start up - Indicates whether clash detection runs on drawing start up.

On - Clash detection is always on for every drawing.

Off - Clash detection is off for every drawing.

Display Prompt - The software prompt you every time a drawing opens.

On clash detection - Indicates what happens when a clash is detected.

Do Not Report - The software does not notify you if a clash is detected.

Show Tray Notification - The software notifies you through the tray bubble notification that a clash has occurred.

Show Palette - The software displays the Clash View palette every time a clash is detected.

Ignore connected steel - Indicates whether the clash detection system checks for connecting steel members. If this option is selected, steel members that are touching each other are ignored.

Detect clashes within blocks - Indicates whether the software detects clashes inside blocks. If this option is selected, the system detects clashes within any blocks in the current drawing.

Synchronize clashes from XREFs - Indicates whether the software checks for clash data inside external reference drawings and updates the master drawing data for that clash. Only New clashes in the master drawing which are from an XREF drawing have the status updated to match the status that is saved in the XREF drawing.

Palette Panel


Synchronize layers from XREFs - Indicates whether the system checks for clash layer data inside externally reference drawings and updates the master drawing clash layer data to match. If a layer in an XREF is excluded from clash detection, the XREF layer is also excluded in the master drawing.

Ignore insulation clashes - The system ignores all clashes generated from components created with the CADWorx Insulation View palette.

Connectivity tolerance - Specifies the tolerance for checking component connectivity. If two components are connected, a clash is not reported, even if the actual solids intersect.

Clash zoom factor - Specifies the zoom factor used during clash.

Color Options - Specifies the color of the clash entity and the color of the list.

Layers Dialog Box Controls parameters for including or excluding certain layers from clash detection. By default, all layers are considered for clash detection. XREF layers are also displayed.

Layers - Displays the available layers. Select the check box next to the layer name to include that layer in clash detection.

Select all - Selects all of the layers in the list.

Clear all - Clears the selection of all of the layers in the list.

Assembly View Palette CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Assembly View

Command Line: ASSEMBLYVIEW

Creates assemblies for placement in a model. The Assembly Manager has four options: create, edit, delete, and insert.


Create Assembly - Creates a new assembly. For more information, see Create an assembly (on page 100).

MAKEASSEMBLY

Edit Assembly Selected - Edits the selected assembly. For more information, see Edit an assembly (on page 100).

Delete Assembly Selected - Deletes the selected assembly. For more information, see Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager (on page 101).

Insert Assembly Selected - Inserts the selected assembly into the model. For more information, see Insert an assembly into the drawing (on page 101).

INSERTASSEMBLY

Help - Opens the help file.

Edit Assembly Paths - Edits the path folder location of the assembly. For more information, see Edit an assembly path (on page 101).

ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS

Palette Panel


Right- Click Menu

Insert Assembly - Inserts an assembly.

View Assembly - Opens the Assembly Viewer and displays the assembly. The assembly can be zoomed and rotated for a 360-degree view.

a. Wireframe - Displays the model in wireframe view.

b. Hidden - Displays the model in hidden view.

c. Shaded - Displays the model with shaded view.

Modify Assembly - Enables you to edit an assembly.

New - Creates a new assembly.

Rename - Renames an assembly.

Delete - Deletes an assembly.

Copy - Copies an assembly.

Paste - Pastes an assembly.

Reload Global File - Reloads the global assembly file.

Edit File Paths - Edits the path folder location of the assembly.

You can close the Assembly Manager at any time by typing ASSEMBLYCLOSE on the command line.

Create an assembly

1. Click Assembly View . Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Click Create Assembly .

3. Select all the components necessary for the assembly, and press ENTER

4. Pick a point where you want to connect.

5. Type a name on the command line, and press ENTER.

The assembly appears in the Assembly Manager.

Edit an assembly


2. Click Edit Assembly Selected .

3. Make the changes to the drawing as needed.

4. Click Close Assembly Editor.

5. Click Yes to save the changes.

To close the Assembly Editor without saving any changes, click No.

The change is saved.

Palette Panel


Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager


2. Select an assembly for deletion.

3. Click Delete Assembly Selected .

4. Click OK to delete.

If you do not want to delete the object, click Cancel.

The assembly disappears from the Assembly Manager.

Insert an assembly into the drawing


2. Select an assembly from the Assemblies box.

3. Click Insert Assembly Selected .

4. Select a component to connect to.

5. Select a direction.

The assembly appears in the drawing.

If an assembly is built with a reducer and then attached to a component of a larger size you are prompted to change the size of the reducer. The assembly usually takes on the size and the specification of the component to which it is attached.

Edit an assembly path

1. Click Assembly View . Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and then press ENTER.

2. Type ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS on the command line, and then press ENTER.

3. Select Project and then the name of the assembly from the popup.

OR

Select Global Assembly and then the name of the assembly from the popup.

4. Enter the subdirectory for the user shape path, and then press ENTER.

OR

Type B on the command line for the user shape path, press ENTER to open the Browse for Folder window, select the new folder location, click OK, and then press ENTER.

5. Enter the subdirectory for the Topworks path, and then press ENTER.

OR

Type B on the command line for the Topworks path, press ENTER to open the Browse for Folder window, select the new folder location, click OK, and then press ENTER.

The assembly paths are updated.

Palette Panel



S E C T I O N 4

CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN


ISOGEN Out - Generates an isometric drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).

ISOGENOUT

ISOGEN Batch - Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for one or more line numbers. For more information, see ISOGEN Batch (on page 106).

ISOGENBATCH

ISOGEN Supplemental - Places supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN Supplemental (on page 107).

ISOGENSUPL

Stop Sign - Places ISOGEN stop sign symbols in the drawing. For more information, see Stop Sign (on page 108).

STOPSIGN

ISOGEN Start Point - Places ISOGEN start point symbols in the drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN Start Point (on page 108).

ISOGENSTARTPT

Offset Tap - Creates offset tap connections for use by ISOGEN. For more information, see Offset Tap (on page 108).

OTAP

PCF Out - Creates a piping component (PCF) file from components selected in the drawing. For more information, see PCF Out (on page 112).

PCFOUT

PCF In - Imports components into the current drawing from a piping component (PCF) file. For more information, see PCF IN (on page 112).

PCFIN

Tap Connection - Creates tap connections for use by ISOGEN. For more information, see Tap (on page 112).

TAP

ISOGEN Panel

ISOGEN Panel


ISOGEN Out

CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out

Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out

Command line: ISOGENOUT

Generates an isometric drawing. The components you select to use with this command must be generated with an authorized ISOGEN hardware lock, or this function cannot process them. The selection process has different options that allow you to perform more detailed selections.

Select ISOGEN Style Dialog Box

Controls parameters for selecting ISOGEN projects, styles, and names of the automatically-generated isometrics. See ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 113) for more in information on creating and managing these projects and styles.

Directory - Specifies the directory of the ISOGEN project.

Project - Specifies the active project. The list contains all of the available projects. See ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 113) for information on creating these projects.

Style - Specifies the active style. The list contains all of the available styles in the project.

File Name - Specifies the name of the file. This allows you to name an isometric file if none of the components selected contain a line number. If the selected components contain line number information, the line number from the last component selected is used as the isometric file name.

Path - Displays the Isometric folder that is used by the ISOGEN style.

Select - Displays the Select Isogen Style Directory dialog box so that you can select an ISOGEN Style (ISOGEN.FLS) file. Use this command to select an ISOGEN style that is in a shared network folder. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).

Settings - Displays the ISOGEN Settings dialog box so that you can transpose the system by an X, Y, and Z offset distance. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).

The DXF edit box enables you to name a portion of the output file. The name appends a series of numbers. ISOGEN might break up the selected components into multiple sheets which would require this numbering sequence.

Select ISOGEN Style Directory Dialog Box

Controls parameters for selecting an ISOGEN style directory file.

Look in - Specifies the folder in which the file resides.

File name - Specifies the style directory file name.

Files of type - Specifies the file type (extension).

ISOGEN Settings Dialog Box

Controls parameters for transposing the system by X, Y, and Z offsets. The whole system can be rotated by any angle. This allows any user-defined north arrow direction.

X - Specifies the X-direction offset.

Y - Specifies the Y-direction offset.

Z - Specifies the Z-direction offset.

ISOGEN Panel


Angle - Specifies the north arrow direction:

90 = World positive Y-axis as north direction. This is the default value.

180 = World positive X-axis as north direction.

270 = World negative Y-axis as north direction.

0 = World negative X-axis as north direction.

ISOGEN Project Data Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting position text (POS) that can be displayed on the isometric drawing file. Review the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils\POS_Help.pdf file to locate the POS number associated with each item. These values are stored with the configuration file and are used when an isometric is exported. For I-Configure projects, this is the only option for setting these values. For Project Manager projects, these values can be set from the Project Manager > Project Default dialog boxes or with this dialog box.

After typing a value, click the Use check box to store the value in the configuration file. To delete a value from the configuration file, clear the Use box. The values that have the Use box selected display at the top of the dialog box the next time it displays.

ISOGEN Results Dialog Box

Controls parameters for reviewing the results of the ISOGEN extraction.

The dialog box displays the success or failure of the extraction in a text box.

Open Plot Files - Opens all the generated ISOs in the current session of AutoCAD. The AutoCAD SDI setting must be set to 0 for the option to be available.

View Message File - Opens Notepad to display a message file that provides information that could be used when an error was produced. The text file that displays is an .MES file. For more information, read the ISOGEN documentation.

Extract ISOGEN files 1. Click ISOGEN Out . Alternatively, type ISOGENOUT on the command line, and press

ENTER.

The Select ISOGEN Style dialog box displays.

2. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements.

3. Click OK on the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box.

Enter an option [Line number/Select component] <Select component>.

4. Select Line Number to select components using line numbers.

Enter an option [List/Select component] <Select component>.

5. Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144).

or

Choose Select component to select the components by crossing, window, or any other preferred method. You can select components that are from an XREF if the UseObjectsFromXrefs (on page 42) is set to 1.

Processed 164 component(s) to file.

The components must have been generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware lock. If not, the a message similar to the following displays.

Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure...

Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed...

No components were written to file...

The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays.

ISOGEN Panel


ISOGEN Batch CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch

Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch

Command line: ISOGENBATCH

Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for one or more line numbers. The command uses the default settings from the ISOGEN Project Manager. For more information, see ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 113).

ISOGENBATCH also exports line number continuation information to ISOGEN.

Extract batch ISOGEN files

1. Click ISOGEN Out . Alternatively, type ISOGENOUT on the command line, and press ENTER.

The Select ISOGEN Style dialog box displays.

2. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).

3. Click OK on the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box.

The software displays the Select Item dialog box which lists all the line numbers available in the model.

4. Select one or more from the available line numbers. For more information, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144).

CADWorx sends each line number to ISOGEN for processing. ISOGEN might break up the selected line numbers into multiple sheets. Messages similar to the following display:

********** Start processing (1"-IG-915-A1) **********

Sent 38 component(s) to ISOGEN for processing...

1 DXF file(s) created:

E:\ISO\NEWPROJECT\IMPERIAL_INCH_ANSI_C\DRAWINGS\1_-IG-915-A1.DXF

********** End processing (1"-IG-915-A1) **********

********** Start processing (1"-IG-918-A1) **********

Sent 9 component(s) to ISOGEN for processing...

1 DXF file(s) created:

E:\ISO\NEWPROJECT\IMPERIAL_INCH_ANSI_C\DRAWINGS\1_-IG-918-A1.DXF

********** End processing (1"-IG-918-A1) **********

*****************************

********** Summary **********

*****************************

*** Line(s) completed successfully ***

1"-IG-915-A1

1"-IG-918-A1

ISOGEN Panel


*** Total DXF files: 2

*** Line(s) with errors ***

None

ISOGENBATCH log file written to:

C:\Drawings\Model_ISOGEN.log

The components must be generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware lock. If not, a message similar to the following displays.

Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure...

Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed...

No components were written to file...

As each line is processed, any errors encountered are displayed on the screen, and a log file is created.

The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104).

ISOGEN Supplemental CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental

Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental

Command line: ISOGENSUPL

Places supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing. There are several types of block available for export to ISOGEN:

ISOGEN_Arrow

ISOGEN_Wall

ISOGEN_Floor

ISOGEN_Instrument

ISOGEN_BreakIn

Arrow, wall, and floor blocks must be inserted along the center line of a pipe component.

Instrument blocks must have the instrument line connected to the end of an olet component, TAP component, or a weld gap component.

Break in (Tie in) points must be connected to the end point of a component.

To add other blocks to this menu, see Introduction. The block name must contain ISOGEN_Arrow, ISOGEN_Instrument, ISOGEN_Wall, ISOGEN_Floor, or ISOGEN_BreakIn for export to ISOGEN. For example, to add another instrument type, you could name the block ISOGEN_Instrument_4, and add it to the menu.

If you are placing a flow arrow on a sloped line, align the UCS to the slope before inserting the arrow.

ISOGEN Supplemental Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing.

The folder containing the ISOGEN supplemental blocks displays at the top of the dialog box.

List - Displays the available ISOGEN supplemental blocks.

Preview - Displays a preview of the selected block.

ISOGEN Panel


Stop Sign CADWorx Plant I tab: Stop Sign

Misc toolbar: Stop Sign

Command line: STOPSIGN

Places stop sign symbols in the drawing. This symbol is used for designating the starting and ending locations for automatically-generated isometric output. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 104). Stop signs must be at a weld or connection point on the piping system. You place these designators on the drawing and then exports them to the database. This could occur manually with Export Pipe (on page 143) or automatically with Setup Live Database (on page 142).

If stop signs are present when using the Database option of the ISOOUT command, you are asked if stop signs should be used in generating the ISOs.

Use Stop Signs [Yes/No] <Yes>:

If you select Yes, continuity is checked and the ISOs are broken at each stop sign. If there are no line numbers or stop signs present in the database, the following prompt displays.

Database does not have any line number or stop signs...

When exporting with the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box isometric generator (ISOGEN Out (on page 104) or ISOGEN Batch (on page 106)), stop signs are used, if selected.

ISOGEN Start Point CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN Start Point

Command line: ISOGENSTARTPT

Places start point symbols in the drawing.

Offset Tap CADWorx Plant I tab: Offset Tap

Command line: OTAP

Creates offset tap connections for use by ISOGEN. Offset taps are for use with large branches. After you create an offset tap connection for a component, you can route piping from that point. Use offset taps for all major branches of the main pipeline. Offset tap is more robust at processing branches then tap connection. Use an offset tap connection if ISOGEN reports discontinuity or tap connection does not produce the necessary results.

Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.

The OTAP command allows several types of pipe-to-pipe connections. The default connection for OTAP is TANGENTIAL (TTSO). To change to another type of connection, change the symbol key (SKEY) value on the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 64) for the OTAP component.

SKEY Connection Type

TTSO TANGENTIAL

TTRF TANGENTIAL REINFORCED

TOSO OFFSET

ISOGEN Panel


TORF OFFSET REINFORCED

TSSO STUB IN

TSRF STUB IN REINFORCED

TESO SET ON

TERF SET ON REINFORCED

If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the following results:

TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:

The length of pipe for the cut list increases to include the OTAP length.

The dimension includes OTAP length.

If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the following results:

TORF, TOSO, TTRF, TTSO:

The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.

The dimension does not include OTAP length.

If the OTAP connects two pipes that are of different sizes (reduction), ISOGEN Option Switch 2 is used for cut length calculation.

Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:

ISOGEN Panel


The length of pipe for the cut list is increased to include the OTAP length.

The dimension includes the OTAP length.

Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO, TOSO:

The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.

The dimension does not include the OTAP length.

Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:

The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.

The dimension includes the OTAP length.

Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO:

The length of the pipe for the cut list is adjusted based on the diameter of the main and reduction pipe sizes.


Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point setting with SKEYs: TOSO:

The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.


Option switch 77 Generate PAD Item Code and Show Symbol on Iso option shows a reinforcement pad on OTAP connections with SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF. A CADWorx reinforcement pad does not have to be drawn in the model for these three SKEYs.

For all other SKEYs, a CADWorx reinforcement pad must be drawn in the model for it to appear in the ISO drawing.

ISOGEN Panel


ISOGEN option switch 77 No Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads, One Extra Weld added at Reinforcement Pads, and Two Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads settings control weld numbering at the reinforcement pads. Extra welds are only shown for the following SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF.

Place an offset tap 1. Click Offset Tap . Alternatively, type OTAP on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping component.

3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped.

The software places the offset tap.

ISOGEN Panel


PCF Out CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF Out

Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF Out

Command line: PCFOUT

Creates a piping component (PCF) file from components selected in the drawing.

This command displays the standard file selection dialog box and prompts for a file name.

Extract piping component files 1. Click PCF Out . Alternatively, type PCFOUT on the command line, and press ENTER.

The Create dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the PCF file in the File name box, and click Save.





or

Choose Select component to select the components by crossing, window, or any other preferred method. You can select components that are from an XREF if the UseObjectsFromXrefs (on page 42) is set to 1.

The software processes the components.

PCF In CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF In

Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF In

Command line: PCFIN

Imports components into the current drawing from a piping component (PCF) file. The PCF file is usually produced from some other plant design system. This command requires that proper CADWorx specification and data files exist. If the PCF file uses a specification that does not

match the CADWorx specification exactly, the model created by PCF In does not function as expected.

The function displays a standard file selection dialog box. There is an intervention level. For more information, see System In (on page 174).

Tap CADWorx Plant I tab: Tap

Command line: TAP

Creates tap connections for use by ISOGEN. The tap connection are used for small branches. After creating a tap connection for a component, piping can be routed from that point. The CADWorx ISOGEN interface automatically processes numerous types of taps without needing a tap connection. Only use a tap connection if ISOGEN reports a discontinuity.

Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.

ISOGEN Panel


Place a tap 1. Click Tap . Alternatively, type TAP on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping component.

3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped.

The software places the tap.

ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure Generates isometrics. All of the software included with ISOGEN is supplied with an Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF) file. This PDF file can be printed or viewed from the computer. The PDFs can be accessed from the program group that is created during installation. We suggest reading the PDF manual prior to contacting for technical support.

ISOGEN is installed in a subfolder of CADWorx. There is not an option to install it anywhere else. The program group created during installation provides shortcuts to all the software within these folders. It also provides shortcuts for all the documentation.

The information supplied in the CADWorx help file is for general use only.

The Isogen_Utils folder contains all the editors that are used to control the format of the automatically generated isometrics. These utilities include the options editor, symbols editor, and others. These applications are required to control the appearance of the ISOGEN isometric. All of the applications have shortcuts in the program group.

There are two applications available for creating and maintaining ISOGEN Styles: Project Manager and I-Configure.

Project Manager is installed with CADWorx ISOGEN and is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\ISOGEN\Project_Manager\PIPMAN.EXE file.

I-Configure is not installed with CADWorx ISOGEN. The installation executable for I-Configure is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\I-Configure\Setup.exe file.

CADWorx can use ISOGEN styles created by Project Manager or I-Configure.

ISOGEN Information The following topics provide general ISOGEN information.

Material List Definition The Material List Definition (MLD) file allows you to customize the ISOGEN material list. The following table shows how CADWorx data is exported to an ISOGEN material list for use with the MLD file.

cadworx data (as listed in component edit dialog box)

ISOGEN MLD

Alpha size Not exported ('N.S.' in the MLD is based on the size stored within the component data.)

Short annotation 'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2'

ISOGEN Panel


Long annotation 'DESCRIPTION'

Line Number Not available as an MLD item.

Tag 'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3'

Code 'ITEM-CODE'

(If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on page 34) = Yes in current configuration settings)

Code 'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4'

(If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on page 34) = No in current configuration settings)

Weight 'WEIGHT'

Sort sequence Not exported

Length 'QTY'

Specification 'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1'

SKEY Information The following ISOGEN SKEYs can be used by CADWorx when creating an isometric.

ISOGEN SKEY definitions and symbol shapes are available in the Skey.pdf file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils folder.

PRGM # CADWorx Name ISOGEN Identifier SKEY

1 PIPE PIPE (Blank)

2 ELBOW 90 LR BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW

3 ELBOW 90 SR BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW

4 ELBOW 90 REDUCING BUTTWELD ELBOW-REDUCING ERBW

5 ELBOW 45 BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW

6 BEND 180 LR RETURN BUTTWELD ELBOW EUBW

7 BEND 180 SR RETURN BUTTWELD ELBOW EUBW

8 TEE STRAIGHT BUTTWELD TEE TEBW

9 TEE REDUCING BUTTWELD TEE TEBW

10 REDUCER CONCENTRIC BUTTWELD REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCBW

11 REDUCER ECCENTRIC BUTTWELD REDUCER-ECCENTRIC REBW

12 CAP BUTTWELD CAP KABW

13 STRAIGHT CROSS BUTTWELD CROSS CRBW

14 REDUCING CROSS BUTTWELD CROSS CRBW

15 LATERAL BUTTWELD TEE TSBW

ISOGEN Panel



16 STUB END BUTTWELD LAPJOINT-STUBEND FLSE

17 LONG WELD NECK FLANGE / NOZZLE FLWN / NZFS

18 FLANGE WELD NECK FLANGE FLWN

19 FLANGE SLIP ON FLANGE FLSJ

20 FLANGE BLIND FLANGE-BLIND FLBL

21 FLANGE LAP JOINT FLANGE FLLB

22 FLANGE SOCKET WELD FLANGE FLSW

23 FLANGE THREADED FLANGE FLSC

24 BOLT BOLT (Blank)

25 GASKET GASKET (Blank)

26 NIPPLE COUPLING NRSC

27 CONCENTRIC SWAGE REDUCER-CONCENTRIC CSPL

28 ECCENTRIC SWAGE REDUCER-ECCENTRIC ESPL

29 90 LR ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW ELSW

30 90 STREET ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW ELSW

31 90 REDUCING ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW-REDUCING ERSW

32 45 ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW ELSW

33 STRAIGHT TEE SOCKET WELD TEE TESW

34 REDUCING TEE SOCKET WELD TEE TESW

35 LATERAL SOCKET WELD TEE TSSW

36 STRAIGHT CROSS SOCKET WELD CROSS CRSW

37 REDUCING BUSHING SOCKET WELD REDUCER-ECCENTRIC RBSC

38 CAP SOCKET WELD CAP KASW

39 COUPLING SOCKET WELD COUPLING COSW

40 HALF COUPLING SOCKET WELD OLET HCSW

41 UNION SOCKET WELD UNION UNSW

42 BLEED RING MISC-COMPONENT RP

43 90 LR ELBOW THREADED ELBOW ELSC

44 90 STREET ELBOW THREADED ELBOW ELSC

45 90 REDUCING ELBOW THREADED ELBOW-REDUCING ERSC

46 45 ELBOW THREADED ELBOW ELSC

ISOGEN Panel



47 STRAIGHT TEE THREADED TEE TESC

48 REDUCING TEE THREADED TEE TESC

49 LATERAL THREADED TEE TSSC

50 STRAIGHT CROSS THREADED CROSS CRSC

51 REDUCING BUSHING THREADED REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RBSC

52 CAP THREADED CAP KASC

53 COUPLING THREADED COUPLING COSC

54 HALF COUPLING THREADED OLET HCSC

55 UNION THREADED UNION UNSC

56 PLUG THREADED MISC-COMPONENT PL

57 SOCKET WELD ELL-O-LET ELBOLET CESW

58 THREADED ELL-O-LET ELBOLET CESC

59 WELD ELL-O-LET ELBOLET CEBW

60 SOCK-O-LET OLET SKSW

61 THREAD-O-LET OLET THSC

62 WELD-O-LET OLET WTBW

63 BALL VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE VBFL or VBBW

64 BALL VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VBSW

65 BALL VALVE THREADED VALVE VBSC

66 BUTTERFLY VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE VYFL or VYBW

67 CHECK VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE CKFL or CKBW

68 CHECK VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE CKSW

69 CHECK VALVE THREADED VALVE CKSC

70 GATE VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE VTFL or VTBW

71 GATE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VTSW

72 GATE VALVE THREADED VALVE VTSC

73 GLOBE VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE VGFL or VGBW

74 GLOBE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VGSW

75 GLOBE VALVE THREADED VALVE VGSC

ISOGEN Panel



76 PLUG VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE VPFL or VPBW

77 PLUG VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VPSW

78 PLUG VALVE THREADED VALVE VPSC

79 RELIEF VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE-ANGLE ARFL or ARBW

80 RELIEF VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE-ANGLE ARSW

81 RELIEF VALVE THREADED VALVE-ANGLE ARSC

82 NEEDLE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VNSW

83 NEEDLE VALVE THREADED VALVE VNSC

84 3-WAY VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE-3WAY V3FL or V3BW

85 3-WAY VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE-3WAY V3SW

86 3-WAY VALVE THREADED VALVE-3WAY V3SC

87 4-WAY FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE-4WAY V4FL or V4BW

88 4-WAY SOCKET WELD VALVE-4WAY V4SW

89 4-WAY VALVE THREADED VALVE-4WAY V4SC

90 CONTROL VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

INSTRUMENT CVFL

91 CONTROL VALVE SOCKET WELD INSTRUMENT CVSW

92 CONTROL VALVE THREADED INSTRUMENT CVSC

93 STRAINER FLANGED or BUTTWELD FILTER FIFL

94 STRAINER SOCKET WELD FILTER FISW

95 STRAINER THREADED FILTER FISC

96 ANGLE VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE-ANGLE AVFL or AVBW

97 ANGLE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE-ANGLE AVSW

98 ANGLE VALVE THREADED VALVE-ANGLE AVSC

99 GAGE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VKSW

100 GAGE VALVE THREADED VALVE VKSC

101 SPECTACLE BLIND MISC-COMPONENT SB

102 EXPANSION BELLOWS MISC-COMPONENT EXFL

ISOGEN Panel



103 to

107

Symmetrical user shapes: NCFL

Non-symmetrical users shapes with two points: NCFL

Non-symmetrical users shapes three or more points: XVFL

MISC-COMPONENT (NCFL) or

MULTI-PORT-COMPONENT (XVFL)

NCFL or

XVFL

108 ELBOW 22.5 BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW

109 ELBOW 11.25 BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW

110 WYE BW TEE TSBW

111 REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH SOCKET WELD HUB

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCSW

112 REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH THREADED HUB

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCSC

113 REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH SOCKET WELD HUB

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC RESW

114 REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH THREADED HUB

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC RESC

115 FLANGE REDUCING SO FLANGE-REDUCING-CONCENTRIC

FLRC

116 FLANGE REDUCING THREADED FLANGE-REDUCING-CONCENTRIC

FLRC

117 FLANGE REDUCING WN FLANGE-REDUCING-CONCENTRIC

FLRC

118 COUPLING SOCKET WELD COUPLING COSW

119 COUPLING THREADED COUPLING COSC

120 LATERAL-O-LET SOCKET WELD OLET LASW

121 LATERAL-O-LET THREADED OLET LASC

122 LATERAL-O-LET WELD OLET LABW

123 NIP-O-LET THREADED OLET NISC

124 NIP-O-LET PLAIN OLET NIPL

125 PIPE FLANGED PIPE-FIXED FPFL

126 ELBOW 90 LR FLANGED ELBOW ELFL

127 ELBOW 45 FLANGED ELBOW ELFL

128 TEE STRAIGHT FLANGED TEE TEFL

129 REDUCER CONCENTRIC FLANGED REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCFL

130 REDUCER ECCENTRIC FLANGED REDUCER-ECCENTRIC REFL

131 WYE FLANGED TEE TSFL

ISOGEN Panel



132 DIAPHRAGM VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VDSW

133 DIAPHRAGM VALVE THREADED VALVE VDSC

134 DIAPHRAGM VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE VDFL or VDBW

135 ROTARY VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VRSW

136 ROTARY VALVE THREADED VALVE VRSC

137 ROTARY VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE VRFL or VRBW

138 DUAL CHECK VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE CKSW

139 DUAL CHECK VALVE THREADED VALVE CKSC

140 DUAL CHECK VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD

VALVE CKFL or CKBW

141 XBODY GATE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VTSW

142 XBODY GATE VALVE THREADED VALVE VTSC

143 XBODY GATE VALVE BW VALVE VTFL

144 ELBOW 90 WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

ELBOW EL**

145 ELBOW 90 REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

ELBOW-REDUCING ER**

146 ELBOW 45 WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

ELBOW EL**

147 TEE STRAIGHT WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

TEE TE**

148 TEE REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

TEE TE**

149 CROSS WITH SPECIAL END TYPES CROSS CR**

150 CROSS REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

CROSS CR**

151 LATERAL WITH SPECIAL END TYPES TEE TE**

152 REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RC**

153 REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

REDUCER-ECCENTRIC RE**

154 STUB WITH SPECIAL END TYPES CONNECTOR MPBW

155 WYE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES TEE TS**

156 CAP WITH SPECIAL END TYPES CAP KA**

ISOGEN Panel



157 NUT WITH SPECIAL END TYPES NUT (BNUT) or CLAMP (CLMP)

BNUT or CLMP

158 BALL VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE VB**

159 BUTTERFLY VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE VY**

160 CHECK VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE VC**

161 GATE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE VT**

162 GLOBE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE VG**

163 PLUG VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE VP**

164 3-WAY VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE-3WAY V3**

165 ANGLE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE-ANGLE AV**

166 MULTIPORT 1 VALVE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

VALVE, VALVE-ANGLE, VALVE-3WAY

ZG**, 2Z**, 3Z**


VALVE-MULTIWAY MZ**


VALVE-MULTIWAY MZ**

169 ELBOW 22.5 WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

BEND BE**

170 ELBOW 11.25 WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

BEND BE**

171 LATERAL REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END TYPES

TEE TE**

172 U-BEND WITH SPECIAL END TYPES Not exported Not exported

173 WELD GAP WELD WW

174 to 197 (Future Components)

198 GENERIC INSERT Not exported Not exported

199 WELD GAP WELD WW

ISOGEN Panel



200 BENT PIPE ELBOW, BEND ELBW, BUBW, PBBW,

201 MITER PIPE GAP (Blank)

202 ROLLED PIPE MISC-COMPONENT FXBW

203 RESTRAINTS SUPPORT (Blank)

204 PAD or SADDLE REINFORCEMENT-PAD (Blank)

205 RIGID ELEMENT GAP (Blank)

206 SKIPPED ELEMENT GAP (Blank)

207 SPECIAL RIGID GAP (Blank)

208 TUBING PIPE or BEND (PB) (Blank) or PB

209 STOP SIGN ISO-SPLIT-POINT (Blank)

210 TAP CONNECTION TAP-CONNECTION (Blank)

211 OFFSET TAP CONNECTION TEE-SET-ON TTSO

End Type Information CADWorx special end type components are written to the PCF based on the end type used in the data file.

CADWorx End Type ISOGEN End Type

0 PL

1 BW

2 FL

3 LN

4 LN

5 MP

6 MP

7 MP

8 MP

9 CL

10 CL

11 CL

12 CL

13 CL

ISOGEN Panel


14 SW

15 SC


S E C T I O N 5

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum

You can create and store line numbers in different configuration files for various requirements in a variety of formats. There can be any number of categories within a line number.

When you start a new drawing, the line number system is not active by default.

Click Setup to automatically assign line numbers when you place components. After you set the line number in the current drawing, it remains set until you change it.


Setup - Modifies line number configurations. For more information, see Setup (on page 124).

NUMBERSETUP

Set - Sets line number from three different sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a component that you select. For more information, see Set (on page 125).

NUMBERSET

Count - Sets the present line number count value. For more information, see Count (on page 126).

NUMBERCOUNT

Increment - Increases the line number count value. For more information, see Increment (on page 127).

NUMBER+

Decrement - Decreases the line number count value. For more information, see Decrement (on page 127).

NUMBER-

Assign - Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. For more information, see Assign (on page 127).

NUMBERASSIGN

Annotate - Labels components with existing line numbers. For more information, see Annotate (on page 128).

NUMBERANNOTATE

Line - Sets the current line number to match that of a component that you select. For more information, see Line (on page 129).

COMP2LINE

Line Isolate - Isolates components based on their line numbers or their specifications. For more information, see Line Isolate (on page 129).

LINEISOLATE

LNum Panel

LNum Panel


Setup

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Setup

Line Number toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Setup

Command line: NUMBERSETUP

Modifies any line number configuration. You can turn the line numbering system on or off. If the system is on, it can operate in a static or dynamic mode.

In the dynamic mode, CADWorx adjusts the line number according to the size or specification. In the static mode, you must manually change the size and specification. Static is useful when all components and sizes of a particular piping run are required to have the same line number (such as, the 3/4” vent on an 8” process line needs a line number of 8”-150-2001-N). Static line numbering is also useful when selecting runs of piping for other functions with CADWorx. For more information, see LineNumberSystem (on page 37).

This system also works with a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file. You can change the configuration file location in SETUP to use the same project configuration as any P&ID project. For more information, see Setup (on page 26). Click Add in the Category group in this dialog box to select additional fields located in the process lines table of a typical P&ID project database. When using a P&ID project, changes made to a line number configuration within CADWorx reflect within the P&ID project.

If the system is not using a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file, the additional fields are obtained from the DATABASE.TBL file located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You must manually edit this file for any modifications required of the existing fields within the default line number system.

Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124)

Line Numbering System Dialog Box Controls parameters for line numbering systems. The name of the current configuration file displays at the top of the dialog box. You can also use a P&ID project configuration file.

Category - Specifies the active process line item. The list contains the process line items from the Database.TBL file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You can add these items to any line number system. After you select an item, click Add to place it in the Category list. Highlight the item in the right list box, and then click Delete to remove it from the line number system. You can also type in a value, and then click Add.

Add - Adds the item from the Category box to the Category list.

Delete - Removes the selected item from the Category list.

Separator - Specifies a separator character. Type an alphanumeric value (including special characters such as -, ~, #, or SPACE). Click Add to place it in the Category list. Highlight the item in the Category list, and then click Delete to remove it from the line number system.

Add - Adds the separator character to the Category list.

Delete - Removes the separator character from the Category list.

Default Value - Adds any default value to any category included in the Category list. The size and specification are disabled if the system is set to the dynamic mode.

System Off - Indicates that line numbers are not placed in the drawing.

LNum Panel


System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) - Indicates that each component placed in the drawing receives a line number. When this option is cleared, the line number is not placed on the component.

System On (Static Size/Spec) - Indicates that the line number system uses the value in the Default value box, including the size and specification. This allows you to type anything for the size and specification.

Preview - Displays the line number based on the selected categories. The line number added to components looks similar to the Preview value.

Move Up - Moves the selected item higher in the Category list. The new order also displays in the Preview box.

Move Down - Moves the selected item lower in the Category list. The new order also displays in the Preview box.

Set

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Set

Line Number toolbar: Set

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Set

Command line: NUMBERSET

Sets the line number from one of three sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a selected component.

P&ID - Requires a valid CADWorx P&ID project using an Access database. If the configuration file is the same as an existing P&ID project, this option automatically supplies all the line numbers within that project from the process lines table. The line numbers supplied are of the same format as the project. If the configuration file is not the same, a standard file dialog box displays requesting the location of the database to use.

Current Drawing - Sets the line numbers based on the current drawing. This option searches the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select Item dialog box. This option requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable is set to 2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

Component - Sets the line numbers based on a component that you select from the current drawing. This option searches the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select Item dialog box. This option requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable is set to 2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

Select Item Dialog Box (on page 144)


Set line numbers based on a P&ID project (on page 126)

Set line numbers based on the current drawing (on page 126)

Set line numbers based on a component (on page 126)

LNum Panel


Set line numbers based on a P&ID project

1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line and press ENTER.

2. Type P on the command line and press ENTER, or select Process drawings from the popup menu.

The Select Database File dialog box displays.

3. Select the P&ID Access database file.

4. Click Open on the Select Database File dialog box.

The software sets the line numbers.

Set line numbers based on the current drawing

1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line and press ENTER.

2. Type D on the command line and press ENTER, or select current Drawing from the popup menu.

The Select Item dialog box displays.

3. If needed, use the Filter box to limit the items that display.

4. Select the item to use from the list.

5. Click OK.


Set line numbers based on a component

1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Type C on the command line and press ENTER, or select Component from the popup menu.

3. Select the component in the drawing.


Count

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Count

Line Number toolbar: Count

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Count

Command line: NUMBERCOUNT

Sets the present line number count value.

This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable to 1. This is the same as selecting the System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

LNum Panel


Set the line count value

1. Click Count . Alternatively, type NUMBERCOUNT on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Type the line count value on the command line, and press ENTER.

The software sets the line count number.

Increment

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Increment

Line Number toolbar: Increment

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Increment

Command line: NUMBER+

Increases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0001, then this increments it to 0002.

Decrement

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Decrement

Line Number toolbar: Decrement

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Decrement

Command line: NUMBER-

Decreases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0002, this decrements it to 0001.

Assign

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Assign

Line Number toolbar: Assign

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Assign

Command line: NUMBERASSIGN

Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. In the static mode, the line number is replaced exactly as it is previewed in the Setup dialog box. This means that a 3/4” line can be assigned a 8”-150-2001-N line number. When in dynamic mode, the line number is automatically adjusted and the 3/4” line receives a line number of 3/4”-150-2001-N. This is based on the present size and specification listed within the component's data.

When selecting a component with a line number already attached, a message appears. Select Yes to assign the component the new line number. You can make your selection by window, fence, or by individually selecting a component. During the process, a rubberband cursor appears indicating which component is being assigned the new line number.

LNum Panel


Assign line numbers

1. Click Assign . Alternatively, type NUMBERASSIGN on the command line, and press ENTER.

Current line number is 4"-150-HWS-3001-N.

2. Select all the components requiring a new number.

3. Press ENTER to finish the selection process.

If the component already has a line number, a prompt appears confirming replacement.

Component has existing line number of 4"-150-HWS-3001-N

Replace with line number of 2"-150-HWS-3001-N

4. Type N on the command line and press ENTER, or select No from the popup menu to leave the line numbers as they are.

Type Y on the command line and press ENTER, or select Yes from the popup menu to replace the line numbers.

Type A on the command line and press ENTER, or select yes to All from the popup menu to skip all future prompts and replace the line numbers.

The software assigns the line numbers.

Annotate

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Annotate

Line Number toolbar: Annotate

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Annotate

Command line: NUMBERANNOTATE

Labels components with existing line numbers. The text size is based upon the AutoCAD environment variable TEXTSIZE and is placed on the default text layer. You can select individual components to annotate. During the labeling process, a rubberband cursor appears indicating which component is being labeled.

Label components with line numbers

1. Click Annotate . Alternatively, type NUMBERANNOTATE on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the components to annotate.

3. Select the point for the annotation.

4. Select the direction for the annotation, or type the angle for the annotation on the command line and press ENTER.

The software places the annotation.

LNum Panel


Line

CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Line

Setting toolbar: Line

Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Line

Command line: COMP2LINE

Sets the current line number by selecting a component with the required line number. Any components created after running this command use the new line number.

This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 37) variable to 2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 124).

Set the current line number to that of a component

1. Click Line . Alternatively, type COMP2LINE on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select a component in the drawing.

CADWorx displays the line number.

Line Isolate Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate

Command line: LINEISOLATE

Isolates components based on their line numbers or their specifications. You can use this command to isolate an entire line number or to isolate one line number and include surrounding buildings or equipment. It can also turn off any isolation of components or surrounding equipment and building.

Isolate - Isolates only components with particular specifications or line numbers. This option hides all objects including non-CADWorx objects in the drawing. To make them visible again, run this command again and select the Show all option.

Partial isolate - Works similar to the Isolate option, except that it leaves the surrounding graphics (building, equipment, dimensions, and so on) visible. This option has the same additional options as Isolate.

Show all - Turns off any isolation and makes all objects in the drawing visible.

Spec - Lists all specs used in the model. You can select one or more specifications to isolate.

Line number - Lists all line numbers used in the drawing. You can select one or more line numbers to isolate.

List - Displays a dialog box listing either the specifications or line numbers within the drawing. You can select one or more items using the standard Windows selection methods.

Select component - Select a component in the drawing.

LNum Panel



S E C T I O N 6

CADWorx Plant I tab > Steel BOM DB Panel

Command Description Command line

BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 132).

BOMSETUP

Cut BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of pipe with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut Pipe Bill of Material (on page 134).

BOMCUT

Total BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of pipe in each size. For more information, see Total Pipe Bill of Material (on page 136).

BOMTOTAL

Single BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single Pipe Bill of Material (on page 138).

BOMSINGLE

Export BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. For more information, see Export Pipe Bill of Material (on page 139).

BOMEXPORT

Import BOM - Imports a database into a Bill a Material schedule. For more information, see Import Pipe Bill of Material (on page 141).

BOMIMPORT

Delete BOM - Deletes all entities designated for Bill of Material. For more information, see Delete Bill of Material (on page 141).

BOMDELETE

Tag Toggle - Turns on and off the placement of tags. For more information, see Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 141).

TAGTOGGLE

Tag Location - Moves a tag. For more information, see Tag Location (on page 141).

TAGRELOCATE

Insert Tag - Places a tag on the drawing without having to run a Bill of Material. For more information, see Insert Tag (on page 142).

TAGINSERT

Setup Live Database - Links the drawing to an external database. For more information, see Setup Live Database (on page 142).

LIVEDB

Export Pipe - Exports CADWorx component information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).

DBFGEN

Import Pipe - Imports and draws CADWorx components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Import Pipe (on page 145).

DBFIN

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Audit Pipe Database - Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. For more information, see Audit Pipe Database (on page 145).

DBAUDIT

Synchronize - Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. For more information, see Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 146).

SYNC

C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected pipe members. For more information, see C.G. Generator (on page 147).

CG

Bill of Material Setup CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Setup

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Setup

Command line: BOMSETUP

Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. Using this dialog box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of over 30 different entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.

Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.

Use the Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 141) command to turn the tags on and off in the schedule.

Bill of Material Setup Dialog Box

Defines or edits the Bill of Material (BOM) schedule template. The template is stored in the configuration file listed at the top of the dialog.

Database Columns Available - Lists all the information that you can include in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.

There are six special columns: USER1, USER2, USER3, USER4, USER5, UNIT. These columns are blank in the BOM. You can manually enter data after the BOM is generated.

PT4_X, PT4_Y and PT4 _Z are the world coordinate system location of the approximate center point of the component.

BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected and their order of appearance in the schedule from left (top of list box) to right (bottom of list box). Use Sort Order to set the order by which these columns are sorted.

Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the Database Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking the column name in the list.

Alignment - Specifies the text alignment for the selected column.

Grow Direction - Specifies whether the schedule should start at the top and work its way down or start at the bottom and work its way up.

Move Up and Move Down - Defines the column order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to place the column further left in the BOM. Click Move Down to place the selected column further right in the BOM.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of the columns. Use Sort Order to define the sort order.

Column title - Specifies the text heading for the selected column.

Column width - Specifies the width for the selected column.

Sort Order - Controls the sort order and accumulation of pipe components in the BOM. For more information, see BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 134).


Add or remove properties from BOM (on page 133)

Change the column order (on page 133)

Change text alignment in columns (on page 133)

Change the BOM sorting and accumulation (on page 134)

Add or remove properties from BOM

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Setup .

You can also type BOMSETUP in the command line.

The Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.

2. To add a property to the BOM, double-click the property in the Database Columns Available list.

Use the Column title and Column width boxes to define the column heading text and the column width respectively.

3. To remove a property from the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns Selected list.

4. Click OK.

Change the column order




2. Select the column to move in the BOM Columns Selected list.

3. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the column order. The column order in the list top to bottom is the column order in the BOM from left to right.

4. Click OK.

Change text alignment in columns




2. Select the column to edit in the BOM Columns Selected list.

3. Select Left, Center, or Right to control the vertical text justification in the selected column.

4. Select Downward or Upward to control the horizontal alignment of the text in the selected column.

5. Click OK.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Change the BOM sorting and accumulation




2. Click Sort Order.

The BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Control Setup dialog box displays.

3. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list.

4. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM.

5. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how information in that column is sorted. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Descending is large number to smaller (100 to 1) and Z to A.

6. Click OK on the BOM Sort Order dialog box.

7. Click OK on the Bill of Material Setup dialog box.

BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box Controls the sort order of the BOM. Columns that you place in the BOM Columns Selected list are used to sort the BOM starting with the top column, then the second column, and so forth. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order in which the BOM is sorted.

This dialog box also controls the accumulation of piping components. If two valves have different TAG values and you do not want these to accumulate, then you need to add TAG to the BOM Columns Selected list.

BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can use to sort the BOM. These columns can be used to sort using Add.

BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected for sorting and their sort order from top to bottom.

Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking on the column name in the list.

Column Sort - Controls additional sorting on each selected column. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z.

If you want the BOM to sort from large size piping to small size piping, use Descending for MAIN_NOM and RED_NOM.

Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.

Cut Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Cut

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Cut

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Cut

Command line: BOMCUT

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of pipe with a length and a tag. Identical items are accumulated in the quantity column.


Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set, the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of tags.

Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed.

Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space, CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32).

The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 32) variable in the Configuration Settings.

A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.

CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only. This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32).


Cut BOM using Automatic placement (on page 135)

Cut BOM using Manual placement (on page 136)

Cut BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Cut .

You can also type BOMCUT in the command line.

2. Select the Automatic placement option.

3. Enter the placement angle for the tag.

4. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


5. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.

The BOM is generated.

Cut BOM using Manual placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Cut .

You can also type BOMCUT in the command line.

2. Select the Manual placement option.



5. Specify the tag location for each component you selected.


Total Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Total

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Total

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Total

Command line: BOMTOTAL

Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of pipe in each size. Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column.

Bill of Material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.




Pipe BOM / DB Panel






Total BOM using Automatic placement (on page 137)

Total BOM using Manual placement (on page 137)

Total BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Total .

You can also type BOMTOTAL in the command line.






Total BOM using Manual placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Total .

You can also type BOMTOTAL in the command line.






Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Single Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Single

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Single

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Single

Command line: BOMSINGLE

Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object having its own line in the schedule.









Single BOM using Automatic placement (on page 139)

Single BOM using Manual placement (on page 139)

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Single BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Single .

You can also type BOMSINGLE in the command line.






Single BOM using Manual placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Single .

You can also type BOMSINGLE in the command line.






Export Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Export

Command line: BOMEXPORT

Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. The schedule for the Bill of Material is defined using Bill of Material Setup (on page 132). CADWorx can export the Bill of Material schedules to:

Access file (*.mdb)

Excel file (*.xls)

Text file (*.txt)

HTML file (*.htm)

When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.

An additional command called BOMEXTERNAL is available to export a project database to a file based on the columns chosen in the BOMSETUP.

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export .

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


You can also type BOMEXPORT in the command line.

2. Specify if you want an Cut, Total, or Single BOM.

3. Select the objects to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.

4. In the Save as type box, select the file format that you want.

5. Type the file name, and specify the folder location.

6. Click Save.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Import Pipe Bill of Material Plant menu: Bill of Material > Import

Command line: BOMIMPORT

Imports a database into a Bill of Material schedule on the present drawing. The schedule is generated using the BOMSETUP parameters, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 132). You can import only Access files (*.mdb) formats created with the DBFGEN command. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).

This command cannot be used to import data from the files generated with the BOMEXPORT command because BOMEXPORT exports only partial field information. BOMIMPORT command expects all the fields to be present.

1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Import.

You can also type BOMIMPORT in the command line.

2. Specify if you want an Cut length, Total length, or Single item BOM.

3. Select to use the current database or to select another database. The current database displays in the command line area.

4. Select the upper right corner location of the Bill of Material in the drawing.

Delete Bill of Material Plant menu: Bill of Material > Delete

Command line: BOMDELETE

Deletes all entities that are on the layer designated for Bill of Materials in the current configuration settings. This option cannot be used for deleting partial tags or for deleting the schedule only.

1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Delete.

You can also type BOMDELETE in the command line.

Tag Toggle Bill of Material Plant menu: Bill of Material > Tag > Toggle

Command line: TAGTOGGLE

Toggle Bill of Material tags in the schedule on and off.

1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Tag > Toggle.

You can also type TAGTOGGLE in the command line.

Tag Location Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Location

Command line: TAGRELOCATE (EQUIPTAGRELOCATE in CADWorx Equipment)

Relocates a tag. This command is useful when tags are placed on top of each other. Optionally, this command deletes the connector line from the item mark to the component. This is useful when multiple items are required for one location, such as gaskets and bolts associated with a flange.

Tags and the associated leader lines are grouped. This makes them easier to manipulate. You can use the AutoCAD Group command to un-group the items and manually rearrange them.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Insert Tag Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Insert

Command line: TAGINSERT (EQUIPTAGINSERT in CADWorx Equipment)

Places tags on the drawing without having to run the main Bill of Material generator. The tag is scaled according to the present text size.

Setup Live Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Setup

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Setup

Command line: LIVEDB

CADWorx supports a fully functional live external database. Use this command to define the database settings that are saved to the configuration file listed. When a drawing is opened and a configuration file is located in the same folder, the drawing initializes according to that configuration file using a live database or not.

When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then the item is deleted from the database.

All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session.

On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing.

Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed.

Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an existing database.

SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER.

Oracle Schema - Defines the Oracle database information. Type the ODBC schema name in the Schema box.

Startup Dialog Options - Sets the database option on CADWorx startup.

No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with the appropriate configuration file.

No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.

Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or not.

Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by using DBFGEN for Pipe or SDBFGEN for Steel. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Export Pipe CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Export

Command line: DBFGEN

Exports CADWorx component information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.

When using live database, this command updates the appropriate database setup for the drawing.

Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a Microsoft Excel file.

Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of the dialog display the file name and folder in use.

Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database file at the same time.

New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type.

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export .

You can also type DBFGEN in the command line.





or

Choose Select component to select the needed components by crossing, window, or any other preferred method.

4. Select the components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.

The Select Database Type dialog box displays.

5. Select Access or Excel to define the file type.

6. Click Browse, and define the folder and file name.

7. Select New if you are creating a new file.

or

Select Append/Sync if you want to synchronize an existing file.

8. Click OK.

If live database is being used, the prompt Continue to update live database? [Yes/No] <Yes>: displays.

9. Click Yes to update the database.

or

Click No to stop updating the live database.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Select Item Dialog Box Lists all the line number or specifications in the drawing (or database). You can select multiple items using the CTRL or SHIFT keys.

Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive.

Wildcards

Character Used to

# (pound) Matches any single numeric digit

@ (at) Matches any single alphabetic character

. (period) Matches any single non-alphanumeric character

* (asterisk) Matches any character sequence, including an empty one, and it can be used anywhere in the search pattern: beginning, middle, or end

? (question mark) Matches any single character

~ (tilde) If it is the first character in the pattern, it matches anything except the pattern

[...] Matches any one of the characters enclosed

[~...] Matches any single character not enclosed

- (hyphen) Used inside brackets to specify a range for a single character

, (comma) Separates two patterns

` (reverse quote) Escapes special characters (reads next character literally)

In the example below, lines with 2C or A1 display for selection.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Import Pipe

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Import

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Import

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Import

Command line: DBFIN

Imports and draws CADWorx components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This command is not available when you are using a live database.

You can select one or more drawings to import. CADWorx then draws the imported components in single line mode. These can be converted to any other modes using the Mode Convert (on page 70) tools available.

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Import .

You can also type DBFIN in the command line.


2. Browse to and select the file to import.

3. Click Open.

The Select Item dialog box displays.

4. Select the drawings in the file to import into the active drawing.

5. Click OK.

Audit Pipe Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Audit

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Audit

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Audit

Command line: DBAUDIT

Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. Use this command whenever the drawing or the database has any problems. If a problem is found in the drawing, for example a component in the database is not present in the drawing, you have the option to delete this component in the database or to simply ignore it.

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Audit .

You can also type DBAUDIT in the command line.


2. Browse to and select the file to audit against the drawing.

3. Click Open.

The message Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database displays.

4. If no problems are found, the message Audit completed displays.

5. If a problem is found, you are prompted to delete the row from the database. Select Yes to delete the row. Select No to ignore the row.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


Synchronize Pipe Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Synchronize

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Synchronize

Command line: SYNC

Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. This command does not write new records to the database for new components that are in the model but are not in the database. You need to use Setup Live Database (on page 142) before using this command.

When a drawing has a live database attached, you can open the database and edit the ALPHA_SIZE, SHORT_DESC, LONG_DESC, TAG, LINE_NUM, DB_CODE, and WEIGHT values in the PIPE table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect on the drawing.

If the SPEC_FILE column value is changed, the values in the other columns listed above are ignored. The SPEC_FILE column value must be changed to an existing valid specification. The column values listed above are updated according to the information derived from the specification. When a specification is changed, it must match the base rating of the specification. For example, changing a component from a 150 lb rated specification to a 300 lb rated specification causes discontinuity within the drawing. This discontinuity does not present itself until a mode convert is performed on the component.

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize .

You can also type SYNC in the command line.

2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to synchronize the drawing with the database.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel


C.G. Generator CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > C.G. Generator

Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: C.G. Generator

Plant menu: Accessory > C.G. Generator

Command line: CG

This routine provides center of gravity calculations for components drawn in X,Y planes (2D plans) or in X,Y,Z planes (3D Model). It does not provide center of gravity locations for equipment and other miscellaneous items that do not have a centerline xdata. You can use a generic attach (from Plant>Toolbars>Misc) which provides the center of gravity location and weight.

Selection can be done by crossing, window, or selecting individual component centerlines.

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click C.G. Generator .





or


Select objects:

99 found (not necessarily the number of components)

44 were filtered out.

Select objects: select more or enter to end

The next option writes the information to an external file. You can hit enter for no file or enter a file name.

Enter name of file or enter for none: C:\CG\32-002.CGC

View file [Yes/No] <Yes>: enter to view items

If you answered yes to the preceding prompt, they are able to view the contents of the file name above. If you just hit enter at the prompt asking for a file name, no file written, they are still be able to view the contents of CADWorx's default file. A list of items scrolls by of each component found. It is best to write to a file, then view it with a text editor (NOTEPAD).

Total count...55 items

Listing...finished

Items....

Weight Sum = 1759.22 lb

Sum (X * W) = 44829.7300 ft-lb

Sum (Y * W) = 25511.6400 ft-lb

Sum (Z * W) = 4750.8520 ft-lb

The Center of Gravity X,Y,Z is 25.4827 ft 14.5017 ft 2.7005 ft

Insert drawing marker [Yes/No] <Yes>:

To combine center of gravity reports from steel and piping components, take the weight summations and add them together. Take each separate moment (ft-lb) X, Y, Z and add them together separately. To find the new X centroid location, divide the total X moment by the total weight. To find the new Y and Z centroid location, divide them by the total weight.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel



S E C T I O N 7

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc


Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For more information, see Auto Connect (on page 150).

CONNECTOG

Group On/Off - Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics. For more information, see Group On/Off (on page 150).

GROUPTOG

Weld Size - Sets the default size of the weld dots that accompany single line components. For more information, see Weld Size (on page 151).

WELDSIZE

Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn in the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on page 151)

TOPWORKSADD

Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or deletes top works already associated with a valve. For more information, see Top Works Change (on page 151).

TOPWORKSCHANGE

System Out - Creates a CAESAR II input file. For more information, see System Out (on page 152).

C2OUT

Create - Creates symmetrical or non-symmetrical user shape components. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153).

USERCREATE

Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 173).

GENERIC

System In - Reads a CAESAR II input file. For more information, see System In (on page 174).

C2IN

Elbow Centerline - Turns on or off elbow centerlines for use with isometrics. For more information, see Elbow Centerline (on page 175).

ELBOWCL

ISO Flag - Sets a flag in the component indicating that the present stored length should be used regardless of what type of length modifications are made to the pipe component. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175).

ISOFLAG

Misc Panel

Misc Panel


Dim Adjustment - Adjusts a dimension when the pipe segments of a particular run have been adjusted or modified with the ISO flag command. For more information, see Dim Adjustment (on page 175).

DIMADJUST

System Visibility - Turns on or off visibility of components usually located on the system layer. For more information, see System Visibility (on page 177).

SYSVIS

Auto Connect

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Auto Connect

Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Connect

Settings toolbar:

Command line: CONNECTTOG

Turns automatic connection on or off. Auto connection provides minimum prompts and makes certain assumptions.

The last component placed in the drawing provides the starting point for the next component. The direction of the last component indicates the direction of the new component.

If you select a component which requires a second direction, such as an elbow, or tee, there are additional prompts requesting the direction.

Typical elbow - Prompts you for a direction.

Pipe with an arbitrary length - Prompts you for an end point.

Elbow pointing up or down - Prompts you for a direction.

This is useful for placing components down a line. It can dramatically decrease the time required to place components in assemblies, such as control valve bypass loops.

If you have run any type of mode conversion, the last point is not available. The software prompts you to pick the starting point.

Auto Connect does not work in conjunction with Router (on page 191).

Group On/Off

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Group On/Off

Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Group On/Off

Settings toolbar:

Command line: GROUPTOG

Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics. This is useful for selecting any piece of the component rather than only the centerline. By default, grouping is turned on.

Misc Panel


Weld Size

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Weld Size

Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Weld Size

Command line: WELDSIZE

Specifies the default size of the weld dots that accompany single line components. This command also allows for the change of weld dots already placed in the drawing.


Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe (on page 151)

Change all of the weld dots on a drawing

Change individual weld dots

Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe

1. Click Weld Size . Alternatively, type WELDSIZE on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Type the new weld size on the command line, and press ENTER.

The software changes the weld dot size.

Top Works Add

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Top Works Add

Operators toolbar: Top Works Add

Command line: TOPWORKSADD

Adds top works to a valve already drawn in the model.

Top Works Change CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Top Works Change

Operators toolbar: Top Works Change

Command line: TOPWORKSCHANGE

Changes the orientation of or deletes top works already associated with a valve.

Misc Panel


System Out

CADWorx Plant I tab: MISC > System Out

Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System Out

Command line: C2OUT

Creates a CAESAR II input file. This input file can then be used in CAESAR II without any modification. Components selected in the drawing convert to the appropriate elements for the stress model. For example, a tee connected to pipe in all directions is represented with one node at the intersection instead of four (three at the ends and one at the intersection). This provides the stress analyst a model that is ready for use. All pertinent information is transferred (weights, wall thickness, and so on).

The selection process in the drawing environment is available in two ways. The first requires selecting the components with the standard selection processes in AutoCAD. This can include selection by crossing, window or any other preferred method. The second selection process allows the selection by line number or selecting a component with an existing line number. The database option is not available with this command.

Generate a CAESAR II input file

1. Click System Out . Alternatively, type C2OUT on the command line, and press ENTER.

The CAESAR II Input File dialog box displays.

2. Specify the location and file name for the file, and click Save.





or


Provide start locations [Yes/No] <No>

5. Select Yes to provide a start and direction, or select No to process all of the components.

6. Press ENTER to finish the selection.

Example

1. Select the starting point at node 10.

2. Select anywhere along the centerline toward node 90 for a direction.

3. Select the intersection at 30, and then select a direction toward 50.

4. Select a point at 40 and then select a direction toward 50.

5. Select the intersection at 50 and then select a direction toward 70.

6. You could let CAESAR II automatically node the rest of the model, or you could finish by manually selecting the next point at 30 and then selecting a direction toward 90.



Misc Panel


Make sure Ortho is off, and use OSnap NEArest to pick along centerlines for directions.

User Shapes

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Create

Misc toolbar: Create

Command line: USERCREATE

Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape components. Symmetrical shapes require you to draw an outline that can be used to create the user component. Non-symmetrical shapes require a block or an object completely drawn in 2D and 3D that represents the complete component. A symmetrical object can be converted from 2D to 3D Mode, or vice versa, using the mode convert (on page 70) commands. It does not allow double-line to single-line conversion in 2D mode. Non-symmetrical shapes can only convert between isometric and solids (Convert Isometric (on page 71) or 3D Solids (on page 71)).

1. Create the component.

2. Modify the specification.

Misc Panel


3. Click Create , or type USERCREATE on the command line and press ENTER.

The Define User Shape dialog box displays.

Each dialog box option is explained below.

User shape components can also be tagged as optional components in the specification. This allows for an infinite number of additional components.

For symmetrically shaped components, draw a 2D polyline indicating the outline of the shape. The symmetrical shape is limited to straight lines between vertices in the polyline. In other words, there cannot be a fillet radius on any corner of the polyline. If fillets exist, the routine draws them with chamfered corners. Draw only half of the shape on one side of the centerline. We recommend preparing an outline before trying to draw the polyline. For example, draw the component using standard AutoCAD methods or CADWorx components, and then draw a polyline around the contour.

For symmetrical shapes, the polyline may overlap as shown in the example below for 2D solids (drawn to each indicated point, PT1, PT2, and so on). For use with 3D solids, the polyline cannot overlap (there cannot be a PT4 or PT7). If the polyline overlaps, an ACIS error occurs indicating the object cannot be revolved.

For non-symmetrically shaped components, you must first create a 2D and 3D representation. This representation needs to show all the required details of the component. The 3D representation is used when in the 3D drawing mode. It can be used for orthographic and model-type representation. The 2D representation is used when in the 2D isometric drawing mode.

After the polyline or components are complete, click Create . This creates a data file in the required folder with the required file name. For non-symmetrically shaped components, it also creates two drawing files: one 2D and one 3D. The drawing names have appended in square brackets, the size and drawing mode (for example, [4.0-3D]). The file name must be unique. User Shapes are stored in Product Folder]\Plant\Spec\UserShape_I. You can change were User Shapes are stored under Folder Settings in the Define User Shape dialog box.

Make sure to set a default size and specification first. Create must be run multiple times for creating components with different sizes.

Component Setup

Name - Specifies the name of the user shape. There is a 20 character limit.

Number - Specifies the number of the user shape. Select a number in the range of 1 to 5.

Specification - Sets the specification for the user shape.

Assign to Spec - Assigns the user shape to other specifications.

Save to Catalog - Saves the user shape to the catalog.

Folder Settings

Folder - Defines the save location for the user shape.

Browse - Enables you to search the computer folders for a specific location.

Misc Panel


Define Size and Geometry

Type - Sets the type selection for the user shape.

Block - Specifies a block to form the shape. If the component is created on layer 0, it inherits the specification color when inserted. This option requires a fully developed component drawn to the correct size with AutoCAD or CADWorx. The software removes any attached extended entity data. This option is used with non-symmetrical components.

Select Polyline - Specifies a polyline to form the shape. The software automatically extracts all the points from the selected polyline. You must first select the reference and end points. This option is used with symmetrical components.

Pick Point - Specifies each point required to form the shape. You must first select the reference and end points (PT1 and PT37 in the following figure). This option is used with symmetrical components. Press ENTER to end the sequence.

Main Size - Sets the main size of the user shape.

Reduction Size - Sets the reduction size of the user shape.

Select 3D Solid - Creates 3D user shapes.

Select 2D Double Line - Creates 2D double line user shapes.

Select 2D Single Line - Creates 2d single line user shapes.

Define Connections - Defines the end type connection for the user shape. You can select Buttweld, Socket, Threaded, or Flanges. The user shape must have been previously selected with either Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line.

If the component is less than 1/16" long (2 mm when in metric mode), the associated xdata is in an inserted block named XATB. It is located on the default layer named SYSTEM instead of the CL layer so that it does not plot or display while this layer is turned off.

If the component is non-symmetrical, there is an inserted block named NATB located at the start point. This block, like the XATB block, contains all the associated xdata and acts as any other component.

When a 2D representation of a non-symmetrical component is not present (that is, only the 3D representation option is used) and the component is converted to the 3D mode, the NATB remains. This block can be converted to 2D but does not have any graphics in the 3D mode. The NATB and XATB blocks can be moved and controlled just as any other CADWorx component.

Misc Panel


Spec Properties

BOM Type - Sets the bill of material type for the user shape.

Color - Sets the color of the user shape.

Layer - Sets the layer for the user shape. This setting defaults to the layer named as the specification in the Define User Shape dialog box.

Material - Sets the material type of the user shape.

Density - Sets the density of the user shape.

Weight - Sets the weight of the user shape

Length - Sets the length of the user shape.

Sort Sequence - Sets the sort sequence of the user shape.

Optional Component - Sets the user shape as an optional component.

With the use of optional components, a specification file can have an unlimited number of user shapes.

Description

Long - Describes the component in long format.

Short - Describes the component in short format.

Tag - Tags the user shape with the entered information.

Notes - Sets other information about the user shape.

Isogen Symbol Information

Identifier - Identifies the isogenic information for the component.

SKEY - Sets the SKEY for the user shape.

Rating

Component Class - Sets the specification class for the user shape.

Temperature Rating - Sets the highest temperature allowed for the user shape.

Pressure Rating - Sets the highest pounds per square inch allowed for the component.

Define User Shape Dialog Box buttons

OK - Creates the user shape.

Cancel - Cancels creation of the user shape.

Help - Displays the online help file.

When placing non-symmetrical user shapes

Up - Rolls the component by 90 degrees. This option turns the component up if the non-symmetrical component has a branch-like extrusion.

Down - Rolls the component by –90 degrees. This option turns the component down if the non-symmetrical component has a branch-like extrusion.

Roll - Allows the non-symmetrical user shape to be rolled at any angle. When the component has been flipped with one of the mirror options, the angle may need to be negative. If the rolled angle input is incorrect, retype the angle as a negative to correct it. When the component has been turned up or down with one of the options above, rolling is from that location.

Misc Panel


mirrorX - Mirrors the non-symmetrical user shape along the X-axis. After a shape has been mirrored, it has an effect on all the options above. Run this option again to place the component back in its original position.

mirrorY - Mirrors the nonsymmetrical user shape along the Y-axis. After a shape has been mirrored, it has an effect on all the options above. Run this option again to place the component back in its original position.

mirrorZ - Mirrors the nonsymmetrical user shape along the Z-axis. After a shape has been mirrored, it has an effect on all the options above. Run this option again to place the component back in its original position.

<Pick rotation> - Rotates the nonsymmetrical user shape by the angle you specify. This option causes the command to exit, and the options above become unavailable. This should be the last option chosen.


Create a user shape file (on page 157)

Edit an existing user shape (on page 158)

Create a user shape from points (on page 162)

Create a user shape from a polyline (on page 164)

Create a user shape from a block (on page 165)

Create a 3D user shape (on page 167)

Create a 2D user shape (on page 168)

Create a 2D single line user shape (on page 170)

Add a user shape to a specification (on page 171)

Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172)

Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172)

Create a user shape file

1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press ENTER.


2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box.

3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5.

4. Select a specification in the Specification list.

5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box.

This is the default setting.

6. Select the type of the user shape in the Type list.

7. Select the main size in the Main Size list.

8. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box.

The Reducing Size list becomes available.

9. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.

Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file.

10. Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the prompts.

Misc Panel


11. Click Define Connections.

Pick direction.

12. Select a direction in the drawing.

Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End Type>.

13. Select an end type for the user shape.

Pick connection 1 or <Enter to finish>.

14. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted and then press ENTER when finished.


Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and affect the scaling if not properly selected.

15. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list.

16. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list.

17. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box.

18. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.

19. Type the density of the component in the Density box.

20. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.

21. Type the length of the component in the Length box.

22. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.

23. Select Optional Component to make this component an optional component.

24. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.

25. Type the short description in the Short box.

26. Type the tag information in the Tag box.

27. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.

The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or use the information as needed.

28. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box.

29. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list.

30. Type the component class in the Component Class box.

31. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.

32. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.

33. Click OK.

The software creates the user shape.

The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 498) toolbar. For more information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 172).

Edit an existing user shape


2. Select the name of the user shape, you want to modify, in the Name box.

Misc Panel


The software auto-populates the boxes with the information you used when you initially created the shape.

3. Change any other data as needed.

4. When finished making changes to the file, click OK.

The software updates the user shape.


Edit by redefining connection points

Command line: EDITUSERSHAPE

Enables you to redefine connection points on user shapes.

When you import legacy user shape data, the software may not map the connection points. Use EDITUSERSHAPE to define the user shape connection points.

1. Type EDITUSERSHAPE on the command line, and then press ENTER.

2. Select the user shape to edit.

3. Select connection points for each point you want to change, and then select an end type.

4. Changing the connections points and end types, and then press ENTER to finish.

The connection points update in the drawing and the catalog, with routing points added to the user shape.

ISOGEN Export Options

Select connection points based on the images below, where one is the first pick, two is the second pick, and so on. For MISC-COMPONENT-OFFSET, point 1 and point 2 are required. Point 3 and Point 4 are optional.

PCF Identification Valid SKEY Connection Points

Connection Points Order

NUT BNUT 1

Misc Panel


SUPPORT 4 blank chars

1

CAP KA** 2

MISC-COMPONENT-RETURN

BR** 2

Misc Panel


TEE TE**, TS** 3

VALVE-3WAY V3** 3

MISC-COMPONENT-ANGLE

BA** 3

F_465814

Misc Panel


CROSS CR** 4

MISC-COMPONENT-OFFSET

BO** 4

Create a user shape from points








6. Select Pick Points in the Type list.

7. Click Select.

Pick point.

F_465816

Misc Panel


8. Select points on the drawing based on the following graphic.

Pick insertion point.

Select an insertion point on the shape.

Pick end point.

9. Select an end point on the drawing.

If reducing is selected as the insertion point you receive the following prompt. If not skip to step 12.

Set start connection as reducing [Yes/No]<No>.

10. Select the required option.

Set End Type at start connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld end type>.


Set End Type at end connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld end type>.








16. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153).








24. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.



Misc Panel










34. Click OK.



Create a user shape from a polyline








6. Select Polyline in the Type list.

7. Click Select.

Select polyline.

8. Select the polyline that defines the shape.

The Selection dialog box displays.


Pick insertion point.

10. Select the insertion point on the model.

Pick end point.

11. Select the end point on the model.

The prompt below only displays if you have a reducing component in the user shape.

Set start connection as reducing [Yes/No]<No>.


Set End Type at start connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End Type>.


Set EndType at end connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End Type>.



Misc Panel

























35. Click OK.



Create a user shape from a block








6. Select Block from the Type list.



Misc Panel





10. Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the prompts.


Pick direction.



13. Select an end type for the connection.


14. Select a connection point on the drawing.

Pick direction.



16. Select an end type for the connection.


17. Press ENTER to finish.





















Misc Panel



36. Click OK.



Create a 3D user shape










8. If the component reduces, click the Reducing check box.




10. Click Select 3D Solid.

Select 3D solid representation.

11. Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower right of the drawing to select the entire user shape to create. Press ENTER to finish selection.

Pick insert point.

12. Select an insertion point on the component.


Pick direction.





16. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted, and then press ENTER when finished.




Misc Panel




















35. Click OK.



Create a 2D user shape














10. Click Select 2D Double Line.

Select 2D double line representation.

Misc Panel



Pick insert point.



Pick direction.





16. If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press ENTER when finished.






















35. Click OK.



Misc Panel


Create a 2D single line user shape














10. Click Select 2D Single Line.

Select 2D single line representation.


Pick insert point.



Pick direction.





16. If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press ENTER when finished.










Misc Panel














35. Click OK.



Add a user shape to a specification Adds a user shape to the specification.

If Spec Editor is already displayed skip to step 2.

1. Click Start Spec Editor on the spec view palette. Alternatively, click Spec Editor on the desktop.

The Specification Editor software opens.

2. Click File > Open.

The Open File dialog box displays.

3. Select a catalog, and then click Open.

The Catalog Data window displays.

4. Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder.

The Data Tables list displays.

5. Right-click User Shapes, and select Add Data Table .

The New Usershape Table displays.

6. Type the name of the table in the Name box.

7. Select a user type in the Type list.

8. Select a size table in the Size Table list.

You can select and clear multiple sizes by clicking the Size Table ellipsis.

9. Select the Reducing Component check box if you want this to be a reducing component.

10. Type the user shape folder name in the Usershape Folder box.

11. Type the part number in the Part Number box.

12. Type the description of the user shape in the Description box.

13. Click OK.

Misc Panel


The user shape file appears under the User Shape category in the Data Tables folder, and also to the right of Catalog Data, in the Main Table List View.

14. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.

You can now enter information for the specifics of the user shape that you have added to this specification catalog. For more information, see Add a new data table in CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide.

Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing

1. Click and hold Create on the Misc toolbar.

A list of numbered buttons displays.

2. Click the numbered button associated with the shape to place.

3. Select a point in the drawing.

4. Select a direction in the drawing, or type Up or Down.

The software places the shape in the drawing.

Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing

1. Click and hold Create on the Misc toolbar.

A list of numbered buttons displays.

2. Click the numbered button associated with the shape to place.

3. Select the start point for the shape in the drawing.

4. Select the rotation option that meets your requirements.


Misc Panel


Generic Attach

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Generic Attachment

Misc toolbar: Generic Attach

Command line: GENERIC

Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. You can use the information later in bill of material extraction, labeling, and so forth. After manually constructing a component, use this routine to attach xdata information.

You cannot attach information to a CADWorx object or component.

To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.

Place a generic attachment in the drawing

1. Click Generic Attachment . Alternatively, type GENERIC on the command line, and press ENTER.

The Generic Attach dialog box displays.

2. Alpha Size auto-populates with the main size already selected when you set up the drawing. Type the alpha size in the Alpha size box if you need to change it.

3. Type an abbreviated description, such as PUMP 2X1X8, in the Short annotation box.

4. Type a complete description, such as PUMP, INGERSOLL-RAND, MODEL HOC, 2X1X8, in the Long annotation box.

5. Type a line number in the Line number box, if you want to assign a line number to the component.

6. Type the tag in the Tag box.

7. Type the code in the Code box, if you want to assign a code to the component.


9. Type the sort sequence number for the bill of material schedule location in the Sort sequence box.


11. Change the Coordinates if available and needed.

12. Select Existing in the Miscellaneous column, if needed.

13. Change the BOM Item Type, if needed.

14. If BOM Mark Point is available, change as needed.

15. Click Attach.

Select an entity.

16. Select the object to attach the information.

The software attaches the information to the object, and a red arrow displays indicating where you attached the information.

Select another entity or Enter to stop.

17. Select other objects as needed, and press ENTER when finished.

The software attaches the information to the object.

Misc Panel


System In

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > System In

Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System In

Command line: C2IN

Reads a CAESAR II input file. You must select the necessary ._A or .C2 file. This is the input file created by CAESAR II or the output facility in CADWorx. After you select the input file, a dialog box indicating that the file was read displays.

Make sure that the CAESARVersion (on page 34) startup variable is set to match your CAESAR II installation. If this variable is set to 3.2, and the C2IN command is issued on a file created or modified with CAESAR II 4.40, then an error message displays indicating that the valid file is corrupt.

The next prompt requires that a specification be set. Although, there might be an existing specification set, confirmation or a new specification is required. The specification might not be used. The input facility in CADWorx attempts to determine the proper specification for the component being input from data in the CAESAR II input file. The input facility or the data in the input file does not always indicate a specification. Therefore, a default specification needs to be set for these components.

Caesar - Derives the descriptive information within any new components from the material passed back from CAESAR II and the name of the purposed component located in the PRGM.TBL file. This file is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. The system automatically assigns all the required paths for data files which might be used later for reconstruction (such as mode conversion). If the material was not supplied in CAESAR II, then this option uses the description from the specification but does not populate the line number.

Environment - Assigns the component information based on the default specification. It also assigns a line number if there is a current line numbering system setup. You are responsible for the correct line number being set before importing. This option overrides any material sent from CAESAR II. For example, if A-133-B material type was chosen in CAESAR II, and the default specification above dictated A-106-B as the material type, this option would override the A-333-B grade and place A-106-B in the component. The full description would be from the default specification set above.

Misc Panel


Read a CAESAR II input file

1. Click System In . Alternatively, type C2IN on the command line, and press ENTER.

The CAESAR II Input File dialog box displays.

2. Select the file to read, and click Open.

3. Set the default specification, or press ENTER to use the current specification.

The software reads the CAESAR II input file.

4. Select the option that meets your requirements.

The software writes the CAESAR II components in the drawing.

Elbow Centerline Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Elbow Center Line

Command line: ELBOWCL

Turns on or off elbow centerlines for use with isometrics. When toggled on, it provides square elbow centerlines which can be used for dimensioning. This also produces attractive isometrics.

ISO Flag Plant menu: Utility > ISO Flag

Command line: ISOFLAG

Sets a flag in the component indicating that the present stored length should be used regardless of what type of length modifications are made to the pipe component. This command only affects pipes and nipples. This is useful when adjusting a pipe which is to be used in an isometric. For example, if you use this command before stretching a pipe which was 120'-0" long to 5'-0" long, the Bill of Material generator reflects a 120'-0" long piece of pipe.

The component’s xdata is flagged when using the CEDIT dialog box.

Dim Adjustment Pipe menu: Utility Dim Adjustment

Command line: DIMADJUST

Adjusts a dimension when the pipe segments of a particular run have been adjusted or modified with the ISO flag command. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 175). This command works with the associate dimensioning setvar DIMASSOC on. The command also adjusts the pipe’s stored xdata length. This is performed by using the dimension to adjust the pipe’s xdata. You can adjust the pipe with Dimension option, or adjust the dimension with Pipe option. Both options of this command read and write fractional characters used with the dimension routines.

Options

Dimension - Adjusts the pipe to match an existing dimension. Select the dimension, then select the pipe’s centerline.

Pipe - Adjusts the dimension to match the stored length in the pipe’s xdata.

Misc Panel


Line - Adjusts the pipe distance to match the length of a line that you select. AutoCAD dimension lines stop at the back of the arrow, so they are not typically a good choice for this option.

Pick reference points - Adjusts the pipe distance based on two reference points that you select. This the most commonly used option and can be used to pick each end of a pipe.

For this option, the following prompts requests the selection of the pipe(s) that were adjusted. Selection can be made by crossing, window or individually selecting the centerlines. Other components which might have been selected with crossing or window are simply ignored. This only detects adjusted pipe.

Adjust a dimension to match a pipe 1. Click Plant > Utility > Dim Adjustment. Alternatively, type DIMADJUST on the command

line, and press ENTER.

2. Select Pipe.

3. Select the reference points for the pipe. Press ENTER to finish.

Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension 1. Click Plant > Utility > Dim Adjustment. Alternatively, type DIMADJUST on the command

line, and press ENTER.

2. Select Dimension.

3. Select the dimension text. Press ENTER to finish.

Misc Panel


System Visibility Command line: SYSVIS

Turns on or off visibility of components usually located on the system layer. The command affects the components listed below.

Weld gaps

Pads / Saddles

Bolts

Gaskets

Misc Panel



S E C T I O N 8

CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D


2D Representation - Creates a 2D representation. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 179).

2DREP

2D Representation Hidden - Creates a 2D representation with hidden lines. For more information, see 2D Representation Hidden (on page 180).

2DREPH

Box - Creates views based on a picked box. For more information, see Box (on page 180).

VIEWBOX

Edit - Edits a views box. For more information, see Edit (on page 181).

VIEWEDIT

Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more information, see Zoom Lock (on page 181).

ZOOMLOCK

Zoom Factors - Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. For more information, see Zoom Factors (on page 182).

ZOOMF

2D Representation

CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation

Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation

Command line: 2DREP EQUIP2DREP

Creates a two-dimension representation from a three-dimensional model. This command removes hidden lines and retains layer and color information. It can work in model or paper space. In model space, the 2D representation is created as a block.

An alternate command, 2DREPH (EQUIP2DREPH in CADWorx Equipment), is also available. This command exports the hidden lines from solids to the 2D representation. All other features of this command are similar to the 2DREP command.

Solids - Generates 2D representations of native AutoCAD 3D solids.

Centerlines - Copies selected CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines to the 2D representation.

Lines - Copies selected AutoCAD 3dPolyline, Arc, Circle, Ellipse, Leader, Line, Polyline, Spline and Helix to the 2D representation. This includes CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines.

This command only processes native AutoCAD solid and line entities that are typically created by CADWorx. This command does not process any custom solid or line entities that are created by other add-on AutoCAD applications.


Create a 2D representation (on page 180)

Create a 2D representation with hidden lines (on page 180)

2D Panel

2D Panel


Create a 2D representation 1. Type 2DREPEQUIP2DREP.

2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation.

3. Select the filter option that meets your needs.

If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off.

4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on.

This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.

2D Representation Hidden

CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation Hidden

Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation

Command line: 2DREPH

Creates a 2D representation with hidden lines. This command exports the hidden lines from solids to the 2D representation. All other features of this command are similar to the 2DREP command. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 179).

Create a 2D representation with hidden lines 1. Type 2DREPHEQUIP2DREPH.

2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation.

3. Select the filter option that meets your needs. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 179).

If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off.

4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on.

This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.

Box

CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Box

Command line: VIEWBOXEQUIPVIEWBOX

Displays the View Creation dialog box. This dialog box creates clipped views by defining a 3D box. This command is useful in creating layout drawings in paper space.

View Creation Dialog Box

View set name - Specifies the overall set name for the views. Each view created is named based on this name.

2D Panel


First corner point

Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the first corner point of the view box. Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes.

X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box.

Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box.

Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first and second corner points.

Second corner point

Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the second corner point of the view box. Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes.

X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box.

Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box.

Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first and second corner points.

Views

View Type - Indicates the orientation of the view.

Name - Specifies the view name. The default name is a combination of the View set name value and the View Type. After you create the view set, the views display in the AutoCAD View dialog box.

Available - Indicates whether the view is included in the set. Select the checkbox to include the view. Clear the checkbox to exclude the view.

Select All - Selects all of the check boxes in the Available column.

Delete All - Deletes all of the AutoCAD views that were previously created with this view set, and close the dialog box.

Set Current - Sets the AutoCAD window to the selected view.

Isolate Box - Hides all AutoCAD entities outside the view box. Entities that cross the boundaries of the view box are not hidden.

Show All - Shows all of the entities in the drawing.

Edit

CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Edit

Command line: VIEWEDITEQUIPVIEWEDIT

Edits the box created with the VIEWBOX command. For more information, see Box (on page 180)View Box. Double-clicking an existing view box runs this command.

Zoom Lock

CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Zoom Lock

Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Lock

Settings toolbar:

Command line: ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK

2D Panel


Locks the AutoCAD ZOOM command to allow zooming in paper space only. This means that while you are in paper space with the MSPACE command activated (the cursors are in the Mview), you can zoom without resizing the model space viewport. Instead, this command intercepts the ZOOM command and changes to paper space before zooming. When you are finished zooming, the command returns the cursor and environment back to the Mview.

This command simplifies working on CADWorx isometrics.


Turn on the zoom lock (on page 182)

Turn off the zoom lock (on page 182)

Turn on the zoom lock Type ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK.

Paperspace zoom lock toggled on.

Turn off the zoom lock Type ZOOMLOCKEQUIPZOOMLOCK.

Paperspace zoom lock toggled off.

Zoom Factors Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Factors

Command line: ZOOMF

Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. This command zooms to a perfect scale for your current Mview. If you use this command from model space (tilemode 1), it displays a warning that tilemode has to be set to 0 (paper space). After selecting the scale from one of the menus, a prompt displays requesting the center of the view.


S E C T I O N 9

CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt


Auto Gasket - Place gaskets automatically after the last flange face drawn. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183).

AUTOGASKET

Automatic - Sizes and places stud bolts automatically at each gasket. For more information, see Automatic (on page 184).

AUTOBOLT

Auto Weld - Places weld gaps automatically after the last butt weld drawn. For more information, see Auto Weld (on page 185).

AUTOWELD

Weld Total - For more information, see Weld Total (on page 186).

WELDTOTAL

Standard - Places standard stud bolts at the selected location. For more information, see Standard (on page 187).

STDBOLT

Non Standard - Places nonstandard stud bolts at the selected location. For more information, see Non Standard (on page 187).

NONSTDBOLT

Auto Gasket CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Gasket

Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Gasket

Command line: AUTOGASKET

Places a gasket on flange sets, and valves.

Automatic - Places a gasket into the drawing automatically.

Manual - Places a gasket into the drawing manually.

This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46).

Place a gasket automatically 1. Click Auto Gasket . Alternatively, type AUTOGASKET on the command line, and then

press ENTER.

2. Press ENTER for Automatic.

3. Select the flange set or flange and valve set.

4. Select the branches to add gaskets, or press ENTER to finish.

5. Select a component to keep the position, or press ENTER to finish.

The gasket is placed.

Bolt

Bolt


Place a gasket manually 1. Click Auto Gasket . Alternatively, type AUTOGASKET on the command line, and then

press ENTER.

2. Type M on the command line, and press ENTER.

3. Select the flange set or flange and valve set.


5. Select a component to keep the position, or press ENTER to finish.

The gasket is placed.

Automatic

CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Automatic

Command line: AUTOBOLT

Assigns stud bolt sets with similar sizes and specifications to all gaskets within the current selection set. Gaskets of different sizes and specifications are automatically handled.

Automatic - Places a bolt into the drawing automatically.

Manual - Places a bolt into the drawing manually.

When the Bolt Insertion rule is turned on and you place a flange in the drawing it does not have a bolt until you place a flange or a valve on the other side. Only then is the bolt automatically inserted into the drawing when necessary.

This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47).

Place stud bolts automatically

1. Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTOBOLT on the command line, and then press ENTER.


3. Select a flange set or flange and valve set.


The bolt is placed.

Place stud bolts manually

1. Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTOBOLT on the command line, and then press ENTER.


3. Select a flange set or flange and valve set.

The bolt is placed.

Bolt


Auto Weld

CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Weld

Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Weld

Command line: AUTOWELD

Places weld gaps on every end of any butt weld and socket weld component or only on every end of any butt weld when the component is selected. Three different scenarios can occur when the weld gaps are placed:

1. When a weld gap is automatically placed on the end of a butt weld or socket weld component, do one of the following to place the next component:

Press ENTER to place the component at the weld gap.

Pick the end point of the weld gap symbol.

2. When a component, such as a tee, is inserted into a pipe, and the weld gaps are placed at each end of the tee, the weld gaps automatically break and cut back the pipe on both sides of the tee. If one exists, the branch connection pipe is also broken.

3. When a component is placed against another component that cannot be cut back, a weld gap must already exist. For example, if you are placing a flange against an elbow, the elbow must have an existing weld gap. If not, the software places the flange against the elbow without any gap. In this scenario, it is your responsibility to place a weld gap before placing the flange.

Automatic - Places a weld gap into the drawing automatically.

Manual - Places a weld gap into the drawing manually.

This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) and Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 47).

Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds. For more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit (on page 62). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for field fit welds.

Place weld gaps automatically

1. Click Auto Weld . Alternatively, type AUTOWELD on the command line, and then press ENTER.


3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when finished.

4. Select branches to add welds, or press ENTER to finish.


The software displays the number of welds added.

Bolt


Place weld gaps manually

1. Click Auto Weld . Alternatively, type AUTOWELD on the command line, and then press ENTER.


3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when finished.


The software displays the number of welds added.

Weld Total

CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Weld Total

Command line: WELDTOTAL

Counts weld gaps on a drawing for estimating purposes.

An example of the typical output is shown below. You can copy this information and paste it into a text file or to a Microsoft Excel workbook.

Qty. Spec. Nominal Actual Thk. Linear Lg.

5 A0 2.000 2.375 0.154 37.310

4 A0 3.000 3.500 0.216 43.980

14 A1 10.000 10.750 0.365 472.810

1 A1 14.000 14.000 0.375 43.980

150 A1 2.000 2.375 0.154 1119.190

The ability to export the drawing to a database using the DBFGEN or LIVEDB command can also help manage weld gaps.

Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds. For more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit (on page 62). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for field fit welds.


Count weld gaps automatically (on page 186)

Count weld gaps automatically

1. Click Weld Total . Alternatively, type WELDTOTAL on the command line, and then press ENTER.

2. Select the objects you want to have automatically counted, and then press ENTER.

The software displays a prompt showing the total number of welds in the drawing.

Bolt


Standard

CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Standard

Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Standard

Command line: PLACEBOLT

Inserts stud bolt sets into the drawing environment for Bill of Materials extraction. You can insert a stud bolt set anywhere in the drawing. However, stud bolt sets must be attached to a flange set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. Size and specification must be set accordingly.

This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47). If you need to change the bolt set by the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.

Place standard stud bolts

1. Click Standard . Alternatively, type PLACEBOLT on the command line, and then press ENTER.


If placing bolt you must have a set of flanges to place the bolt. If there is not a flange set you get the response Flange set not found. If you connect it to a pipe component you get the response Component Stud Bolts cannot be inserted by a Pipe component.

The B that is inserted on the drawing for the bolt symbol uses the current AutoCAD TextStyle setting.

Non Standard CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Non Standard

Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Non Standard

Command line: NONSTDBOLT

Inserts a stud bolt set anywhere. However, nonstandard bolt sets must be attached to a flange set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. You can also insert special bolts. Size and specification must be set accordingly.

This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules (on page 46) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47). If you need to change the bolt set by the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.

Place nonstandard stud bolts

1. Click Non Standard . Alternatively, type NONSTDBOLT on the command line and then press ENTER.

2. Type the required text. For example, you can type NON STD STUD BOLTS.

3. Type the required description. For example, you can type STUD BOLTS W/ DOUBLE NUTS & WASHERS.

4. Type the stud diameter. You must enter the value as a real number, such as 5/8".

5. Type the length. You must enter a real number, such as 7.25 or 7-1/4".

Bolt


6. Type the required stud value.

7. Type the required weight.

8. Type a string, a real number, or press ENTER to accept the default.

9. Type the value, or press ENTER to accept the default.


11. Use the compass to pick a direction in the drawing, and click to finish.

The bolt is placed in the drawing.

The B that is inserted on the drawing for the bolt symbol uses the current AutoCAD TextStyle setting.


S E C T I O N 1 0

CADWorx Plant I tab: RT


Auto Route - Provides the ability to draw components continuously without selecting them from the toolbar or palette. For more information, see Auto Route (on page 189).

AUTOROUTE, ROUTE

Router - Provides routing lines with various options such as slope and elevation changes. For more information, see Router (on page 191).

ROUTER

Buttweld LR - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected routing line. For more information, see Buttweld LR (on page 192).

ROUTEBWLR

Buttweld SR - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected routing line. For more information, see Buttweld SR (on page 193).

ROUTEBWSE

Threaded - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected routing line. For more information, see Threaded (on page 193).

ROUTETRHD

Socket Weld - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected routing line. For more information, see Socket Weld (on page 194).

ROUTESW

Auto Route

CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Auto Route

Command Line: AUTOROUTE, ROUTE

You can also use the PIPW command to start routing pipe.

Starts the ROUTE in the X-Y plane as needed. This command can be used to route pipe from one component to another without accessing the pipe, or elbow commands. The command is best used to start a new route of pipe, but it also works to continue routing a previous section of pipe. However, the most useful way to continue routing pipe is to use the + sign on the ends and middle of the pipe. For more information on continuing routing, see Continue Routing (on page 191).

last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.

component List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing.

Slope - Starts the pipe in a slope direction.

a. Meter - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on meters.

b. Foot - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on feet.

c. Rise - Places the slope rise or drop based on the degrees entered.

RT Panel

RT Panel


Elevation - Starts the pipe perpendicular to the plane for routing.

Plane - Starts the component in the XYZ plane plotting based on the UCS. Type P on the command line and press ENTER to reorient the compass direction.

Reference - Starts the line at a distance based on the reference point chosen.

Fitting mode - Starts the pipe as either Short Radius Buttweld or Long Radius Buttweld, depending on your selection.

Undo - Undoes the last piece of routed pipe.

Connect - Connects to a component or other piece of pipe.

a. Components - Displays all possible connecting directions to the component or pipe using an image of piping.

b. Lines - Displays specific lines in a box form for connecting to the component or pipe.

Toggle length - Toggles the dimension of the pipe from the start point.

Alignment - Starts the pipe at a chosen alignment.

a. Center - Center of pipe

b. BOP - Bottom of pipe

c. TOP - Top of pipe

d. Left - Left of pipe

e. Right - Right of pipe

TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.


Start a new route (on page 190)

Continue Routing (on page 191)

Start a new route

1. Click Auto Route . Alternatively, type AUTOROUTE, or ROUTE on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select a start point.

3. Select an end point, or select one of the options in the list.

CADWorx lets you continue routing pipe as needed, using the component List and other options to allow you to route to components as needed.

4. When finished routing pipe, press ENTER.

The new pipe is inserted in the drawing.

RT Panel


Continue Routing This procedure does not require a command to start. However, the ROUTE command used to start new piping can be used to continue routing pipe but is not required.

1. In a model click on the component you want to route from.

2. Click the plus grip point .

3. Continue to route pipe as needed in any direction, or select an option.

As you click, the pipe stops at that point, and allows you to go in any other direction. Do not click on the screen unless you want the pipe to stop.

Turning on Auto Connect (on page 150) allows you to continue routing from your last point without having to click the grip point or without pressing ENTER. Turn off Auto Connect to start from a different point, or to start a new point in the drawing.

Router CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Router

Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Router

Command line: ROUTER

Draws a 3D polyline for the previous welded, threaded, and socket automatic routing routines.

If you are using known 3D points, the UCS must be at the world position: Type UCS on the command line, and press ENTER.

Unlike a normal 3D polyline, the elevation must be controlled with the Elevation option of

the Router command or the UCS position.

Slope - Specifies the known slope or drop per foot to the next point in degrees (positive or negative). Alternatively, use one of the options listed below to define the slope. This option does not take effect until the next point is selected. For example, select the Slope option and then select the next point of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.

Meter - Defines the rise or drop in millimeters per meter.

Foot - Defines the rise or drop in inches per foot.

Drop - Defines the drop to the next point as a real number, such as 1'-8

Rise - Defines the rise to the next point as a real number, such as 2'-9.

Continuous - Turns constant sloping on or off.

Position - Starts the 3D polyline at an elevated position. This option does not take effect until the next point is selected. For example, select the Position option and then select the next point of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.

Nominal - Determine the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.

Size - Determines the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.

BOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size upward.

TOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size downward.

Centerline - Default when starting this routine. You can change to the bottom of pipe BOP option, then change back with this option.

Reference - Starts the line at a given distance from a reference point. After you provide this reference point, you must provide relative/polar coordinates with an @ location.

RT Panel


Elevation - Changes the elevation in conjunction with the present UCS coordinate system. The elevation change can be expressed using a positive or a negative numbers .

World - Specifies the elevation in the world coordinate system.

Pick - Establishes the working elevation based on a point selected in the drawing. You can use object snap, if necessary.

Undo - Removes the last 3D polyline segment, and prompts you to enter the next point.

Specify next point - Selects the next point along the 3D polyline segment. Press ENTER to end the selection.

Router commands The CADWorx Plant auto route commands listed below provide a quick and effective way of drawing pipe. You can draw long radius, short radius, threaded, or socket weld pipe.

Buttweld LR (on page 192)

Buttweld SR (on page 193)

Threaded (on page 193)

Socket Weld (on page 194)

All commands have the same options.

Buttweld LR

CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld LR

Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld LR

Command line: ROUTEBWLR

Draws a long radius pipe.

Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run.

Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place, followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are drawn along each construction point.

An elbow is not placed at the starting and ending locations.

The Elbows only and Pick points options allow you to select location points only, not polylines.

Select polyline - Builds pipe and elbows based on polyline selection. This option also provides rolling offsets.

For information on 3D polyline construction, see Router (on page 191).

RT Panel


Buttweld SR

CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld SR

Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld SR

Command line: ROUTEBWSR

Draws a short radius pipe.







Threaded

CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Threaded

Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Threaded

Command line: ROUTETHRD

Draws threaded pipe.







RT Panel


Socket Weld

CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Socket Weld

Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Socket Weld

Command line: ROUTESW

Draws socket weld pipe.








S E C T I O N 1 1

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions


Automatic - Automatically creates dimensions for a set of components that you select. For more information, see Automatic (on page 196).

AUTODIM

Horizontal - Places horizontal dimensions. For more information, see Horizontal (on page 196).

DIMH

Vertical - Places vertical dimensions. For more information, see Vertical (on page 197).

DIMV

Set - Sets the elevation. For more information, see Set (on page 197).

ELEV

Rotated - Places rotated dimensions. For more information, see Rotated (on page 198).

DIMR

Horizontal with Tail - Places tailed horizontal dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. For more information, see Horizontal with Tail (on page 198).

DIMTAILH

Vertical with Tail - Places tailed vertical dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. For more information, see Vertical with Tail (on page 198).

DIMTAILV

Change - Changes the elevation. For more information, see Change (on page 199).

CHANGEELEV

Component - Places component annotation. For more information, see Component (on page 199).

ANOTCOMP

Elevation - Places component elevation annotation. For more information, see Elevation (on page 200).

ANOTELEV

Coordinates - Places coordinates in either a user coordinate system or a world coordinate system. For more information, see Coordinates (on page 200).

DIMCOORD

Tick Mark - Shows which side of the dimension extension line the gasket is on. For more information, see Tick Mark (on page 201).

TICK

ISO Text - Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in paper space when working with isometrics. For more information, see ISO Text (on page 202).

Height - Changes the height of selected text by matching it with other text. For more information, see Height (on page 202).

TEXTHEIGHT

Dimension Panel

Dimension Panel


Automatic

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Automatic

Plant menu: Dimension > Automatic

Command line: AUTODIM

Automatically creates dimensions for a set of components that you select. Options to set the offset distance and whether to include flanges are also provided.

Options

Flange - Dimensions flange faces. You specify whether flange dimensioning is turned On or Off.

Offset - Specifies the distance from the dimension line to the component.

Selection - Starts the dimensioning process.

Place automatic dimensions

1. Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTODIM on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Type S on the command line, and press ENTER to select objects to dimension.

3. Select the objects to dimension. Press ENTER when you are finished.

4. Select the centroid for the dimensions. For example, if you selected two pieces of parallel pipe with elbows attached to each end to dimension, and then selected a point between the two pieces of pipe, the software would place the dimension lines to the outside.

The software displays the dimensions.

If you try to place automatic dimensions on two pieces of parallel pipe with no elbows, an error code displays. Combined components must have at least one turn.

Horizontal CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal

Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Horizontal

Command line: DIMH

Places horizontal dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.

Place horizontal dimensions

1. Click Horizontal . Alternatively, type DIMH on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the origin location for the first extension line.

3. Select the origin location for the second extension line.

The software continues to prompt you for extension lines.

4. Type D on the command line, and press ENTER to end the sequence.

5. Select a location for the dimension line.

6. Press ENTER, or type a new value for the dimension.

The software displays the dimension.

Dimension Panel


Vertical

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical

Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Vertical

Command line: DIMV

Places vertical dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.

Place vertical dimensions

1. Click Vertical . Alternatively, type DIMV on the command line, and press ENTER.








Set

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Set

Pipe menu: Utility > Elevation > Set

Command line: ELEV

Places piping at a preset elevation. This is the standard AutoCAD Elev command. When using this option, remember to place the elevation back to 0'-0" for the proper elevation placement of all future components. Use this command with caution. An alternative is to use the Flat (on page

229) command built into CADWorx (VIEWFLAT).

Refer to the AutoCAD documentation for complete details regarding this command (ELEV).

Set the Elevation

1. Click the CADWorx Plant II tab, and then click Set on the Dimensions panel. Alternatively, type ELEV on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select a point in the drawing to specify a new elevation.

3. Select a second point in the drawing.

4. Enter a thickness value.

Piping is now at the new elevation.

Remember to set it back to 0'-0" when you are finished with the new elevation.

Dimension Panel


Rotated

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Rotated

Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Rotated

Command line: DIMR

Places rotated dimensions. You are prompted for the angle of rotation and the points to dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.

Place rotated dimensions

1. Click Rotated . Alternatively, type DIMR on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Type the dimension angle, or select two points to indicate the angle.








Horizontal with Tail CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal with Tail

Plant menu: Dimension > Tailed > Horizontal

Command line: DIMTAILH

Places tailed horizontal dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. To end this sequence, press ENTER or SPACE.

Place horizontal tailed dimensions

1. Click Horizontal with Tail . Alternatively, type DIMTAILH on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the reference point for the dimension.

3. Select the origin point, or press ENTER to end.

4. Select the location for the dimension.

5. Press ENTER to end the sequence.

When you run this command a second time, you have the option to either reselect the reference point or use the previous reference point.

Vertical with Tail

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical with Tail

Plant menu: Dimension > Tailed > Vert

Command line: DIMTAILV

Places tailed vertical dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. To end this sequence, press ENTER or SPACE.

Dimension Panel


Place vertical tailed dimensions

1. Click Vertical with Tail . Alternatively, type DIMTAILV on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the reference point for the dimension.

3. Select the origin point, or press ENTER to end.

4. Select the location for the dimension.

5. Press ENTER to end the sequence.

When you run this command a second time, you have the option to either reselect the reference point or use the previous reference point.

Change

CADWorx Plant II: Dimensions > Change

Command line: CHANGELEV

Moves all selected entities (blocks, lines, polylines and so on) to a new elevation in reference with the world coordinate system. You can also change a component elevation to 1/2 its actual outside diameter.

Arbitrary - Places the component anywhere in the drawing.

BOP Correction - Aligns the pipe bottom with the center of the connected piece.

Change the Elevation

1. Click the CADWorx Plant II tab, and then click Change on the Dimensions panel. Alternatively, type CHANGEELEV on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Press ENTER to select the default.

3. Select a point in the drawing, or enter a numerical value.


5. Select the needed objects for elevation, and press ENTER.


The component appears at the new elevation.

Component

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Component

Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Component

Command line: ANOTCOMP

Places component annotation.

Options

Tag - Annotates the component with its tag.

Long - Annotate the component with its long description and appends the size to the front.

Short - Annotates the component with its short description and appends the size to the front.

Dimension Panel


Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation.

Leader - Adds a leader to the text.

Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.

Place component annotation

1. Click Component . Alternatively, type ANOTCOMP on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the annotation type.

3. Select the component to annotate.

4. Select the start point, or set up the leader line and justification.

5. Type the rotation angle, or select two points to specify the angle.

The software displays the annotation.

Elevation

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Elevation

Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Elevation

Command line: ANOTELEV

Places component elevation annotation.

Options

BOP - Labels the bottom of the pipe elevation.

TOP - Labels the top of the pipe elevation.

Centerline - Labels the centerline elevation.

Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation.

Leader - Adds a leader to the text.

Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.

Place component elevation annotation

1. Click Elevation . Alternatively, type ANOTELEV on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the component to annotate elevation.

3. Specify the elevation option to use.

The software displays a rubber band to the selected component.

4. Select the start point, or set up the leader line and justification.

5. Type the rotation angle, or select two points to specify the angle.

The software displays the annotation.

Coordinates CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Coordinates

Dimension Panel


Plant menu: Dimension > Coordinates

Command line: DIMCOORD

Places coordinates in either a user coordinate system or a world coordinate system. You can place the text at the coordinate with or without a leader.

TEXTSIZE is controlled by DIMSCALE and DIMTXT.

Options

Leader - Places a leader.

Other point - Places the dimension text in an alternate location without a leader.

Same point - Places the dimension text at the same location which is picked without a leader.

Centerline - Places the dimension text either with a north or east designation. This option labels a vertical dimension as east and a horizontal dimension as north.

The following AutoCAD setvars affect the dimensioning routines: DIMALT, DIMALTD, DIMALTF, DIMASZ, DIMBLK, DIMEXE, DIMEXO, DIMLFAC, DIMTXT, DIMZIN, DIMSCALE, LUNITS, LUPREC, and UNITMODE.

Place coordinates

1. Click Coordinates . Alternatively, type DIMCOORD on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. If necessary, press ENTER, or type Y on the command line and press ENTER, to change to the world coordinate system.

3. Select an extension line point.

4. Select an option.

5. Follow the prompts to place the coordinates.

The coordinates display.

Tick Mark CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Tick Mark

Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Tick Mark

Command line: TICK

Shows which side of the dimension extension line the gasket is on.

This command is dependent upon the DIMSCALE being set properly. For example; if the gasket thickness was set to 1/8" and the scale of the drawing was set to full, the distance from the extension line to the tick mark would be 1/8". If the scale of the drawing was set to 3/4"=1'-0", the distance from the tick mark to the extension line would be 3/8". This insures that the tick mark is visible on a plotted drawing.

The initial prompt allows you to set the thickness, but does not appear again during the single drawing session. Changing the thickness is allowed in the next prompt.

Dimension Panel


Place tick marks

1. Click Tick Mark . Alternatively, type TICK on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Type the thickness, or press ENTER to accept the default.

3. Type C on the command line, and press ENTER if you need to change the thickness.

4. Type a value for the thickness.

5. Select the point.

6. Select a direction parallel with the extension line.

7. Select the gasket side.

8. Select the extension line.

9. Select a direction parallel with the extension line.

10. Select the gasket side.

The software displays the tick mark.

ISO Text Plant menu: Text > ISO Text

Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in paper space when working with isometrics. These commands are similar to the AutoCAD DTEXT command.

Height Plant menu: Text > Height

Command line: TEXTHEIGHT

Changes the height of selected text by matching it with other text. This is useful when you are zoomed to an unknown factor in paper space.

Options

Entire drawing - Chooses all text on the drawing.

Layer - Specifies a layer for selection. CADWorx’s default text layer is TEXT.

Selection - Matches the height of text that you select.


S E C T I O N 1 2

CADWorx Plant II tab: Graphics / Pipe Ends


Section - Opens the Sections dialog box in which you can select a section graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Section (on page 206).

SECTIONS

Detail - Opens the Details dialog box in which you can select a detail graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Detail (on page 207).

DETAILS

Plan - Opens the Plan dialog box in which you can select a plan graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Plan (on page 208).

PLANS

Elevation - Opens the Elevations box in which you can select an elevation graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Elevation (on page 209).

ELEVATIONS

Arrow - Opens the Arrows dialog box in which you can select an arrow head graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Arrow (on page 210).

ARROWS

Weld - Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box in which you select a weld symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Weld (on page 211).

WELDS

ISO - Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box in which you can select an ISO symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see ISO (on page 211).

ISOS

Misc - Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box in which you can select a miscellaneous symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Misc (on page 213).

MISC

Instrument - Opens the Instruments dialog box in which you can select an instrument graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Instrument (on page 214).

INSTRUMENTS

Dots - Opens the Dots dialog box in which you can select a weld dots graphic to place on the drawing. For more information, see Dots (on page 215).

DOTS

Fitting Width - Controls the appearance of all flanged, socket weld, and threaded fittings. For more information, see Fitting Width.

FITTINGWIDTH

Single Line Width - Specifies the line width for single-line components. For more information, see Single Line Width.

LINEWIDTH

Graphics / Pipe Ends



Each of the Graphics commands opens a related dialog box, which is used to preview and select a graphic for placement in the drawing. A drawing file is used to display the preview graphic in the dialog box. These graphic drawing files are delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. They can be modified to meet your specific project requirements.

A modified graphic drawing file must contain the same number of attributes as are currently in the drawing.

Adding preview graphics

If necessary, you can add more graphics to any of the graphics dialog boxes by modifying the contents of the Pipe_alt.dat file. This file contains the definitions for each graphic type. The example below shows the graphics group in the Pipe_alt.dat file that is referenced in the Sections dialog box.

[Sections]

s1s.dwg Head graph1 “s1” 1

s2s.dwg Head w/ Attrib graph1 “s2” 2

s3s.dwg Head w/ 2 Attrib graph1 “s3” 3

s4s.dwg End w/ Attrib graph1 “s4” 4

Columns must start at positions 1, 40, and 75 and define the information outlined below.

COL1 (Position 1) - Drawing used in the dialog box for preview image.

COL2 (Position 40) - Name displayed in the dialog box for graphic name.

COL3 (Position 75) - Function used to draw the graphic in the drawing with arguments.

Before you modify the Pipe_alt.dat file, make a backup copy.

If the columns are not at the required positions, the drawing function fails.

There must not be any blank lines located within a section.

There must be a blank line at the beginning and at the end of a section.

The scale of the graphics inserted into the drawing, excluding isometric symbol graphics, is based upon the value of the AutoCAD setvar DIMSCALE. If DIMSCALE is set to 0, as is required for paper space, the software inserts graphics at a scale of 1. Isometric symbol graphics are inserted at a scale of 1 regardless of the DIMSCALE setting.

System Prompts The system prompts required to draw the graphic types delivered with the software are outlined in the table below.

Function System Response

Prompt 1 Pick left justified insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Rotation angle: pick a direction or enter angle Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER

Prompt 2 Pick left justified insertion point: pick point in the drawing Rotation angle: pick direction or enter angle Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER

Prompt 3 Pick left justified insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Rotation angle: pick a direction in the drawing or enter angle Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A) Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106) Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 3/8"=1'-0")



Prompt 4 Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Section direction: pick a direction in the drawing Projection direction: pick a direction in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A)

Prompt 5 Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Section direction: pick a direction in the drawing Projection direction: pick a direction in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A) Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER ( ex: 106)

Prompt 6 Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Section direction: pick a direction in the drawing Projection or other direction: pick a direction in the drawing

Prompt 7 Pick object to mark: pick an object in the drawing Pick mark location: pick point in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A)

Prompt 8 Pick object to mark: pick an object in the drawing Pick mark location: pick a point in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A) Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106)

Prompt 9 Pick left end point: pick a point in the drawing Pick right end point: pick a point in the drawing Enter title: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: ELEVATION NORTH) Enter scale: enter a string (ex: 3/8"=1'-0")

Prompt 10 Pick instrument to label: pick a point in the drawing Pick mark location: pick a point in the drawing Enter first level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: SDV) Enter second level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 1)

Prompt 11 Pick instrument to label: pick a point in the drawing Pick mark location: pick a point in the drawing Enter first level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: PI) Enter second level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106) Enter third level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: B)

Prompt 12 Pick center insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Rotation angle: pick a direction or enter angle

Prompt 13 Pick center insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Prompt 14 Pick center insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Pick direction: pick a direction

Prompt 15 Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing (not center insertion, outside edge) Pick direction: pick a direction in the drawing Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 101)Weld

Prompt 16 Pick leader start point: pick a point in the drawing Pick intermediate point: pick a point in the drawing Pick direction for tail: pick a direction in the drawing

Prompt 17 Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing Pick rotation: pick a direction in the drawing

Prompt 18 Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Prompt 19 Pick insertion point on line: pick a point in the drawing Pick rotation: pick a direction in the drawing

Prompt 20 Pick location: pick a point in the drawing Pick rotation or [Up/Down/Roll/mirrorX/mirrorY/mirrorZ]: select an option or pick the rotation



Section

CADWorx Plant II tab: Section

Pipe menu: Graphics > Section

Command line: SECTIONS

Opens the Sections dialog box, which allows you to select a section graphic for placement in the drawing.

Sections Dialog Box

Displays the sections graphics that are currently defined in the software.

Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic.

Each section graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the section graphics that display in the Sections dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Sections Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

Head S1S.dwg Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib S2S.dwg Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib S3S.dwg Prompt 3

End w/ Attrib S4S.dwg Prompt 4

End w 2Attrib S5S.dwg Prompt 5

End S6S.dwg Prompt 6

Middle S7S.dwg Prompt 6

Place a section graphic

1. Click Section . Alternatively, type SECTIONS on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Sections dialog box appears.

2. Select the required graphic in the list.

The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing.

4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current drawing.

The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.



Detail

CADWorx Plant II tab: Detail

Pipe menu: Graphics > Details

Command line: DETAILS

Opens the Details dialog box, which allows you to select a detail graphic for placement in the drawing.

Details Dialog Box

Displays the detail graphics that are currently defined in the software.


Each details graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the detail graphics that display in the Details dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Detail Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

Head D1S.dwg Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib D2S.dwg Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib D3S.dwg Prompt 3

Mark w/ Attrib D4S.dwg Prompt 7

Mark w 2Attrib D5S.dwg Prompt 8

Place a detail graphic

1. Click Detail . Alternatively, type Details on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Details dialog box appears.








Plan

CADWorx Plant II tab: Plan

Pipe menu: Graphics > Plans

Command line: PLANS

Opens the Plans dialog box, which allows you to select a plan graphic for placement in the drawing.

Plans Dialog Box

Displays the plan graphics that are currently defined in the software.


Each plan graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the plan graphics that display in the Plans dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Plan Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

Head P1S.dwg Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib P2S.dwg Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib P3S.dwg Prompt 3

Place a plan graphic

1. Click Plan . Alternatively, type PLANS on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Plans dialog box appears.








Elevation

CADWorx Plant II tab: Elevation

Pipe menu: Graphics > Elevations

Command line: ELEVATIONS

Opens the Elevations dialog box, which allows you to select an elevation graphic for placement in the drawing.

Elevations Dialog Box

Displays the elevation graphics that are currently defined in the software.


Each elevation graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the elevation graphics that display in the Elevations dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Elevation Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

Head E1S.dwg Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib E2S.dwg Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib E3S.dwg Prompt 3

Generic Head L1S.dwg Prompt 9

Place an elevation graphic

1. Click Elevation . Alternatively, type ELEVATIONS on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Elevations dialog box appears.








Arrow

CADWorx Plant II tab: Arrow

Pipe menu: Graphics > Arrows

Command line: ARROWS

Opens the Arrows dialog box, which allows you to select an arrow head graphic for placement in the drawing.

Arrows Dialog Box

Displays the arrow head graphics that are currently defined in the software.


Each arrow head graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the arrow head graphics that display in the Arrows dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Arrow Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

North N1S.dwg Prompt 14

Prevailing N2S.dwg Prompt 12

Model Iso North N3S.dwg Prompt 12

Paper Iso North N4S.dwg Prompt 14

Small A1S.dwg Prompt 12

Medium A2S.dwg Prompt 12

Large A3S.dwg Prompt 12

Place an arrow head graphic

1. Click Arrow . Alternatively, type ARROWS on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Arrows dialog box appears.








Weld

CADWorx Plant II tab: Weld

Pipe menu: Graphics > Weld

Command line: WELDS

Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select a weld symbol graphic for placement in the drawing.

Weld Symbols Dialog Box

Place a weld symbol graphic

1. Click Weld . Alternatively, type WELDS on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Welds dialog box appears.






ISO CADWorx Plant II tab: ISO

Pipe menu: Graphics > ISO

Command line: ISOS

Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select an isometric symbol graphic for placement in the drawing.

Isometric Symbols Dialog Box

Displays the isometric symbol graphics that are currently defined in the software.


Each isometric symbols graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the isometric symbol graphics that display in the Isometric Symbols dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Isometric Symbol Display Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

Adjustable Base Ell Adjustable_Base_Ell.dwg Prompt 20



Angle Angle.dwg Prompt 20

Arrow1 Arrow1.dwg Prompt 20



Base Support Base_Support.dwg Prompt 20

Channel Channel.dwg Prompt 20

Column Column.dwg Prompt 20

Column Knee Brace Column_Knee_Brace.dwg Prompt 20

DummyLeg DummyLeg.dwg Prompt 20

Floorwall Penetration Floorwall_Penetration.dwg Prompt 20

Grating Penetration1 Grating_Penetration_1.dwg Prompt 20



Hanger Clamp Hanger_Clamp.dwg Prompt 20

Hanger Clamp 1 Hanger_Clamp_2.dwg Prompt 20

Hanger Clevis Hanger_Clevis.dwg Prompt 20

Hanger Clevis 1 Hanger_Clevis_1.dwg Prompt 20

Insulation Saddle Insulation_Saddle.dwg Prompt 20

Knee Brace Knee_Brace.dwg Prompt 20

Pipe Clamp Pipe_Clamp.dwg Prompt 20

Pipe Shoe Extrude Pipe_Shoe_Extrude.dwg Prompt 20

Pipe Shoe Faced Pipe_Shoe_Faced.dwg Prompt 20

Spring Hanger Clamp Spring_Hanger_Clamp.dwg Prompt 20

T Support T_Support.dwg Prompt 20

Ubolt Ubolt.dwg Prompt 20

Ubolt 1 Ubolt_2.dwg Prompt 20

Wide Flange Beam WFlange_Beam.dwg Prompt 20



Place an isometric symbol graphic

1. Click ISO . Alternatively, type ISOS on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Isometric Symbol dialog box appears.






Misc CADWorx Plant II tab: Misc

Pipe menu: Graphics > Misc

Command line: MISC

Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box, which allows you to select a graphic for placement in the drawing.

Miscellaneous Dialog Box

Displays the set of miscellaneous graphics that are currently defined in the software.


Each listed graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the graphics that display in the Miscellaneous dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Sections Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

Small Circle M1S.dwg Prompt 15

Small Hexagon M2S.dwg Prompt 15

Small Square M3S.dwg Prompt 15

Small Rev M4S.dwg Prompt 15

Large Circle M5S.dwg Prompt 15

Large Hexagon M6S.dwg Prompt 15

Large Square M7S.dwg Prompt 15

Large Rev M8S.dwg Prompt 15



Place a miscellaneous graphic

1. Click Misc . Alternatively, type MISC on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Miscellaneous dialog box appears.






Instrument

CADWorx Plant II tab: Instrument

Pipe menu: Graphics > Instruments

Command line: INSTRUMENTS

Opens the Instruments dialog box, which allows you to select an instrument graphic for placement in the drawing.

Instruments Dialog Box

Displays the instrument graphics that are currently defined in the software.


Each instrument graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the instrument graphics that display in the Instruments dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Instrument Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

2 Attrib Local F1S.dwg Prompt 10

3 Attrib Local F2S.dwg Prompt 11

2 Attrib Board F3S.dwg Prompt 12



Place an instrument graphic

1. Click Instrument . Alternatively, type INSTRUMENTS on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Instruments dialog box appears.






Dots CADWorx Plant II tab: Dots

Pipe menu: Graphics > Dots

Command line: DOTS

Opens the Dots dialog box, which allows you to select a weld dot graphic for placement in the drawing.

Dots Dialog Box

Displays the weld dot graphics that are currently defined in the software.


Each weld dot graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 203).

The table below lists the weld dot graphics that display in the Dots dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 204).

Dots Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name

Head S1.dwg Prompt 1

Head w/ Attrib S2.dwg Prompt 2

Head w/ 2Attrib S3.dwg Prompt 3

End w/ Attrib S4.dwg Prompt 4

End w 2Attrib S5.dwg Prompt 5

End S6.dwg Prompt 6

Middle S7.dwg Prompt 6



Place a weld dot graphic

1. Click Dots . Alternatively, type DOTS on the command line and then press ENTER.

The Dots dialog box appears.







S E C T I O N 1 3

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers


Change Layer - Changes an object’s layer to the layer associated with another object that you select. For more information, see Change Layer (on page 218).

LAYERCHANGE

Set Layer - Sets the current layer to that of an object that you select. For more information, see Set Layer (on page 218).

LAYERSET

Delete Layer - Removes all of the entities on the layer associated with an entity that you select. For more information, see Delete Layer (on page 218).

LAYERDELETE

Layer Off - Turns off the layer associated with an entity that you select. For more information, see Layer Off (on page 219).

LAYEROFF

On - Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the Layer Off command. For more information, see Layer On (on page 219).

LAYERON

Match Layer - Changes an object’s properties to match those of another object that you select. For more information, see Match Layer (on page 219).

MATCH

Isolate Layer - Turns off all layers except for the layer associated with an entity that you select. For more information, see Isolate Layer (on page 220).

LAYERISOLATE

Un-isolate Layer - Turns all of the layers back on that were turned off with the Isolate Layer command. For more information, see Un-Isolate Layer (on page 220).

LAYERUNISO

Previous - Sets the current layer back to the previous layer when you have placed dimensioning or text. For more information, see Previous (on page 220).

LAYERRESTORE

Layers Panel

Layers Panel


Change Layer

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Change Layer

Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Change

Command line: LAYERCHANGE

Changes an object’s layer to the layer associated with another object that you select. You can select the objects to change individually or with a fence.

Change the layer associated with an object

1. Click Change Layer .

2. Select the objects whose layer you want to change.

3. Select additional object to change layers, or press ENTER to end the selection process.

4. Select an object on the layer to which you want to move the objects.

The software moves the selected object to the new layer.

Set Layer

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Set Layer

Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Set

Command line: LAYERSET

Sets the current layer to that of an object that you select. You must select an individual object.

Set the active layer

1. Click Set Layer .

2. Select the objects whose layer you want to be the active layer.

The software sets the active layer to that of the selected object.

Delete Layer

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Delete Layer

Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Delete

Command line: LAYERDELETE

Removes all of the entities on the layer associated with an entity that you select. For example, you can delete all the entities, such as lines, text, and so on, on layer 0. You must select an individual entity.

If you select the VIEWL layer, the software displays a warning message. Deleting the VIEWL layer deletes a block named CPM which the software inserts when beginning a new drawing. This block contains information (sizes, specification, and so on) that are used when opening an existing drawing. If you delete this layer, this information is not available for the next drawing session. You can re-enter this information.

Layers Panel


Delete a layer

1. Click Delete Layer .

2. Select the object whose layer you want to delete.

The software deletes the layer associated with the selected object.

Layer Off

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer Off

Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Off

Command line: LAYEROFF

Turns off the layer associated with an entity that you select. You must select an Individual entity.

Turn off a layer

1. Click Layer Off .

2. Select the object whose layer you want to turn off.

The software turns off the display of the layer associated with the selected object.

Layer On

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer On

Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > On

Command line: LAYERON

Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the Layer Off command. For more information, see Layer Off (on page 219). No selection is required.

Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command

Click Layer On .

The software redisplays the layer.

Match Layer

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Match Layer

Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Match

Command line: MATCH

Changes an object’s layer to match that of another object that you select.

Layers Panel


Match an object's layer

1. Click Match Layer .

2. Select the objects whose layer you want to change. Press ENTER to end the selection.

3. Select an object on the layer that you want to match.

The software changes the layer of the objects.

Isolate Layer

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Isolate Layer

Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Isolate

Command line: LAYERISOLATE

Turns off all layers except for the layer associated with an entity that you select.

Display only the layer associated with an object

1. Click Isolate Layer .

2. Select an object on the layer to isolate.

The software turns off all layers except for the layer associated with the selected object..

Un-Isolate Layer

CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Un-Isolate Layer

Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Un-Isolate

Command line: LAYERUNISO

Turns all of the layers on. No selection is required.

Turn on all layers

Click Un-Isolate Layer .

The software turns on display for all layers.

Previous Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Previous

Command line: LAYERRESTORE

Sets the current layer back to the previous layer when you have placed dimensioning or text. This command is only available after these two items are placed. This command does not restore a previous layer that has been changed with the Layer or Ddlmodes commands.


S E C T I O N 1 4

CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints

The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below.


Reinforcing Pad - Inserts intelligent information indicating a reinforcement pad. For more information, see Reinforcing Pad (on page 222).

REINFPAD

Reinforcing Saddle - Inserts intelligent information indicating a reinforcement saddle. For more information, see Reinforcing Saddle (on page 222).

REINFSAD

Translational - Creates a translational-type restraint. For more information, see Translational (on page 223).

TRANSLATIONAL

Anchor - Creates an anchor-type restraint. For more information, see Anchor (on page 224).

ANCHOR

Spring Hanger- Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. For more information, see Spring Hanger (on page 224).

SPRING

Rotational - Creates a rotational-type restraint. For more information, see Rotational (on page 225).

ROTATIONAL

Snubber - Creates a snubber-type restraint. For more information, see Snubber (on page 226).

SNUBBER

Guide - Creates a guide-type restraint. For more information, see Guide (on page 226).

GUIDE

Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be re-drawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees.

The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can position a rotational restraint at any vector.

The CAESARTolerance (on page 33) variable is useful when the bi-directional process encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is sloped.

All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on page 64) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID, SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.

Restraints Panel

Restraints Panel


You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.

Reinforcing Pad

CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Pad

Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Pad

Command line: REINFPAD

Attaches a reinforcement pad to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement pad is represented by the alpha-identifier P. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.

For information about showing reinforcement pads on an ISOGEN isometric drawing, see Offset Tap (on page 108).

Insert a reinforcement pad

1. Click Reinforcing Pad on the Restraints panel.


3. Select the branch pipe component.

4. Type the thickness of the reinforcement pad on the command line, and press ENTER.

5. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER.


The software places the reinforcement pad and notates the drawing with the reinforcing pad alpha-identifier.

Reinforcing Saddle

CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Saddle

Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle

Command line: REINFSAD

Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.

Restraints Panel


Insert a reinforcement saddle

1. Click Reinforcing Saddle on the Restraints panel.


3. Select the branch run of the component.

4. Type the thickness of the reinforcement saddle on the command line, and press ENTER.



The software places the reinforcement saddle and notates the drawing with the reinforcing saddle alpha-identifier.

Translational

CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Translational

Restraints toolbar: Translational

Command line: TRANSLATIONAL

Creates a translational-type restraint.

This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify this symbol shape by editing the [Product Folder]\Support\H1.dwg file.

Place a translational restraint

1. Click Translational on the Restraints panel.

2. Click where you want the transitional placed.


4. Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER.

Restraints Panel


The transitional is placed in the drawing.

Anchor CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Anchor

Restraints toolbar: Anchor

Command line: ANCHOR

Creates an anchor-type restraint.


Place an anchor

1. Click Anchor on the Restraints panel.

2. Click where you want the anchor placed.



The anchor is placed in the drawing.

Spring Hanger

CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Spring Hanger

Restraints toolbar: Spring Hanger

Command line: SPRING

Creates a spring hanger-type restraint.


Restraints Panel


Place a spring hanger

1. Click Spring Hanger on the Restraints panel.

2. Click where you want the spring hanger placed.



The spring hanger is placed in the drawing.

Rotational

CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Rotational

Restraints toolbar: Rotational

Command line: ROTATIONAL

Creates a rotational-type restraint.


Place a rotational restraint

1. Click Rotational on the Restraints panel.

2. Click where you want the restraint placed.



The restraint is placed in the drawing.

Restraints Panel


Snubber CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Snubber

Restraints toolbar: Snubber

Command line: SNUBBER

Creates a snubber-type restraint.


Place a snubber

1. Click Snubber on the Restraints panel.

2. Click where you want the snubber placed.



The snubber is placed in the drawing.

Guide

CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Guide

Restraints toolbar: Guide

Command line: GUIDE

Creates a guide-type restraint.


Place a guide

1. Click Guide on the Restraints panel.

2. Click where you want the guide placed.



The guide is placed in the drawing.


S E C T I O N 1 5

CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS


Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position. For more information, see Flat (on page 229).

VIEWFLAT

Next - Places the current user coordinate system in the next position. For more information, see UCS Next (on page 230).

UCSNEXT

Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see Compass (on page 230).

COMPASS

North - Places the current user coordinate system in the north position. For more information, see North (on page 230).

VIEWNORTH

South - Places the current user coordinate system in the south position. For more information, see South (on page 231).

VIEWSOUTH

East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east position. For more information, see East (on page 232).

VIEWEAST

West - Places the current user coordinate system in the west position. For more information, see West (on page 231).

VIEWWEST

UCS Object - Orients the current user coordinate system according to an object that you select. For more information, see UCS Object (on page 232).

UCS

Point and Shoot UCS AutoCAD allows you to manipulate the X, Y, Z coordinate system UCS (user coordinate system). You must be familiar with the Point and Shoot system of manipulating the UCS.

The UCSICON option needs to be On (visible) and set to Origin. This lets you see exactly where the icon is at all times. Although it isn’t necessary, it is highly recommended that it be somewhere on the centerline of the components you are drawing. This keeps everything in the same plane. If you must turn into another plane, use the UCS NEXT command, or choose the appropriate plane (North, South, East, West, or Flat) and place the icon on the centerline of the new plane.

If you cannot see the rubber band effect, or if it doesn’t appear correctly, you are out of plane. Pay attention to the icon as it shows where you are. If the broken pencil icon appears, and there are strange lines on the screen instead of pipe and components, your current plane is perpendicular to the viewpoint. Use the Undo command, or change the viewpoint.

UCS Panel

UCS Panel


When dimensioning or annotating an isometric or 3D model, place the UCS icon on a node or a centerline on the run you are working on. The text has the same orientation as the icon.

Xtext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the X-axis. When you view a model from the bottom side using a view point with a negative angle from the X-Y plane, text and dimension placement is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the X-axis of the UCS to remedy this. Text and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and plotting. If you change from a negative to positive angle from the X-Y view point, you must replace the text for the proper orientation.

Ztext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the Z-axis. When viewing a model from the back side using a view point with a 0 to 180 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the X axis, text and dimension placement is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the Z-axis of the UCS to remedy this. Text and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and plotting. If you change to a rear view position (180 - 360 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the X-axis), you must replace the text for the proper orientation.

Elevation - Sets the elevation to the present UCS. This command does not set the depth in a North, South, East, or West plane. Setting an elevation of 10' (when the present elevation is 0') raises the UCS to 10' regardless of the position.

Rotate - Rotates the present UCS around the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. For example, rotating the UCS to 45 degrees after inserting a 45 degree elbow allows you to place other components in line with the 45 degree elbow.

COordinate - Specifies an exact X, Y, Z-coordinate in relation to the WCS (world coordinate system).

CLip - Clips the view at the present plane set by the UCS. This plane can be established with the Point and Shoot UCS options or any three-point UCS position. The plane can be skewed at any angle.

On - Turns on view clipping with clipping distances as set by the Back and Front options.

Off - Turns off view clipping.

Back - Sets the distance to the back of the clipping area. This value must be a negative number. If this value is positive, it can clip past the front clipping area and leave nothing in the view.

Front - Sets the distance to the front of the clipping area. This value must be a positive number. If this value is negative, it can clip past the back clipping area and leave nothing in the view.

The CLip option is also available as the command VIEWCLIP.

Pick point - Moves the 0,0,0 user base to a point you select. Press Enter to keep the UCS at the same origin but switch to a new plane. For example, press Enter to change from the north plate to a west plane.

You must enter other UCS positions with AutoCAD’s UCS command. Two extremely useful options in this command are the OBject and 3 Point. Leave the UCSICON on and set to origin when using any method of rearranging the UCS.

UCS Panel


If you select a point close to the screens edge, and the UCS icon is on and set to origin, the icon may not remain at this point. AutoCAD requires that the whole icon be visible and places the icon in the lower left corner of the screen. If this happens, zoom out a little or pan toward the new UCS position.

Flat

CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > Flat

UCS toolbar: Flat

Plant menu: UCS > Flat

Command line: VIEWFLAT

Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position.

UCS Panel


UCS Next

UCS toolbar: Next

Plant menu: UCS > UCS Next

Command line: UCSNEXT

Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS positions.

Compass

UCS toolbar: Compass

UCS toolbar: Compass

Command line: COMPASS

Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. The symbol displays at the point you select.

As the display's orientation changes, the symbol changes accordingly.

The aliases VF, VN, VS, VE, and VW are also available.

North

CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > North

UCS toolbar: North

Plant menu: UCS > North

Command line: VIEWNORTH

Places the current user coordinate system in the north position.

UCS Panel


South

CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > South

UCS toolbar: South

Plant menu: UCS > South

Command line: VIEWSOUTH

Places the current user coordinate system in the south position.

West

CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > West

UCS toolbar: West

Plant menu: UCS > West

Command line: VIEWWEST

Places the current user coordinate system in the west position.

UCS Panel


East

CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > East

UCS toolbar: East

Plant menu: UCS > East

Command line: VIEWEAST

Places the current user coordinate system in the east position.

UCS Object

UCS toolbar: UCS Object

Plant menu: UCS > UCS Object

Command line: UCS

Orients the UCS according to an object that you select. Please refer to the AutoCAD documentation on the UCS (User Coordinate System) for more detail.

This command is useful for rearranging dimensions in the model space (MSPACE) of a CADWorx isometric model. Run this command, and then select the dimension. The software places the UCS according to the position of the dimension allowing it to be stretched and moved.


S E C T I O N 1 6

CADWorx Steel / HVAC > Steel Shapes

Shape Name Command Line

Wide Flange WSHAPE

Channel CSHAPE

Angle LSHAPE

Tee TSHAPE

Pipe PSHAPE

Tube TSSHAPE

Flat Bar FBSHAPE

Round Bar RBSHAPE

Channel with Lip CLIPSHAPE

Angle with Lib LLIPSHAPE

Z ZSHAPE

Double Angle 2LSHAPE

Shapes CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel Shapes panel

Plant > Steel > Shapes

Command line: STEEL

Draws many different steel shapes in the drawing. When placing steel shapes, you can:

attach steel shapes to lines or you can specify the end points.

place members into the current UCS.

define the location of the centerline and the angle about the centerline.

place steel on arcs.

copy, stretch, or edit the size with the edit function.

Draw Steel Dialog Box

Select Type - Select the shape to place. The drop down lists each folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.ini file specifying the member type in that folder (W, T, TS, and so forth).

Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.

Steel Shapes Panel

Steel Shapes Panel


Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order.

Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle.

Pick Insertion Location - Click to select the insertion point. The red box indicates the active location.

Centerline location - Select the top, center, or bottom location of the centerline relative to the component shape. The centerline location can only be along the three locations on the Y-axis of the component.

Use UCS - Select to use the current UCS as the XY plane. For example, if the UCS is located in the same plane as a slope roof, components are easily added at this angle if you select this option. Select two points within the plane to determine the rotation automatically.

Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate.

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.

Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file.

Description - Defines the component description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header.

Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable.

Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header.

Pick Points - Click to define the component by two points on the screen.

Select Lines - Click to select lines in the drawing to place the component. The length and position of the line define the component.

Properties - Activates the Properties dialog box that you can use to edit the shape properties before placement. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box.

User Input - Activates the User Input dialog box that you can use to create a custom-dimensioned shape. Select a shape that is close to the size you need before clicking User Input. For more information, see User Input Dialog Box.

Properties Dialog Box

Displays the available properties of the selected member.

The reference data file path and file name is shown at the top.

Weight - Displays the weight of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the weight yourself.

Length - Displays the length of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the length yourself. The component length is calculated based on the shape of the solid, not the length of the centerline. For example, if one end of the component is cut 45 degrees, the full length would be to the very end of the 45 degree cut, not the centerline length.

The top grid displays the required properties to place the shape. Do not add to or edit the order of these properties in the data file or the component does not place correctly in the drawing.

The bottom grid displays the optional properties. You can add or remove properties in the data file as needed. For example, you might want to add a column in the data file for the gage distance.

Steel Shapes Panel


User Input Dialog Box

Defines custom dimensioned components.

Dimensions - Displays the dimensions that you can define. Refer to the figure for a key of which dimension is which.

Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline or base point. You can select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle.

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component.

Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The thickness, length, and width dimensions are appended to the long annotation as the component is drawn and placed.

Description - Defines the component description.

Density - Defines the material density for the component.

Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define the data files location associated with the steel software. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 41) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable.

Steel channel and angle shapes cannot be modified using the AutoCAD MIRROR command. Use Flip Flange in the dialog to mirror channel and angle shapes.

When editing shape data files, remember these rules:

Columns have to be separated by two or more spaces.

First column has to be called "MEMBER". The member name cannot have two consecutive spaces.

Required columns have to in the exact order listed for each type of steel shape to generate the AutoCAD solid.

All columns after the required columns are optional. These optional columns display in the Properties dialog box for reference. The Ix (Inertia about X-axis), Iy (Inertia about Y-axis), and J (torsion) columns might be used by the SEXPORT command when export to CAESAR II Steel (*.str) files.

The cross sectional area (AREA) and fillet radius (R) columns are required in the data file but are not used by the software to generate the AutoCAD solid shape. These values are not stored with the component.

For imperial sizes:

Weight (WGT) column is in pounds per foot (lbs/ft)

Area (AREA) column is in square inches (in2)

All other required columns are in inches (in)

For metric sizes:

Weight (WGT) column is in kilograms per meter (kg/m)

Area (AREA) column is in square centimeters (cm2)

All other required columns are in millimeters (mm)

Steel Shapes Panel


Wide Flange Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=W)

Required columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) DEPTH - Depth WEB_THK - Web Thickness FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width FLG_THK - Flange Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used)

Steel Shapes Panel


Channel Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=C)

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) WEB_THK - Web Thickness FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width FLG_THK - Flange Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used) X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)

Steel Shapes Panel


Angle Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=L)

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) LEG1 - Leg 1 length LEG2 - Leg 2 length THK - Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used) X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0) Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)

Steel Shapes Panel


Tee Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=WT)

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) DEPTH - Depth STEM_THK - Stem Thickness FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width FLG_THK - Flange Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used) Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)

Steel Shapes Panel


Pipe Shapes Data file sample (Type=P)

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) OD - Outside Diameter WALL_THK - Wall Thickness (not used)

Steel Shapes Panel


Tube Shapes Data file sample (Type=TS)

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) SIDE1 - Side 1 length SIDE2 - Side 2 length THK - Thickness R - Fillet Radius (not used)

Steel Shapes Panel


Flat Bar Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=FB)

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) WIDTH - Width THK - Thickness

Steel Shapes Panel


Round Bar Shapes Data file sample (Type=RB)

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) OD - Outside Diameter

Steel Shapes Panel


Channel Shape with Lip Data file sample (TYPE=C_LIP):

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) DEPTH - Web Thickness THK - Thickness FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width LIP - Lip Length X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)

Steel Shapes Panel


Angle Shape with Lip Data file sample (TYPE=L_LIP):

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) LEG1 - Leg 1 length THK - Thickness LEG2 - Leg 2 length LIP - Lip Length X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0) Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)

Steel Shapes Panel


Z Shapes Data file sample (TYPE=Z):

Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WEIGHT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) HEIGHT - Height THK - Thickness LEG1 - Leg 1 length LIP1 - Lip 1 length (optional) LEG2 - Leg 2 length (optional) LIP2 - Lip 2 length (optional) THK_LEG1 - Leg 1 thickness (optional) THK_LEG2 - Lip 1 thickness (optional) THK_LIP1 - Leg 2 thickness (optional) THK_LIP2 - Lip 2 thickness (optional)

Steel Shapes Panel


Angle Double Shape Data file sample (TYPE=2L)

Required Columns:

MEMBER - Member Name WGT - Weight AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used) LEG1 - Leg 1 length LEG2 - Leg 2 length THK - Thickness Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)

Steel Shapes Panel



S E C T I O N 1 7

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel Draw panel


Plate - Places plates in the drawing. For more information, see Plate (on page 250).

SPLATE

Base Plate - Places base plates in free space or at the end of a member. For more information, see Base Plate (on page 252).

SBPLATE

Steel Bolt - Places a bolt in the drawing. For more information, see Steel Bolts (on page 255).

BTSHAPE

Set Size by Component - Sets the steel size by selecting an existing component in the model. For more information, see Set Size by Component (on page 257).

COMP2STEEL

Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attachment (on page 257).

SGENERICD

User Shape - Places a component using a custom user shape. For more information, see User Shape (on page 258).

SUSER

Loft - Creates loft steel components. For more information, see Loft (on page 260).

SLOFT

Steel Single Line - Places steel single line components in the drawing. For more information, see Single Line Steel (on page 261).

SLS

Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can use to build structural steel models. For more information, see Steel - Frame Creation (on page 268).

SFRAME

Annotate - Annotates and dimensions frame lines. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270).

SFRAMEANOT

Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 271).

SLADDER

Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more information, see Handrail (on page 273).

SHRAIL

Stair - Places stairs in the drawing. For more information, see Stair (on page 275).

SSTAIR

Steel Draw Panel

Steel Draw Panel


Plate

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Plate

Steel Draw toolbar: Plate

Plant menu: Steel > Plate

Command line: SPLATE

Creates plates in the model using existing shapes or by specifying a minimum of three plate corners. You define the extrusion direction after selecting the shape or defining the corners.

Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define plate data files location. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 41) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable.

Draw Plate Dialog Box




Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.

Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file.

Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in the data file header.

Part Member - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable.

Material - Specifies the material for the plate. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the data file header.

Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate.

Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the long segment of the polyline used to create the plate.

Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself.

Manual Update - Select this option to manually specify the plate weight in the Weight box. Clear this option to have the software compute the plate weight using the shape and the weight defined in the data file.

Steel Draw Panel


Insert Location - Select the centerline location for the plate. This option is only available when editing an existing plate in the model.

Pick Points - Click to define the plates by its corners.

Select Lines - Click to define the plate using an existing closed polyline shape.

Select Curves - Click to define the plate using an existing closed curved shape.


Place plate by points (on page 251)

Place plate by closed polyline (on page 251)

Place plate by curves (on page 252)

Place plate by points

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Plate .

You can also type SPLATE in the command line.

The Draw Plate dialog box displays.

2. In the Select Data File box, select Structural Plate.

3. Select the plate to place in the Select Member list.

4. Edit the Details boxes as needed.

5. Click Pick points.

6. Define the first corner location of the plate.

7. Continue to define the corners of the plate. When you are finished, right-click and then select Enter on the menu.

8. Select Positive or Negative from the context menu.

You can also press ENTER for positive Z direction or press N for negative.

Place plate by closed polyline







5. Click Select line(s).

6. Select an existing closed polyline shape in the model.

7. Right-click and, then select Positive or Negative from the context menu.

You can also press ENTER for positive Z direction or press N for negative.

Steel Draw Panel


Place plate by curves







5. Click Select curve(s).

6. Select the existing curves in the model.

7. Right-click.

8. Enter the width distance for the plate.

9. Click in the model to indicate which direction to apply the width.

10. Select Bottom, Center, or Top for the insertion location.

Base Plate

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Base Plate

Steel Draw toolbar: Base Plate

Plant menu: Steel > Base Plate

Command line: SBPLATE

Places base plates in open space or attached to the end of a steel member. CADWorx automatically copes the steel member with the base plate.

Base Plate Dialog Box



Details


Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.

Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file.


Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable.


Steel Draw Panel


Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. The software automatically subtracts the material weight removed by any holes from the plate weight. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself.


Plate Dimensions



Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement.

X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid.

Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.

Hole Dimensions

On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate without holes.

Row count - Enter the number of hole rows.

Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the holes.

Column count - Enter the number of hole columns.

Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of the holes.

Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole.

Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate.

Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from the hole center.

X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base plate center.

Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base plate center.

Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.


Place a base plate (on page 254)

Place a base plate with holes (on page 254)

Steel Draw Panel


Place a base plate

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Base Plate .

You can also type SBPLATE in the command line.

The Steel Base Plates dialog box displays.




5. Edit the Plate dimensions boxes as needed.

6. Clear the On/Off option to place the base plate without holes.

7. Click Pick point.

The prompt Specify center base point displays.

8. Define the location for the base plate center.

9. Continue to define the locations for addition base plates as needed.

Place a base plate with holes

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Base Plate .

You can also type SBPLATE in the command line.

The Steel Base Plates dialog box displays.




5. Edit the Plate dimensions boxes as needed.

6. Select the On/Off option to place the base plate with holes.

7. Enter the values for the hole dimensions and locations.

8. Click Pick point.

The prompt Specify center base point displays.

9. Define the location for the base plate center.

10. Continue to define the locations for addition base plates as needed.

Steel Draw Panel


Steel Bolts

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Steel Bolts

Steel Draw toolbar: Steel Bolts

Command line: BTSHAPE

Draws bolts in the drawing. You can place bolt shapes on lines, or you can specify the end points.


















Steel Draw Panel


















Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define the data files location associated with the steel software. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 41) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable.

Steel Draw Panel


Set Size by Component

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Set Size by Component

Steel Draw toolbar: Set Size by Component

Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Size by Component

Command line: COMP2STEEL

Sets the steel size by selecting an existing component in the model.

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Set Size by Component .

2. Select an existing component in the model that has the size that you want to use.

Generic Attachment CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Generic Attachment

Steel Draw toolbar: Generic Attachment

Command line: SGENERICD



To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place information on a beam and have it reflect the CG correctly, draw a centerline and pick MIDpoint or NEArest to the end of the centerline or the exact known location.

Generic Attach Dialog Box

Controls parameters for attaching information to generic AutoCAD objects.

Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation for the component, such as W6X25.

Description - Specifies the description for the component, such as Wide Flange.

Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the component, such as W6.

Part number - Specifies the part number for the component, such as 12345.

Material - Specifies the material for the component, such as ASTM A-36.

Length - Specifies the length of the component. Any real number is valid.

Weight - Specifies the weight of the component. Any real number is valid.

BOM Mark Point - Shows the drawing coordinate location at which the information was attached.

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Generic Attachment .

You can also type SGENERICD in the command line.

The Generic Attach dialog box displays.

2. Enter the information to attach in the appropriate boxes.

3. Click Attach.

4. Select the nonCADWorx object to which to attach the information.

Steel Draw Panel


User Shape CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > User Shape

Steel Draw toolbar: User Shape

Plant menu: Steel > User Shape

Command line: SUSER

Places a component using a custom user shape. You select the component to draw based on the user shape DWG file that you previously created. The extrusion direction and distance is based on points picked or line selected in the drawing. Roll angle can edited along with the standard annotations.

User Shapes Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing user-defined shapes in the drawing.

Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape.

Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape.

Description - Specifies the description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape.

Part Number - Specifies the part number for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape.

Material - Specifies the material for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape.

Length - Specifies the length of the shape.

Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape.

Roll Angle - Specifies the roll angle about the placement line for the shape.

Pick points - Places the shape between two points that you identify in the drawing.

Select line - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.

For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.ini must be in the same folder as the user shape drawing files. The Type.ini must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The folder ..\CADWorx (version)\Steel_I\User Shape is used to store the user shape drawing files.

Steel Draw Panel


The figure below shows the parameters stored in a user created DWG file that can be used to create a roof purlin user shape.

After selecting the user shape from the dialog, you pick points or select a line to define the extrusion length. See the figure below.

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click User Shape .

You can also type SUSER in the command line.

The User Shapes dialog box displays.

2. In the Select Member box, select the user shape to use.

3. Enter values in the Details boxes as needed.

Steel Draw Panel


4. Click Pick points to place the component by defining the two end locations.

-or-

Click Select line to select an existing line in the drawing on which to place the component.

Loft

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Loft

Steel Draw toolbar: Loft

Command line: SLOFT

Creates lofted steel components. You must have two cross sections and the path curve between them defined in the drawing before using this command. The cross sections define the shape of the resulting steel component. The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections.

1. Draw the two cross sections and the path curve in the drawing.

2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Loft .

You can also type SLOFT in the command line.

3. Enter the material density.

4. Select the first cross section.

5. Select the second cross section.

6. Right-click to indicate you are finished selecting cross sections.

7. Select the path curve.

8. Define the annotations, descriptions, part number, and material.

Steel Draw Panel


Single Line Steel CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Single Line Steel

Steel Draw toolbar: Single Line Steel

Command line: SLS

Using the Steel Single Line program

1. Generate the 3D model of the steel in Model Space.

2. Create viewports in the Layouts.

3. Configure the object settings on the General tab. (see below).

4. Generate the viewports.

5. Apply new settings to objects.

6. Configure the dimension settings on the Dimension tab (see below).

7. Dimension the viewport.

This feature is only part of CADWorx Steel Professional Plus or CADWorx Plant Professional.

Using the Steel Drawing Manager

The palette can be resized, docked and hidden like any AutoCAD palette. The command SLSSHOWPALETTE shows the palette if it is hidden. The column line between the field labels and the settings can be moved left or right to resize the columns.

Steel Draw Panel


General Tab

Tools

Steel Draw Panel


Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another drawing

Load Settings From File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file.

Add Setting - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse.

Delete Setting - Delete a named setting from the list.

Match Settings - Apply settings from one object to other objects.

Turn off Vertical symbols - Used to turn off vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis objects.

Generate - Generate the steel member drawing objects in a viewport.

Set to Object - Apply new settings to a viewport or individual steel components already drawn.

Update - Updates the existing objects to match changes made to the model

Reset Settings - Resets individual member objects back to the viewport settings and link them back to the view port.

Archive drawings - Detaches all intelligence from the drawing objects. Underlying models can be removed.

Turn of Vertical Symbols - Used to turn on vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis objects previously turned off.

Settings List Box - Choose the named settings.

Line Settings

Layer - AutoCAD Layer for New Steel

Color - AutoCAD object color for New Steel

Linetype - Loaded AutoCAD linetype for New Steel

Weight - AutoCAD line weight for New Steel

Steel Draw Panel


Layer Exist - AutoCAD Layer for Existing Steel

Color Exist - AutoCAD object color for Existing Steel

Weight Exist - AutoCAD line weight for Existing Steel

Gap Style - Used to set either Manual gap distance or automatic gap distance

Automatic uses the steel member end gap type to gap the lines set by the Gap Distance setting

Manual applies the Gap Distance to all ends regardless of gap type

Gap Distance - This is a paper space distance for the coping gaps

Tag Settings

Layer - AutoCAD Layers

Color - AutoCAD object colors

Text Style - Loaded text styles

Text Height - Paper space text height

Offset - Set an offset above the line / symbol for the test to be placed

Justification - AutoCAD text justifications

Style - Short or Long descriptions

Display - Display of the tag, on or off

Symbol Settings

Layer Main - AutoCAD Layers for visible parts of the symbol

Color Main - AutoCAD object colors for visible parts of the symbol

Linetype Main - Loaded AutoCAD linetypes for visible parts of the symbol

Layer Minor - AutoCAD Layers for hidden parts of the symbol

Steel Draw Panel


Color Minor - AutoCAD object colors for hidden parts of the symbol

Linetype Minor - Loaded AutoCAD linetypes for hidden parts of the symbol

Scale - Width scale based on the actual visual width in the viewport

Length - Paper space length

Offset - Set the distance between parallel elements for visual effect

Display - Display of the symbol, on or off

Dimension Tab

Tools

Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another drawing.

Steel Draw Panel


Load Settings from File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file.

Add Named Style - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse.

Delete Named Style - Delete a named setting from the list.

Generate Plan Dimension - Generate the plan style dimensions of a selected viewport.

Generate Elevated Dimension - Generate the elevation style dimensions of a selected viewport.

Clear Dimensions - Remove all dimensions of a selected viewport.

Update Dimensions - Update existing dimensions of a selected viewport.

Settings List Box - Used to choose the named settings.

Dimension Level - Select how many dimension levels to use.

Dimension Settings

Layer - AutoCAD Layers

Dim Style - AutoCAD Dimension Styles

Dim Type - Select the dimension type.

Baseline Type

Continue Type

Ordinate Type

Offset - The distance from the edge of the viewport to place the first level dimensions

Elevation Value - The relative elevation of the selected origin point

Elevation Prefix - Prefix for the elevation dimensions

Steel Draw Panel


Tag Settings

Display - To display the column tags on the plan dimensions

Layer - AutoCAD Layer of the column tags and text

Color - AutoCAD color of the column tags and text

Style - Text style for the column tags and text

Height - Text height for the column tag text

Balloon Size - Diameter of the column tags

Orientation - The order of the automatic numbering of the column tags.

LR-BT left to right, bottom to top

LR-TB left to right, top to bottom

RL-BT right to left, bottom to top

RL-TB right to left, top to bottom

Vertical - Vertical column tag numbering start and style

Letter (A)

Letter + Number (A1)

Number (1)

Number + Letter (1A)

Horizontal - Horizontal column tag numbering start and style.

Letter (A)

Letter + Number (A1)

Number (1)

Number + Letter (1A)

Vertical Inc - The increment value of the tag number

Increments the second value of a combination tag

Value = 1 then "A" to "B" or "A1" to "A2"

Horizontal Inc - The increment value of the tag number

Increments the second value of a combination tag

Value = 1 then "A" to "B" or "A1" to "A2"

Steel Draw Panel


Frame Creation

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Frame Creation

Steel Draw toolbar: Frame Creation

Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Creation

Command line: SFRAME

Create intelligent frames that you can use to build structural steel models.

Frame Creation Dialog Box

Name - Specifies the name for the current frame. The frame name is required only when you create more than one frame in the same drawing. If you do not specify a name and you save the frame configuration, the software uses the file name as the frame name.

Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the frame insertion point with your mouse. Clear this option to use the coordinate location specified in the X, Y, and Z boxes as the frame insertion location.

Repeat Rows/Columns - Select this option to repeat the same rows and columns as the first plan for all subsequent plans. This option provides a quick way to create large frames without repeatedly entering the same information. The setting of this option is saved with the frame configuration.

Create Clipped Views - Select this option to create clipped views for each plan, row, and column. These views can then be accessed using the View command in AutoCAD. The views are clipped in the front and back making them excellent to use in annotation layouts. You need to select the Update Layer option in the View command dialog for the view to be set correctly. The setting of this option is saved with the frame configuration.

Rotation Angle - Enter the rotation angle for the entire frame. The rotation is about the specified insertion point. The rotation angle is saved with the frame configuration.

Draw Sloped Vertical Lines - Select this option to make the vertical lines sloped according to each plans X and Y offsets. This option is useful when creating platform frames and requires that each plan have the same number of rows and columns. The setting of this option is saved with the frame configuration.

Plan - Defines the plans for the current frame. Specify the distance from one plan to the next in the Distance column for each plan. You can also specify X and Y offset values from the insertion point before the row and column lines for this plan are created.

CADWorx automatically creates labels for each plan based on the distance specified. The elevation label default setting is defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl with the PLAN_LABEL_START setting. Clear the Auto label option to define the label text yourself. The label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270).

Click Add to add a new plan to the current frame. Click Remove to delete the selected plans from the current frame. If Repeat Rows/Columns is not selected, Remove deletes all rows and columns associated with the plan that is being removed.

Row - Defines the rows for the current frame. You can specify the distance from one row to the next in the Distance column for each row. If Repeat Rows/Columns is selected, the rows are for the currently selected plan.

CADWorx automatically creates labels for each row. The row label default setting is defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl. The [ROW] section contains the characters used in making the label. If there are more rows and available characters, the labels are concatenated.

Steel Draw Panel


For example, A, B, C......X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC and so on. Clear the Auto label option to define the label text yourself. This label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270).

Columns - Defines the columns for the current frame. You can specify the distance from one column to the next in the Distance column for each column. If Repeat Rows/Columns is selected, the columns are for the currently selected plan.

CADWorx automatically creates labels for each column. The column label default settings is defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl. The [COLUMN] section contains the characters used in making the label. If there are more columns than available characters, the labels are concatenated. For example, A, B, C......X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC and so on. Clear the Auto label option to define the label text yourself. This label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 270).

New - Click to create a new frame. You are prompted to save any changes to the current frame.

Save - Click to save the current frame to a file. You are prompted to enter a name and specify the location to save the frame configuration.

Save As - Click to save the current frame under a different file name.

OK - Click to draw the frame in the current drawing. You are prompted to save any changes to the current frame.


Create a new frame configuration (on page 269)

Edit a frame configuration (on page 270)

Place a frame in the drawing (on page 270)

Create a new frame configuration

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Creation .

You can also type SFRAME in the command line.

The Frame Creation dialog box displays.

2. Define the insertion point for the frame.

3. Define the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove.

4. Click Save As.

5. Enter the frame name, and specify of folder location.

6. Click Save.

Steel Draw Panel


Edit a frame configuration




2. Click Browse, and then open the frame to edit.

3. Edit the frame options and insertion point as needed.

4. Edit the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove.

5. Click Save.

Click Save As to save the frame to a different file.

Place a frame in the drawing




2. Click Browse, and then open the frame to place.

3. Edit the frame options and insertion point as needed.

4. Edit the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove as needed.

5. Click OK.

You are prompted to save any edits that you have made to the frame.

Frame Annotation

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Frame Annotation

Steel Draw toolbar: Frame Annotation

Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Annotation

Command line: SFRAMEANOT

Annotates and dimensions frame lines. This command can also create the dimensions in call outs in paper space.

Dimensions only - Draws only the dimension for the selected frame line. You are prompted to pick the dimension side. The distance the dimensions are offset from the frame line is controlled by the AutoCAD setvar DIMDLI. This option respects the current DIMSCALE setting.

Call outs only - Creates the call out and places the label of the selected frame line in a block with attribute. The M5 block located in the [Product Directory]\Support folder is used for the call out. You are prompted to pick the call out location.

Both - This option creates both dimensions and call outs.

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Annotation .

You can also type SFRAMEANOT in the command line.

2. Select the frame line in the drawing.

3. Select Dimensions only, Call outs only, or Both.

4. Select the side of the frame line to place the annotation.

5. Pick the location of the annotation.

Steel Draw Panel


Ladder

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Ladder

Steel Draw toolbar: Ladder

Plant menu: Steel > Ladder

Command line: SLADDER

Creates ladders by specifying the start and end points of the ladder and rotation angle of the ladder. Click Browse to load a predefined ladder into the dialog box. Use Save As to save a ladder configuration for use later.

Position Tab

Start point / End point - Defines the location of the ladder.

Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the start and end ladder locations interactively in the model. Clear this option to define the locations using the X, Y, and Z coordinate boxes.

Rotation angle - Defines the rotation angle for the entire ladder. Select Specify On-screen to define the rotation interactively in the drawing. Clear the option to use the rotation value specified in the Angle box.

Dimension Tab

Sloped ladder - Select to allow the ladder to be sloped. The slope is determined by the difference between the X or Y start and end locations in the Position Tab.

Rail width - Enter the inside distance from rail to rail.

Above platform - Enter the distance the ladder rails (offset extension of rail) are to extend above the top rung.

Rail top exit width - Enter the inside to inside distance of the ladder opening above the platform.

Rung spacing - Enter the center to center distance of the ladder rungs.

Offset (+/-) - Enter the distance the ladder is offset from the platform.

Cage Tab

Cage ladder - Select to place a cage on the ladder if the height of the ladder is over the minimum distance.

Curved - Select to connect the hoop bars to the ladder using a curved connection.

Max. hoop spacing - Enter the distance from center to center of the intermediate hoops.

Cage bar spacing - Enter the distance from the center to center of the vertical bars on the cage.

Bottom hoop clearance - Enter the distance from the base elevation or grade to the bottom hoop.

Distance to middle - Enter the distance from the ladder rungs to the center of the cage.

Small hoop radius - Enter the radius of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is available only when Curved is selected.

Connection distance - Enter the distance of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is available only when Curved is not selected.

Top hoop radius - Enter the radius of the top hoop from the center of the cage.

Steel Draw Panel


Intermediate hoop radius - Enter the radius of the intermediate hoop from the center of the cage.

Bottom hoop radius - Enter the radius of the bottom hoop from the center of the cage.

Top hoop opening - Defines the direction of the hoop opening. If you select Open Left or Open Right, you need to define the side outlet width and extension distances.

Side outlet width - Enter the width of the cage side opening.

Side outlet extension - Enter the length of the side outlet extension.

Sizes Tab

The bars, rungs, hoops, and cage bars rows allows the selection of different components to be used with the ladder.

Type - Select the member type.

Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration settings.

Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected.

Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section.

Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation is used in bill of material reports.

Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is used in bill of material reports.

X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis.

Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member.

Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis.

Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member.

Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point.


Place a ladder interactively (on page 272)

Place a ladder using key-ins (on page 273)

Place a ladder with a cage (on page 273)

Place a ladder interactively

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Ladder .

You can also type SLADDER in the command line.

The Ladder dialog box displays.

2. Optionally, click Browse, and then open the ladder configuration to place.

3. Select the Position tab.

4. Select the Specify On-screen option for the start and end points.

5. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Dimension, Cage, and Size tabs.

6. Click OK.

7. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the ladder as defined but not to save the ladder properties for reuse.

8. Define the location of the ladder bottom.

9. Define the location of the ladder top.

Steel Draw Panel


Place a ladder using key-ins





3. Select the Position tab.

4. Clear the Specify On-screen option for the start and end points.

5. Enter the ladder start and end points using the X, Y, and Z boxes. The bottom of the ladder is defined on the left. The top of the ladder is defined on the right.

6. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Dimension, Cage, and Size tabs.

7. Click OK.


The ladder is placed in the drawing.

Place a ladder with a cage





3. Select the Cage tab.

4. Select the Caged ladder option.

5. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Position, Dimension, and Size tabs.

6. Click OK.


The ladder is placed in the drawing.

Handrail

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Hand Rail

Steel Draw toolbar: Hand Rail

Plant menu: Steel > Hand Rail

Command line: SHRAIL

Creates handrails in the drawing using specified corner points of the handrail or a polyline or 3D polyline that defines the path of the handrail. You are prompted to specify the offset direction after the points have been picked, or the polyline has been selected.

Dimensions Tab

Post below platform (+/-) - Enter the distance to place the hand rail above or below the platform to which it is attached to.

Platform offset dist (+/-) - Enter the distance to offset the hand rail. The hand rail can be offset away from or over the platform.

Steel Draw Panel


Start/end offset - Enter the distance from the end of the hand rail to place the post or stanchion. This distance applies to both ends of the hand rail.

Max post spacing - Enter the maximum distance between the post or stanchions.

Spacing distance - Enter the vertical spacing between the rails. Use Add and Remove to change the number of rails.

Sizes Tab

The top rail, intermediate rail, bottom rail, and post can have different components for the hand rail.


Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration file.











Place hand rail by points (on page 274)

Place hand rail by polyline (on page 275)

Place hand rail by points

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Hand Rail .

You can also type SHRAIL in the command line.

The Hand Rail dialog box displays.

2. Optionally, click Browse, and then open a different hand rail configuration to place.

3. Edit the hand rail properties on the Dimension and Sizes tabs.


5. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the hand rail as defined but not to save the hand rail properties for reuse.

6. Specify the starting location for the hand rail.

7. Continue placing vertex points for the hand rail path.

8. Right-click, and then select Enter.

9. Identify the path side that is away from the platform.

Steel Draw Panel


Place hand rail by polyline 1. Place a polyline or 3D polyline in the drawing that defines the hand rail path.

2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Hand Rail .

You can also type SHRAIL in the command line.

The Hand Rail dialog box displays.

3. Optionally, click Browse, and then open a different hand rail configuration to place.

4. Edit the hand rail properties on the Dimension and Sizes tabs.

5. Click Select line.

6. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the hand rail as defined but not to save the hand rail properties for reuse.

7. Select the polyline in the drawing.

8. Identify the path side that is away from the platform.

Stair

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Stair

Steel Draw toolbar: Stair

Plant menu: Steel > Stair

Command line: SSTAIR

Creates stairs in the drawing by specifying the top point of the stair and then a base elevation.

Position Tab

Top point - Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the top of the stairs. You can click Specified On-screen to select a point in the drawing.

Base elevation - Enter the elevation at the bottom of stringer. You can click Specified On-screen to select a point in the drawing.

Rotation angle - Enter the rotation in degrees. You can click Specified On-screen to define the rotation in the drawing.

Dimension Tab

Tread

Boxes are disabled until the top point and bottom elevation are entered in the Position Tab. The software then calculates initial values based on the top point and bottom elevation.

Changes made to Recalculates

(A) Total rise (C) Rise

(B) Riser count (C) Rise, (E) Run

(C) Rise (A) Total rise

(D) First rise (C) Rise

(E) Run (F) Total run

Steel Draw Panel


(F) Total run (E) Run

(A) Total rise - Enter the distance between the bottom elevation and the top point.

(B) Riser count - Enter the number of risers (steps or treads) in the stair.

(C) Rise - Enter the distance between from the top of one riser to the top of the next riser.

(D) First rise - Enter the distance from the bottom elevation to the top of the first riser.

(E) Run - Enter the depth of the riser (if you were standing in front of the stair).

(F) Total Run - Enter the total length (measured horizontally) of the stair.

Stringer

Width - Enter the inside distance between the two stringers.

(H) Top extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the riser.

(J) Top clear - Enter the distance between the top of the stringer and the top point defined for stair.

(K) Base extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the edge of the first riser.

(M) Base clear - Enter the distance between the bottom of the stringer and the bottom elevation point.

Miscellaneous

(N) Stair offset - Enter the offset distance from the top stair location point.

(P) Angle - Enter the stair angle measured from horizontal.

Sizes Tab

You can define different components to use for the riser and the stringer.


Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration file.



Steel Draw Panel









1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Stair .

You can also type SSTAIR in the command line.

The Stair dialog box displays.

2. Using the Specify On-screen button or the X, Y, and Z boxes, define the top point for the stairs.

3. Using the Specify On-screen button or the Z box, define the base elevation for the stairs.

4. Using the Specify On-screen button or the Angle box, define the rotation for the stairs.

5. Select the Dimension tab.

6. Review and edit the tread and stringer properties as needed. Refer to Dimension Tab if needed.

7. Select the Sizes tab.

8. Define the components sizes for the treads and the stringers.

9. Click OK.

Steel Draw Panel



S E C T I O N 1 8

CADWorx Steel / HVAC > Steel Edit


Cope - Cuts a member back to other members. For more information, see Cope (on page 280).

SCOPE

Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For more information, see Miter (on page 280).

SMITER

Cut - Cuts members by a plane that you define. For more information, see Cut (on page 281).

SCUT

Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union (on page 282).

SUNION

Local Edit - Edits a selected member. For more information, see Edit (on page 282).

SCEDIT

Global Edit - Edits the annotation, description, part number, and material of multiple components. For more information, see Global Edit (on page 286).

SGCEDIT

Global Edit All - Edits multiple components of the same member shape. For more information, see Global Edit All (on page 287).

SGCEDITALL

Annotate Component - Places the long or short annotation of the component in the drawing. For more information, see Annotate Component (on page 289).

SCOMPANOT

Convert Solid - Converts components to solids. For more information, see Convert Solid (on page 289).

SCONVERTSOLID

Layer Change - Moves steel solid or center lines to a new layer. For more information, see Layer Change (on page 290).

SLAYERCHANGE / SSETEXIST / SREMOVEEXIST

Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off. For more information, see Select Control (on page 290).

SELECTCONTROL

Auto Cope - Turns on or off the automatic coping of members. For more information, see Auto Cope (on page 290).

SAUTOCOPE

Steel Edit Panel

Steel Edit Panel


Cope

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Cope

Steel Edit toolbar: Cope

Plant menu: Steel > Cope

Command line: SCOPE

Copes steel members to other steel members. You can place bolted coping or welded coping. Bolted coping is controlled by SteelCopeBoltDistance (on page 39) and provides a gap between the coped member and the boundary member. Welded cope is controlled by SteelCopeWeldDistance (on page 40) and provides a gap between the coped member and the boundary member. You can:

Cope a single member to another single member that provides the cope boundary.

Cope many members to many other members.

A member that crosses another member is cut into two separate members.

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cope .

You can also type SCOPE in the command line.

2. Select the members to cope. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

3. Select the members to cope against. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

4. Select bolted or welded cope.

Bolt - Copes the members with the offset specified in the SteelCopeBoltDistance startup variable.

Weld - Copes the members with the offset specified in the SteelCopeWeldDistance startup variable.

Miter

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Miter

Steel Edit toolbar: Miter

Plant menu: Steel > Miter

Command line: SMITER

Miters two structural pieces to fit each other. The two structural pieces must be in the same plane and have connected member ends. You miter multiple member pairs in each command pass.

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Miter .

You can also type SMITER in the command line.

2. Select the members to miter.

3. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

The software miters the selected members.

Steel Edit Panel


Cut

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Cut

Steel Edit toolbar: Cut

Plant menu: Steel > Cut

Command line: SCUT

Cuts steel members along a plane that you define by an existing line or by points placed in the drawing. The software updates the lengths, weight, and other affected properties of the cut members. You cannot cut plate members with this command.

Line - Defines the plane using the two end points of the line and its extrusion direction (the Z-axis of the plane the line was drawn in).

Points - Defines the plane using three points you pick in the drawing.


Cut members by line (on page 281)

Cut members by three-point plane (on page 281)

Cut members by line

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cut .

You can also type SCUT in the command line.

2. Select Line.

3. Select the line to use to define the plane.

4. Select the members to cut.

5. Right-click or press ENTER to cut the members.

Cut members by three-point plane

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cut .

You can also type SCUT in the command line.

2. Select Points.

3. Pick three points in the drawing to define the cutting plane.

4. Select the members to cut.

5. Right-click or press ENTER to cut the members.

Steel Edit Panel


Union

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Union

Steel Edit toolbar: Union

Plant menu: Steel > Union

Command line: SUNION

Joins two or more steel members into one member. The members must have the same properties for:

Member size (W10x30 for example)

Insertion location

Centerline location

Rotation angle

Data file

Short annotation

Long annotation

Description

Material

Part number

In addition, the two center lines must meet each other but not intersect or overlap.

Curved members cannot be joined with straight members.

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Union .

You can also type SUNION in the command line.

2. Select the first member to join.

3. Select the second member to join.

4. Continue to select members. When you are finished, right-click or press ENTER to join the members.

Edit

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Edit

Steel Edit toolbar: Edit

Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Local Edit

Command line: SCEDIT

Edits the properties of steel shapes and plates in the drawing. You can start this command from the command line, the command icon, or by double-clicking the object you want to edit.



Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display

Steel Edit Panel


for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.






















Steel Edit Panel











Draw Plate Dialog Box




Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.

Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file.


Part Member - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable.




Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself.


Steel Edit Panel


Insert Location - Select the centerline location for the plate. This option is only available when editing an existing plate in the model.

Pick Points - Click to define the plates by its corners.

Select Lines - Click to define the plate using an existing closed polyline shape.

Select Curves - Click to define the plate using an existing closed curved shape.

Base Plate Dialog Box



Details


Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.

Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text in the MEMBER column of the data file.


Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 40) startup variable.


Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. The software automatically subtracts the material weight removed by any holes from the plate weight. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself.


Plate Dimensions



Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement.

X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid.

Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.

Steel Edit Panel


Hole Dimensions

On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate without holes.

Row count - Enter the number of hole rows.

Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the holes.

Column count - Enter the number of hole columns.

Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of the holes.

Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole.

Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate.

Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from the hole center.

X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base plate center.

Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base plate center.

Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.

Global Edit CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit

Steel Edit toolbar: Global Edit

Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit

Command line: SGCEDIT

Edits short annotation, long annotation, description, part number, and material for multiple components at one time. Changes to any or all of the edit boxes are made to each selected component. Leave the edit boxes blank for those properties you do not want to edit.

Steel Global Edit Dialog Box

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name. Generally, this is the member name up to the first "X" character (for example, W10 is the short annotation name for W10X30).

Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name (for example, W10X30).


Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component.

Material - Specifies the material for the component.

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Global Edit .

You can also type SGCEDIT in the command line.

2. Select the members to edit. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

The Steel Global Edit dialog box displays.

3. Edit the appropriate property boxes. Leave blank the properties that you do not want to change.

4. Click OK.

Steel Edit Panel


Global Edit All CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit All

Steel Edit toolbar: Global Edit All

Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit All

Command line: SGCEDITALL

Edits multiple components of the same member shape. After selecting multiple components or maybe your entire drawing, you can filter the component to edit by member shape.


















Steel Edit Panel










1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Global Edit All .

You can also type SGCEDITALL in the command line.

2. Select the members to edit. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

The Steel Global Edit dialog box displays.

3. Select the member shapes you want to edit. You can select more than one group to edit, although you edit the groups one at a time.

4. Click OK.

The Component Edit dialog box displays.

Steel Edit Panel


5. Edit the member properties as needed. See Draw Steel Dialog Box for more information about this dialog.

6. Click OK.

The software displays the number of components that were updated.

7. If you selected more than one group, the Component Edit dialog box displays the next group.

8. Edit the member properties as needed.

9. Click OK.

Annotate Component CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Annotate Component

Command line: SCOMPANOT

Places the short or long annotations of selected steel members in the drawing.

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Annotate Component .

You can also type SCOMPANOT in the command line.

2. Select the component to annotate. Type Auto to have the software automatically determine the annotation rotation and location. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

3. Select Long to place the defined long annotation.

or

Select Short to place the defined short annotation.

4. Define the annotation starting location.

5. Define the annotation rotation.

Convert Solid

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Convert Solid

Steel Edit toolbar: Convert Solid

Command line: SCONVERTSOLID

Creates the solid representation of component. When you have deleted the solid representation and have been modeling using only centerlines, this command is used to re-create the solid cross-section representation of the component.

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Convert Solid .

You can also type SCONVERTSOLID in the command line.

2. Select the components to convert. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

The software creates the solids.

Steel Edit Panel


Layer Change CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Layer Change

Steel Edit toolbar: Layer Change

Command line: SLAYERCHANGE / SSETEXIST / SREMOVEEXIST

Edits the existing flag for steel members and changes layers for steel solid and centerline graphics.

The software automatically moves steel plates and base plates centerlines to whichever layer is chosen for the corresponding solid.

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Layer Change .

You can also type SLAYERCHANGE in the command line.

2. Select All to select all components in the drawing. -or- Select Select to manually select steel members. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

3. Select Yes to change the solid layer of the selected components.

4. Select the new layer, and then click OK.

5. Select Yes to change the centerline layer of the selected components.

6. Select the new layer, and then click OK.

Select Control

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Select Control

Steel Edit toolbar: Select Control

Command line: SELECTCONTROL

Toggles whether grip points are displayed on solids. To change the length of pipe or steel, you can grip stretch the pipe or steel centerline. However, it may be difficult to select the center line endpoint grip for steel shapes when solid grip points are on. Turning off the solid grip points with this toggle makes it easier to grip stretch components.

Auto Cope

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Auto Cope

Steel Edit toolbar: Auto Cope

Plant menu: Steel > Auto Cope

Command line: SAUTOCOPE

Toggles the automatic coping of members on or off. When two members are coped and this feature is on, the system automatically reapplies the cope when one of the members is changed. Select this command again to turn off the automatic coping feature.


S E C T I O N 1 9

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel BOM DB Panel


Steel BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. For more information, see Steel BOM Setup (on page 292).

SBOMSETUP

Cut Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of steel with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut Steel Bill of Material (on page 294).

SBOMCUT

Total Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of steel in each size. For more information, see Total Steel Bill of Material (on page 296).

SBOMTOTAL

Single Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single Steel Bill of Material (on page 297).

SBOMSINGLE

Export Steel BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. For more information, see Export Steel Bill of Material (on page 299).

SBOMEXPORT

Setup Live Database - Links the drawing to an external database. For more information, see Setup Live Database Steel (on page 300).

SLIVEDB

Export Steel Database - Exports steel components to Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel. For more information, see Export Steel (on page 301).

SDBFGEN

Import Steel Database - Imports and draws CADWorx steel components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Import Steel (on page 301).

SDBFIN

Audit Steel Database - Compares the database with the drawing displaying any differences between the two. For more information, see Audit Steel Database (on page 302).

SDBAUDIT

Synchronize Steel Database - Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value within the database tables. For more information, see Synchronize Steel Database (on page 302).

SSYNC

Export Steel Model - Exports the steel model to CAESAR II, Robobat, or CIS/2 files. For more information, see Export Steel Model (on page 303).

SEXPORT

Import Steel Model - Imports a CIS/2 file into the current drawing. For more information, see Import Steel Model (on page 303).

SIMPORT

Steel BOM / DB Panel



C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected steel members. For more information, see CG Generator (on page 304).

SCG

Steel BOM Setup

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Setup

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Setup

Command line: SBOMSETUP

Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. Using this dialog box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of different entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.

Bill of Material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.

Steel Bill of Material Setup Dialog Box


BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can include in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.






Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of the columns. Use Sort Order to define the sort order.



Sort Order - Controls the sort order and accumulation of steel components in the BOM. For more information, see Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 294).









1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Setup .

You can also type SBOMSETUP in the command line.

The Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.

2. To add a property to the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns Available list.


3. To remove a property from the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns Selected list.

4. Click OK.







4. Click OK.








5. Click OK.

Change the BOM sorting and accumulation 1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Setup .

You can also type SBOMSETUP in the command line. The Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.

2. Click Sort Order. The Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Control Setup dialog box displays.

3. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list. 4. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM. 5. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how

information in that column is sorted. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Descending is large number to smaller (100 to 1) and Z to A.

6. Click OK on the Steel BOM Sort Order dialog box.

7. Click OK on the Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box.



Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box Controls the sort order of the BOM. Columns that you place in the BOM Columns Selected list are used to sort the BOM starting with the top column, then the second column, and so forth. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order in which the BOM is sorted.

This dialog box also controls the accumulation of steel components. For example, if two members have different Short Annotation values and you do not want these to accumulate, Short Annotation would have to be added to the BOM Columns Selected list.

BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can use to sort the BOM. These columns can be used to sort using Add.

BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected for sorting and their sort order from top to bottom.


Column Sort - Controls additional sorting on each selected column. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z.

Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.

Cut Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Cut

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Cut

Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Cut

Command line: SBOMCUT

Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of steel with a length and a tag. Identical items are accumulated in the quantity column. For example, if you select two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this:

BILL OF MATERIALS

MARK QTY LONG ANNOTATION LENGTH WEIGHT

1 2 W14X74 120.00 1480.00

TOTAL WEIGHT: 1480.00

The steel component could have been converted with the Existing option.














1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Cut .

You can also type SBOMCUT in the command line.




5. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.



1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Cut .

You can also type SBOMCUT in the command line.








Total Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Total

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Total

Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Total

Command line: SBOMTOTAL

Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of steel in each size. Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column. For example, if you select two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this:

BILL OF MATERIALS


1 1 W14X74 240.00 1480.00


The component could have been converted with the Existing option.














1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Total .

You can also type SBOMTOTAL in the command line.







1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Total .

You can also type SBOMTOTAL in the command line.






Single Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Single

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Single

Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Single

Command line: SBOMSINGLE

Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object having its own line in the schedule. For example, if you select two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this:



BILL OF MATERIALS


1 1 W14X74 120.00 740.00

2 1 W14X74 120.00 740.00


The component could have been converted with the Existing option.














1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Single .

You can also type SBOMSINGLE in the command line.







1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Single .

You can also type SBOMSINGLE in the command line.






Export Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Export

Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Export

Command line: SBOMEXPORT

Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. The schedule for the Bill of Material is defined using Steel BOM Setup (on page 292). CADWorx can export the Bill of Material schedules to:

Access file (*.mdb)

Excel file (*.xls)

Text file (*.txt)

HTML file (*.htm)

When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.



1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Export .

You can also type SBOMEXPORT in the command line.

2. Specify if you want an Cut, Total, or Single BOM.

3. Select the objects to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.

4. In the Save as type box, select the file format that you want.

5. Type the file name, and specify the folder location.

6. Click Save.

Setup Live Database Steel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Setup

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: Steel > Database > Setup

Command line: SLIVEDB

CADWorx supports a fully functional live external database. Use this command to define the database settings that are saved to the configuration file listed. When a drawing is opened and a configuration file is located in the same folder, the drawing initializes according to that configuration file using a live database or not.

When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then the item is deleted from the database.

All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session.

On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing.

Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed.

Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an existing database.

SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER.

Oracle Schema - Defines the Oracle database information. Type the ODBC schema name in the Schema box.

Startup Dialog Options - Sets the database option on CADWorx startup.

No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with the appropriate configuration file.

No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.



Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or not.

Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by using DBFGEN for Pipe or SDBFGEN for Steel. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 143).

Export Steel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export


Plant menu: Steel > Database > Export

Command line: SDBFGEN

Exports CADWorx steel information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.

Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a Microsoft Excel file.

Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of the dialog display the file name and folder in use.

Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database file at the same time.

New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type.


You can also type SDBFGEN in the command line.

2. Select the steel components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.





or


6. Click OK.

Import Steel

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Import

Plant menu: Steel > Database > Import

Command line: SDBFIN

Imports and draws CADWorx steel components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This command is not available when you are using a live database.

Use the Export Steel (on page 301) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file to import.



1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import .

You can also type SDBFIN in the command line.


2. Browse to and select the file to import.

3. Click Open.

The Select Drawings for Import dialog box displays.


5. Click OK.

Audit Steel Database

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Audit

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Audit

Plant menu: Steel > Database > Audit

Command line: SDBAUDIT

Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. Use this command whenever the drawing or the database has any problems. If a problem is found in the drawing, for example a component in the database is not present in the drawing, you have the option to delete this component in the database or to simply ignore it.

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Audit .

You can also type SDBAUDIT in the command line.


2. Browse to and select the file to audit against the drawing.

3. Click Open.

The message Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database displays.



Synchronize Steel Database

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Synchronize

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize

Plant menu: Steel > Database > Synchronize

Command line: SSYNC

Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. This command does not write new records to the database for new components that are in the model but are not in the database. You need to use Setup Live Database Steel (on page 300) before using this command.

When a drawing has a live database attached, you can open the database and edit the SHORT_ANNOTATION, LONG_ANNOTATION, DESCRIPTION, PART_NUMBER, and MATERIAL fields in the STEEL table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect on the drawing.

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize .



You can also type SSYNC in the command line.


Export Steel Model CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export


Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Export

Command line: SEXPORT

Exports selected CADWorx steel components to one of three data format: CIS/2, CAESAR II, or RoboBat. The export to CIS/2 requires installing the "ST-Runtime" in [Product Folder]\System\struntime.msi.


You can also type SEXPORT in the command line.

2. Select the steel components to export. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.

The Select Export Output File Type dialog box displays.

3. Select the file type to save in the Save as type box.

4. Specify the folder and file name, and then click Save.

If you selected CAESAR II, a prompt displays.

5. Enter the starting node number for the CAESAR II file.

6. Enter the node increment value.

Import Steel Model CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import

Steel BOM / DB toolbar: Import

Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Import

Command line: SIMPORT

Imports a CIS/2 data file and creates CADWorx steel components. The import requires that the CADWorx steel parametric data file be available for the components that are being imported from the CIS/2 file. This command requires installing the "ST-Runtime" from [Product Folder]\System\struntime.msi.

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import .

You can also type SIMPORT in the command line.

2. Select the file to import.

3. Click Open.



CG Generator

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > C.G. Generator

Steel toolbar: C.G. Generator

Plant menu: Steel > C.G. Generator

Command line: SCG

Calculates the center of gravity (CG) of the steel members (including plates) in a drawing. You must select the members for which to calculate the center of gravity.

To combine center of gravity reports for piping and steel components, take the weight summations and add them together. Then take each separate moment (ft-lb) X, Y, Z and add them together separately. To find the new X centroid location, divide the total X moment by the total weight. To find the new Y and Z centroid location, divide them by the total weight.

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click C.G. Generator .

You can also type SCG in the command line.

2. Select the members to cope. Type All in the command line to select all the members in drawing. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.

3. Select Yes to save the center of gravity report to a text file. Provide the file name and folder information if you choose to save the report.

4. Select Yes to view the weight summation in the command area.

5. Select Yes to place a smaller round marker in the drawing indicating the calculated center of gravity.


S E C T I O N 2 0

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel


HVAC Shapes - Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. For more information, see HVAC (on page 306).

HVAC

HVAC Shapes Catalog - Places HVAC shapes and cable tray shapes that are defined in a data file library. For more information, see HVAC Shapes Catalog (on page 308).

HVACC

User Shape - Places a component using a custom user shape. For more information, see User Shape (on page 310).

HUSER

Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 313)

HGENERIC

Edit - Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. For more information, see Edit (on page 314).

HCEDIT

GC Edit - Edits global HVAC component data. For more information, see GC Edit (on page 315).

HGCEDIT

HVAC BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. For more information, see HVAC BOM Setup (on page 315).

HBOMSETUP

Cut HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of HVAC with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut HVAC Bill of Material (on page 318).

HBOMCUT

Total HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of HVAC in each size. For more information, see Total HVAC Bill of Material (on page 319).

HBOMTOTAL

Single HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single HVAC Bill of Material (on page 321).

HBOMSINGLE

Data Remove - Removes CADWorx data from components. For more information, see Data Remove (on page 322).

HDATAREMOVE

Layer Change - Changes the solid and centerline layers associated with components. For more information, see Layer Change (on page 322).

HLAYERCHANGE

Export HVAC - Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Export HVAC (on page 323).

HDBFGEN

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel



Import HVAC - Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see Import HVAC (on page 324).

HDBFIN

Audit HVAC Database - Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. For more information, see Audit HVAC Database (on page 324).

HDBAUDIT

Synchronize HVAC Database - Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. For more information, see Synchronize HVAC Database (on page 325).

HSYNC

HVAC

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: HVAC Shapes

Plant menu: HVAC > Shapes

Command line: HVAC

Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. Double-click an existing HVAC shape to modify the parameters.

Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing.

Select Shape - Lists the available shapes. Select a shape from the list to place it in the drawing. The Dimensions values update to match the selected shape.

Dimensions - Displays a dimensioned preview of the selected shape. Type dimension values for the drawing in the A through K boxes. All dimensions are in the current units set. Dimension boxes that are not required are disabled.

Options

Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the shape wall. This value is required when the Inside dimensions box is selected or the shape is Hollow or Open top.

Inside Dimensions - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the Thickness value added to all the necessary dimensions in the A through K boxes. If this option is cleared, the dimensions of the shape do not include the Thickness value.

Solid - Indicates that the software draws the shape as a solid. This is the default setting.

Hollow - Indicates that the software draws the shape as hollow.

Open top - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the top open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes.

Open bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes.

Creating a large number of HVAC shapes with the Hollow or Open top options in a single drawing can significantly increase the drawing size.

Details

Long annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape.

Part number - Specifies the part number for the shape.

Tag - Specifies the tag description for the shape.




There is no automatic method for creating long annotation, part number, tag, or weight.


Select lines - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.


Controls parameters for modifying HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing.

Select Shape - Lists the available shapes. Select a shape from the list to place it in the drawing. The Dimensions values update to match the selected shape.


Options








Details








Add an HVAC shape to the drawing (on page 308)

Modify an HVAC shape (on page 308)



Add an HVAC shape to the drawing

1. Click HVAC Shapes . Alternatively, type HVAC on the command line, and press ENTER.

The Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape dialog box displays.

2. Select the shape to place from the Select Shape list.

The preview and dimensions for that shape display in the Dimensions boxes.

3. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements.


5. Select the first point for the shape.

6. Select the end point for the shape.


Modify an HVAC shape 1. Double-click an HVAC shape in the drawing.

The Component Edit dialog box displays the parameters associated with the shape.

2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC (on page 306).

3. Click Apply.

The software changes the parameters of the shape.

HVAC Shapes Catalog

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes Catalog

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: HVAC Shapes Catalog

Command line: HVACC

Places HVAC shapes and cable tray shapes that are defined in a data file library. Double-click an existing HVAC shape to modify the parameters.

Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape Dialog Box

Select Data File - Specifies the data file that contains the components to place. The list contains all the data files located in the folder defined by the HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 35) startup variable. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.

Select Type - Specifies the shape to place. The list contains the folders defined by the HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 35) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.INI file specifying the shape type in that folder (Square Straight, Oval Straight, and so forth).














Part Name - Specifies the part name for the shape.


Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the MATERIAL= value in the data file header.




Area - Specifies the area of the shape.

Manual - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the value from the catalog.





Place an HVAC shape from the catalog (on page 310)

Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog (on page 310)



Place an HVAC shape from the catalog

1. Click HVAC Shapes Catalog . Alternatively, type HVACC on the command line, and press ENTER.

The Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape dialog box displays.

2. Select the data file to use from the Select Data file list.

The software populates the Select Type list with the available types.

3. Select the type of shape to use from the Select Type list.

The software populates the Select Member list with the available members.

4. Select the member to use from the Select Member list.

The preview and dimensions for that shape display in the Dimensions boxes.

5. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC Shapes Catalog (on page 308).





Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog 1. Double-click an HVAC shape in the drawing.


2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC Shapes Catalog (on page 308).

3. Click Apply.


User Shape CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > User Shape

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: User Shape

Command line: HUSER

Places a component using a custom user-defined shape. You select the component to draw based on an existing user-shape DWG file. The extrusion direction and distance is based on points picked or a line selected in the drawing. You can edit the roll angle along with the standard annotations.

For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.INI must be in the same folder as the user shape drawing files. The Type.INI file must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The folder (...\CADWorx\Plant\\HVAC\) contains the user shape drawing files.



Shown below are the parameters stored in a user-created .DWG file that can be used to create a user shape. The user shape profile must be a closed polyline or an AutoCAD Region entity.

After you select the shape from the dialog box, you can pick points or select a line to determine the extrusion length.

The default insert location for the user shape is 0,0,0. To specify a different insert location, add an AutoCAD POINT entity to the profile .DWG to locate the insert point.

User Shapes Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing user-defined shapes in the drawing.














Controls parameters for modifying user-defined shapes in the drawing.









Manual Update - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the value from the drawing.




Place a user-defined HVAC shape (on page 313)

Modify a user-defined HVAC shape (on page 313)



Place a user-defined HVAC shape

1. Click User Shape . Alternatively, type HUSER on the command line, and press ENTER.

The HVAC User Shapes dialog box displays.

2. Select the folder that contains the Type.INI data file to use from the Select Directory list.

The software populates the Select Member list with the available shapes.

3. Select the shape to use from the Select Member list.

The preview and details for that shape display in the Details boxes.

4. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see User Shape (on page 310).





Modify a user-defined HVAC shape 1. Double-click an HVAC shape in the drawing.


2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see User Shape (on page 310).

3. Click Apply.


Generic Attach

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Generic Attach

Command line: HGENERIC



To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.

Generic Attach (Create) Dialog Box

Controls parameters for attaching information to generic AutoCAD objects.











Generic Attach (Edit) Dialog Box

Controls parameters for modifying information on generic AutoCAD objects.










Place a generic attachment in the drawing (on page 314)

Modify a generic attachment (on page 314)

Place a generic attachment in the drawing

1. Click Generic Attach . Alternatively, type HGENERIC on the command line, and press ENTER.

The Generic Attach (Create) dialog box displays.

2. Set up the attachment parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 313).

3. Click Attach.

4. Select the non CADWorx object to which to attach the information.

Modify a generic attachment 1. Double-click a generic attachment in the drawing.

The Generic Attach (Edit) dialog box displays the parameters associated with the attachment.

2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 313).

3. Click Apply.

The software changes the parameters of the attachment.

Edit

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Edit

Command line: HCEDIT

Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. This command displays the same dialog box that was used to place the shape. You cannot change the object shape using this command. For more information, see HVAC (on page 306).



GC Edit

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > GC Edit

Command line: HGCEDIT

Edits global HVAC component data.

HVAC Global CEdit Dialog Box

Controls parameters for editing global HVAC component data.


Alter solid - Specifies whether the way the components are drawn can be changed.




Open Bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot use this option with oval shapes.







Edit HVAC components globally

1. Click GCEdit . Alternatively, type HGCEDIT on the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the objects to edit, and press ENTER.

The HVAC Global CEdit dialog box displays.

3. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see GC Edit (on page 315).

4. Click OK.

The software applies the parameters to the selected components.

HVAC BOM Setup

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Setup

HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Setup

Command line: HBOMSETUP



Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. Using this dialog box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user-specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of different entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.

Table Setup Tab


BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a HVAC component that you can include in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.


Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists.




Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of the columns. Use Sort Order Setup tab to define the sort order.



Sort Order Setup Tab


BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a HVAC component that you can include in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.


Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM Columns Selected lists.




Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of the columns. Use Sort Order Setup tab to define the sort order.











1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Setup . Alternatively, type HBOMSETUP in the command line, and press ENTER.

The HVAC Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.

2. To add a property to the BOM, select the property in the BOM Columns Available list, and then click Add.


3. To remove a property from the BOM, select the property in the BOM Columns Selected list, and then click Remove.

4. Click OK.






4. Click OK.







5. Click OK.

Change the BOM sorting and accumulation



2. Select the Sort Order Setup tab.



3. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list.

4. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM.

5. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how information in that column is sorted. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Descending is large number to smaller (100 to 1) and Z to A.

6. Click OK.

Cut HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Cut

HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Cut

Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Cut

Command line: HBOMCUT

Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each HVAC component with a length and a tag.













1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Cut . Alternatively, type HBOMCUT in the command line, and press ENTER.


3. Type the placement angle for the tag, and press ENTER.


5. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.



1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Cut . Alternatively, type HBOMCUT in the command line, and press ENTER.






Total HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Total

HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Total

Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Total

Command line: HBOMTOTAL

Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of HVAC components in each size. Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column.













1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Total . Alternatively, type HBOMTOTAL in the command line, and press ENTER.







1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Total . Alternatively, type HBOMTOTAL in the command line, and press ENTER.








Single HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Single

HVAC Draw/ BOM / DB toolbar: Single

Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Single

Command line: HBOMSINGLE

Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object having its own line in the schedule.













1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Single . Alternatively, type HBOMSINGLE in the command line, and press ENTER.







1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Single . Alternatively, type HBOMSINGLE in the command line, and press ENTER.






Data Remove

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Data Remove

Command line: HCDATAREMOVE

Removes CADWorx data from components.

Remove CADWorx data from components

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Data Remove . Alternatively, type HDATAREMOVE in the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the objects from which to remove the CADWorx data, and press ENTER.

A dialog box displays asking if you are sure that you want to remove the data.

3. Click Yes.

The software removes the CADWorx data from the selected components.

Layer Change

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Layer Change

Command line: HLAYERCHANGE

Changes the solid and centerline layers associated with components.



Change the layers associated with HVAC components

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Layer Change . Alternatively, type HLAYERCHANGE in the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the objects to change, and press ENTER.

3. If you want to change the solid layer, type Y in the command line, or select Yes from the popup menu.

The Please select Layer dialog box displays.

4. Select the layer with which to associate the solid part of the component, and click OK.

5. If you want to change the centerline layer, type Y in the command line, or select Yes from the popup menu.

The Please select Layer dialog box displays.

6. Select the layer with which to associate the centerline of the component, and click OK.

The software changes the layers.

Export HVAC

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Export

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Export

Command line: HDBFGEN

Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.

Select Database Type Dialog Box

Export CADWorx HVAC data

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Export . Alternatively, type HDBFGEN in the command line, and press ENTER.

2. Select the HVAC components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.





or


6. Click OK.



Import HVAC

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Import

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Import

Command line: HDBFIN

Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This command is not available when you are using a live database.

Use the Export HVAC (on page 323) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file to import.

Import CADWorx HVAC data

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Import . Alternatively, type HDBFIN in the command line, and press ENTER.


2. Select the file to import.

3. Click Open.

The Select Drawings for Import dialog box displays.


5. Click OK.

Audit HVAC Database

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Audit

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Audit

Command line: HDBAUDIT

Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. Use this command whenever the drawing or the database has any problems. If a problem is found in the drawing, for example a component in the database is not present in the drawing, you have the option to delete this component in the database or to ignore it.

Audit the HVAC database

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Audit . Alternatively, type HDBAUDIT in the command line, and press ENTER.


2. Select the file to audit against the drawing.

3. Click Open.

Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database.





Synchronize HVAC Database

CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Synchronize

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize

Command line: HSYNC

Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the database. This command does not write new records to the database for new components that are in the model but are not in the database.

When a drawing has a live database attached, you can open the database and edit the SHORT_ANNOTATION, LONG_ANNOTATION, DESCRIPTION, PART_NUMBER, and MATERIAL fields in the HVAC table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect on the drawing.

Synchronize the HVAC database

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize . Alternatively, type HSYNC in the command line, and press ENTER.





S E C T I O N 2 1

In This Section Accessing and Docking the Toolbars ............................................ 327 Aliases and Command Names ...................................................... 328 Connecting to components ............................................................ 328 Compass ........................................................................................ 328 Plane versus Isometrics view modes ............................................ 328 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling .................................................. 329 Buttweld ......................................................................................... 329 Flanges .......................................................................................... 361 Flgd/BW Valves ............................................................................. 375 Lined .............................................................................................. 389 Fiberglass ...................................................................................... 394 Sanitary .......................................................................................... 412 Victaulic .......................................................................................... 447 Threaded/Socket ........................................................................... 450 Thrd/SW Valves ............................................................................. 481 Gaskets, Etc. ................................................................................. 495 Restraints ....................................................................................... 497 Misc ................................................................................................ 498 Operators ....................................................................................... 504 Line Numbers ................................................................................ 504 UCS ............................................................................................... 505 Steel ............................................................................................... 505 Settings .......................................................................................... 507 Palettes .......................................................................................... 509

Accessing and Docking the Toolbars Toolbars duplicate commands available on the CADWorx Plant I and CADWorx Plant II tabs. You may find it useful to open toolbars containing frequently-used commands when screen space for the tab is limited.

To open a Plant toolbar, click Plant > Toolbars, and select the needed toolbar. You can also open an alternate set of toolbars from View tab > Windows panel > Toolbars > PIPEALT, PIPEFLY, or PIPERIB.

To dock a toolbar, drag it to any edge of the window. Press CTRL to drag a toolbar without docking it. You can then drag a toolbar off of the window space.

The AutoCAD Toolbar command opens the Customize User Interface dialog box. You can choose any needed toolbars for AutoCAD or CADWorx Plant.

Toolbars

Toolbars


Aliases and Command Names Ribbon, toolbar, and menu commands have a command name that you can type in the command line.

A command alias is an abbreviation that you type at the command line instead of typing the entire command name. Command aliases created for Plant are delivered in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support\Flow_alt.pgp file.

You can change alias names but should avoid conflicts with aliases already defined in the .pgp file for AutoCAD.

Connecting to components In connecting to components, Piping Rules effect the behavior of prompts when set to No or Show Options. If selecting a component from a palette or toolbar, the selected component prompts you if unable to derive information from the surrounding components due to the piping rules. When the rules are set to Automatic, the process is simplified for connecting components to appropriate valued objects. For instance, when inserting a flange to a pipe, if both have the same size and specification you are not prompted and the flange inserts automatically. For more information, see Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) or all other Piping Rules (on page 46). Prompts depend on the settings you have chosen for the piping rules. Also, you may be prompted in certain situations based on the components of the model. Most of the components are built to work as smart objects. They connect using the previous information of the last point of a component. If you change sizes while working with a component, you are prompted accordingly. In addition, you may not receive prompts based on the actions of connection to components. Prompts depend on the actions you take, and some prompts appear only when not connecting to a previous component.

Compass Enables 360 degree navigation for placement of components. You can turn the compass on and off in Setup (on page 26). You are also provided with the option to change the color. When the compass is turned on the screen displays a circle around the components when they are pulled into the drawing space.

Plane versus Isometrics view modes When plotting components using Plane views, some prompts appear differently when working in 3D Solids then when plotting components in Isometric views. This is based on the directional limitations of those views. The prompts do not differ when you are working in 2D Double Line or 2D Single Line. All commands in the following sections are based off the isometrics view for all modes of modeling.

Toolbars


3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling The CADWorx option for working in 3D modeling and 2D modeling is set up in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. All commands on the toolbars work in both modes, however some commands are ideally designed for working in 3D mode versus working in 2D mode. The commands are grouped according to which commands are better suited for either 3D modeling or 2D modeling. You can use the commands as needed, but in 3D modeling some of the commands better suited for 2D have the same response as those better suited for 3D. For more information, see Setup (on page 26) and CADWorx Plant Setup Dialog Box.

Buttweld Plant menu: Toolbars > Buttweld

The commands on the Buttweld toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Pipe - Places a butt-welded pipe component. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333).

PIPW

Plan 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 LR Ell (on page 333).

90LR

Plan 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 SR Ell (on page 334).

90SR

Plan 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335).

45LR

Plan 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 Reducing Ell (on page 335).

90RD

Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Tee (on page 336).

TESW

Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee (on page 337).

TERW

Plan 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 LR Return (on page 337).

18LR

Plan 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 SR Return (on page 338).

18SR

Toolbars



Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer (on page 339).

CONC

Ecc Reducer - Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ecc Reducer (on page 339).

ECC

Cap - Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cap (on page 340).

CAPW

Plan Cross - Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Cross (on page 340).

CRSW

Plan Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Cross (on page 341).

CRRW

Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 341).

LATW

Miters - Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Miters (on page 342).

MPIP

Rolled Pipe - Places a free-form pipe component, such as a hose or flexible connection. For more information, see Rolled Pipe (on page 343).

SPIP

Adjustable Bend - Places an adjustable pipe bend. For more information, see Adjustable Bend (on page 344).

BENT

90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information, see 90 LR Ell (on page 345).

R90LR

90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information, see 90 SR Ell (on page 345).

R90SR

45 LR Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information, see 45 LR Ell (on page 346).

R45LR

Tee - Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information, see Tee (on page 346).

RTESW

Plan 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 11.25 Ell (on page 347).

11LR

Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page 348).

22LR

Plan Wye - Places a wye in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Wye (on page 348).

YB

Toolbars


The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.


Side 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 LR Ell (on page 349).

H90LR

Side 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 SR Ell (on page 350).

H90SR

Side 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 45 Ell (on page 350).

H45LR

Vert 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 45 Ell (on page 351).

V45LR

Side 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 Reducing Ell (on page 351).

H90RD

Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on page 352).

HTESW

Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page 353).

VTESW

Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Reducing Tee (on page 353).

HTERW

Vert Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Reducing Tee (on page 354).

VTERW

Side 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 180 LR Return (on page 354).

H18LR

Vert 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 LR Return (on page 355).

V18LR

Side 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 180 SR Return (on page 355).

H18SR

Vert 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 SR Return (on page 356).

V18SR

Toolbars



Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Cross (on page 356).

HCRSW

Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 357).

HCRRW

Vert Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with the main branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Reducing Cross (on page 357).

VCRRW

Side Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Side Lateral (on page 357).

HLATW

Vert Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Lateral (on page 358).

VLATW

Side 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 11.25 Ell (on page 358).

H11LR

Vert 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 11.25 Ell (on page 359).

V11LR

Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on page 359).

H22LR

Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page 360).

V22LR

Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Wye (on page 360).

HYB

Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Wye (on page 361).

VYB

Toolbars


Modeling in 3D These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D and 2D modeling.

Pipe

Buttweld toolbar: Pipe

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tubing

Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Pipe

Command line: PIPW

You can also now use PIPW1 for buttweld piping, PIPF1 for socket weld or threaded piping, and PIPFL1 for flanged piping, to draw singular pipe. PIPW starts the pipe router.

Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane.


Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.



Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis

Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis

Place a pipe

1. Click a pipe component command.

2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.

3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.

The pipe component is drawn.

Plan 90 LR Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell

Command line: 90LR

Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane.

last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.

Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.

otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.

Toolbars


Place a 90 degree plan elbow

1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command.

2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the selection.

3. Click in the direction of the corner.

4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.

The elbow component is drawn.

Plan 90 SR Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell

Command line: 90SR

Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane.











Toolbars


Plan 45 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 45 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Plan 45 Ell

Command line: 45LR

Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.





Place a plan elbow

1. Click a plan elbow command.

2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.




Plan 90 Reducing Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 Reducing Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 Reducing Ell

Command line: 90RD

Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end. For this component, this option switches to the reducing side.

Toolbars


Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow

1. Click a 90 degree reducing plan elbow component command.

2. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select otherEnd.





Plan Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Tee

Victaulic toolbar: Plan Tee

Command line: TESW

Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane.


Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.

Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.

Place a plan tee

1. Click a plan tee command.

2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.

3. Click in the direction of the main of the tee.

4. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee.

The tee component is drawn.

Toolbars


Plan Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Reducing Tee

Victaulic toolbar: Plan Reducing Tee

Command line: TERW

Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane.




Place a plan tee






Plan 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 180 LR Return

Command line: 18LR

Places a 180 degree long radius return in the X-Y plane.





Toolbars


Place a 180 degree plan return

1. Click a 180 degree plan return component command.


3. Click in the direction of the bend of the return.

4. Click in the direction of the end of the return.

The return component is drawn.

Plan 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 180 SR Return

Command line: 18SR

Places a 180 degree short radius return in the X-Y plane.





Place a 180 degree plan return

1. Click a 180 degree plan return component command.



4. Click in the direction of the end of the return.


Toolbars


Conc Reducer

Buttweld toolbar: Conc Reducer

Victaulic toolbar: Conc Reducer

Command line: CONC

Places a concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.


Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point.

Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.

If you are connecting to another component where the large end is the same size as the last component, press ENTER to attach to the last component drawn.

Place a concentric reducer

1. Click a concentric reducer component command.

2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe.

3. Click in the direction of the small end of the reducer.

The reducer component is drawn.

Ecc Reducer

Buttweld toolbar: Ecc Reducer

Victaulic toolbar: Ecc Reducer

Command line: ECC

Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.




Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction.

Place an eccentric reducer

1. Click an eccentric reducer component command.


or

Select Small end, and press ENTER.

3. Click in the direction of the other end of the reducer.

4. To place the flat side in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the flat side.

or

To place the flat side in the Z direction, select Up or Down.


Toolbars


Cap

Buttweld toolbar: Cap

Victaulic toolbar: Cap

Command line: CAPW

Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane.


Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.

Place a cap

1. Click a cap component command.

2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.

3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap.

The cap component is drawn.

Plan Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Cross

Victaulic toolbar: Plan Cross

Command line: CRSW

Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane.


Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.

Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.

Place a plan cross

1. Click a four-way straight cross command.


3. Click in the direction of the cross.

The cross component is drawn.

Toolbars


Plan Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Reducing Cross

Victaulic toolbar: Plan Reducing Cross

Command line: CRRW

Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane.


Branch - Places the reducing branch of cross tee at the start point.

Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the cross.

Place a plan reducing cross

1. Click a four-way plan reducing cross command.




Plan Lateral

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Lateral

Victaulic toolbar: Plan Lateral

Command line: LATW

Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.


Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main.

Branch - Places the branch of the lateral at the start point.


Toolbars


Place a plan lateral

1. Click a plan lateral command.


3. Click in the direction of the main of the lateral.

4. Click in the direction of the branch of the lateral.

The lateral component is drawn.

Miters

Buttweld toolbar: Miters

Command line: MPIP

Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane. The pipe is placed on a 2D polyline created with Polyline . A miter is placed on the pipe at each vertex of the polyline. For more information, see PLINE in AutoCAD Help.

This command can also be used to create pipe with bends. For more information, see CHAMFER in AutoCAD Help.

Mitered pipe cannot be placed on a 3D polyline created with 3D Polyline . For more information, see 3DPOLY in AutoCAD Help.

Toolbars


Place a mitered pipe

1. On the Draw panel of the Home tab, click Polyline .

2. Draw the needed polyline.

3. Click Miters .

4. Select the polyline.

The mitered pipe component is drawn.

Rolled Pipe

Buttweld toolbar: Rolled Pipe

Command line: SPIP

Places a free-form pipe component, such as a hose or flexible connection. The pipe is placed on a 2D polyline created with Polyline and edited with the Fit or Spline options of Edit Polyline . For more information, see PLINE and PEDIT in AutoCAD Help.

Fit Example

Spline Example

Rolled pipe cannot be placed on a 3D polyline created with 3D Polyline . For more information, see 3DPOLY in AutoCAD Help.

Toolbars


Place a rolled pipe

1. On the Draw panel of the Home tab, click Polyline .

2. Draw the needed polyline.

3. On the Modify panel, click Edit Polyline .


5. Select Fit or Spline.

6. Click Rolled Pipe .



Adjustable Bend

Buttweld toolbar: Adjustable Bend

Command line: BENT

Places a pipe bend based on the selected method: Enter radius, Trimmed elbow, or Select arc.

Enter radius - Places a pipe bend by typing a radius, and then selecting the bend center, start, and end points in a counterclockwise direction. This is the most common type of adjustable bend.

Degree - Defines the total angle of the bend from the start point. For example, if the start point is at 91°, and the value for Degree is 180°, the end point is at 271° and the total angle of the bend is 180°.

Angle - Defines the angle of the bend as the value minus the angle defined by the start point from the positive X-axis. For example, if the start point is at 91°, and the value for Angle is 180°, the end point is at 180° and the angle of the bend is 79°.

Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.

Trimmed elbow - Places an elbow by selecting the center of the bend arc, the start point, and the end point.

Short radius - Defines a short radius elbow according to the current specification.

Long radius - Defines a long radius elbow according to the current specification.

Select arc - Places a pipe bend on an arc created with an arc command. For more information, see Draw Arcs in AutoCAD Help.

Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.

Toolbars


90 LR Ell

Buttweld toolbar: 90 LR Ell

Command line: R90LR

Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.





Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.

Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.

This command is only available for welded fittings.

The elbow centerline is out-of-plane. You must use an AutoCAD UCS command to obtain the proper plane before modifying the elbow. For more information, see UCS in AutoCAD Help.

Place a 90 degree rolled elbow

1. Click a 90 degree rolled elbow component command.





90 SR Ell

Buttweld toolbar: 90 SR Ell

Command line: R90SR

Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.









Toolbars



1. Click a 90 degree rolled elbow component command.





45 LR Ell

Buttweld toolbar: 45 LR Ell

Command line: R45LR

Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.











1. Click 45 LR Ell .





Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Tee

Command line: RTESW

Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.


Up - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.

Down - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.


Toolbars


Place a rolled tee

1. Click a rolled tee command.




5. Select Up or Down.


Plan 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 11.25 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Plan 11.25 Ell

Command line: 11LR

Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.




Place a plan elbow






Toolbars


Plan 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 22.5 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Plan 22.5 Ell

Command line: 22LR

Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.



Place a plan elbow






Plan Wye

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Wye

Victaulic toolbar: Plan Wye

Command line: YB

Places a wye in the X-Y plane.


Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the wye.

Branch - Places the branch of the component at the start point.


Toolbars


Place a plan wye

1. Click a plan wye command.


3. Click in the direction of the wye.

The wye component is drawn.

Modeling in 2D Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only in a 2D drawing.

Side 90 LR Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell

Command line: H90LR

Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane.


Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.

Place a side or vertical elbow

1. Click a side or vertical elbow component command.





Toolbars


Side 90 SR Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell

Command line: H90SR

Places a 90 degree short radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane.










Side 45 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 45 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Side 45 Ell

Command line: H45LR

Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.










Toolbars


Vert 45 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 45 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Vert 45 Ell

Command line: V45LR

Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.










Side 90 Reducing Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 Reducing Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 Reducing Ell

Command line: H90RD

Places a 90 degree reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.



Small - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.



Toolbars


Place a side reducing elbow

1. Click a side reducing plan elbow component command.

2. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select Small.





Side Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Side Tee

Victaulic toolbar: Side Tee

Command line: HTESW

Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.



Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.

Place a side tee

1. Click a side tee component command.





Toolbars


Vert Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Tee

Victaulic toolbar: Vert Tee

Command line: VTESW

Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default.



Place a vertical tee

1. Click a vertical tee component command.




Side Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Side Reducing Tee

Victaulic toolbar: Side Reducing Tee

Command line: HTERW

Places a straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.





Place a side tee






Toolbars


Vert Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Reducing Tee

Victaulic toolbar: Vert Reducing Tee

Command line: VTERW

Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default.








Side 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Side 180 LR Return

Command line: H18LR

Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.


Middle - Places the return at the center point of the arc of the return.

Up - Places the return bend in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the return bend in the negative Z direction.

Place a 180 degree side return

1. Click a 180 degree side return component command.





Toolbars


Vert 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 180 LR Return

Command line: V18LR

Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.



Up - Places the return direction in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the return direction in the negative Z direction.

Place a 180 degree vertical return

1. Click a 180 degree vertical return component command.





Side 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Side 180 SR Return

Command line: H18SR

Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.



Up - Places the return bend in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the return bend in the negative Z direction.

Place a 180 degree side return

1. Click a 180 degree side return component command.





Toolbars


Vert 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 180 SR Return

Command line: V18SR

Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.



Up - Places the return direction in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the return direction in the negative Z direction.

Place a 180 degree vertical return

1. Click a 180 degree vertical return component command.





Side Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Side Cross

Victaulic toolbar: Side Cross

Command line: HCRSW

Places a four-way straight cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.



Place a side cross

1. Click a four-way straight side cross command.




Toolbars


Side Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Side Reducing Cross

Victaulic toolbar: Side Reducing Cross

Command line: HCRRW

Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane.



Place a side reducing cross

1. Click a four-way side reducing cross command.




Vert Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Reducing Cross

Victaulic toolbar: Vert Reducing Cross

Command line: VCRRW

Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the cross is placed at the start point by default.


Branch - Places the reducing branch of the cross tee at the start point.

Place a vertical reducing cross

1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command.




Side Lateral

Buttweld toolbar: Side Lateral

Victaulic toolbar: Side Lateral

Command line: HLATW

Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.



Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.

Toolbars


Place a side lateral

1. Click a side lateral component command.





Vert Lateral

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Lateral

Victaulic toolbar: Vert Lateral

Command line: VLATW

Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default.




Place a vertical lateral

1. Click a vertical lateral component command.





Side 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 11.25 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Side 11.25 Ell

Command line: H11LR

Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.




Toolbars








Vert 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 11.25 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Vert 11.25 Ell

Command line: V11LR

Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.










Side 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 22.5 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Side 22.5 Ell

Command line: H22LR

Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.




Toolbars








Vert 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 22.5 Ell

Victaulic toolbar: Vert 22.5 Ell

Command line: V22LR

Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.










Side Wye

Buttweld toolbar: Side Wye

Victaulic toolbar: Side Wye

Command line: HYB

Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.


Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.

Toolbars


Place a side wye

1. Click a side wye command.


3. Click in the direction of the wye main.


Vert Wye

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Wye

Victaulic toolbar: Vert Wye

Command line: VYB

Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.



Place a vertical wye

1. Click a vertical wye command.


3. Click in the direction of the wye branches.


Flanges Plant menu: Toolbars > Flanges


Weld Neck - Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Weld Neck Flange (on page 362).

FLGW

Slip On - Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Slip-On Flange (on page 364).

FLGO

Blind - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 365).

FLGB

Socket Weld - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page 366).

FLGS

Threaded - Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded Flange (on page 367).

FLGT

Lap Joint - Places a lapped-joint flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lap Joint Flange (on page 369).

FLGL

Stub End - Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Stub End (on page 369).

STB

Toolbars



Long Weld Neck - Places a long weld neck component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Long Weld Neck (on page 370).

LWN

Reducing Slip On - Places a reducing slip on flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Slip-on Flange (on page 370).

FLRO

Reducing Threaded - Places a reducing threaded flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Threaded Flange (on page 372).

FLRT

Reducing Weld Neck - Places a reducing weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Weld Neck Flange (on page 373).

FLRW

Weld Neck Flange

Flanges toolbar: Weld Neck

Command line: FLGW

Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).

last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created component.

Buttweld end - Starts the flange at the buttweld end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.

Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as a pipe) would logically take the butt-welded end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.


Place a flange on a pipe (on page 363)

Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 363)

Toolbars


Place a flange on a pipe

1. Place a pipe component.

Place a pipe (on page 333)

2. Click a flange component command.

3. Click to select a starting point at an end of the pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point.

The flange component is drawn.

Flanges do not have a bolt or gasket automatically added unless the proper piping rule is set. You must also have a set of flanges for this to occur. For more information, see Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47), Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47), or Auto Gasket (on page 183).

.

For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 328).

Place a flange that mates with another flange

1. Place a pipe and a flange.



3. Click to select a starting point at the end of the existing flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point.

The flange component is drawn with the face mating to the face of the existing flange.

Flanges do not have a bolt or gasket automatically added unless the proper piping rule is set. For more information, see Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47), or Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 47).


Toolbars


Slip-on Flange

Flanges toolbar: Slip On

Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Flange

Command line: FLGO

Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. If Auto Gasket is turned on, then a gasket is also placed on the flange. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183).


Slip on end - Starts the flange at the slip-on end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.

Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as a pipe) would logically take the slip-on end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.











.


Toolbars










Blind Flange

Flanges toolbar: Blind

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Blind Flange

Lined toolbar: Lined Blind Flange

Command line: FLGB

Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane.


Place a flange


2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and skip step 3.

If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3.

3. Click to select the direction of the flange.


Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) and Default Flange Insertion Type.

Toolbars


Socket Type Flange

Flanges toolbar: Socket Weld

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flange

Command line: FLGS

Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).


Socket end - Starts the flange at the Socket end.

Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.











.


Toolbars










Threaded Flange

Flanges toolbar: Threaded

Command line: FLGT

Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).


Thread end - Starts the flange at the threaded end.

Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.




Toolbars









.










Toolbars


Lap Joint Flange

Flanges toolbar: Lap Joint

Command line: FLGL

Places a lapped-joint flange in the X-Y plane.


Place a flange


2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and skip step 3.

If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3.

3. Click to select the direction of the flange.


Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 48) and Default Flange Insertion Type.

Stub End

Flanges toolbar: Stub End

Command line: STB

Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).

Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the current specification is used.

Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end.

Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.

Place a stub or weld neck

1. Click a stub or weld neck component command.

2. If needed, select Length and type a length for the component.

3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point.

The component is drawn.

Toolbars


Long Weld Neck

Flanges toolbar: Long Weld Neck

Command line: LWN

Places a long weld neck component in the X-Y plane.

Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the current specification is used.

Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end.

Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.

Place a stub or weld neck

1. Click a stub or weld neck component command.

2. If needed, select Length and type a length for the component.

3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point.


Reducing Slip-on Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Slip On

Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Flange

Command line: FLRO

Places a reducing slip-on flange in the X-Y plane.You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).


Reducing end - Starts the flange at the reducing end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.

Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed component (such as a pipe) would logically take the reducing end as the start point for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.




Toolbars









.










Toolbars


Reducing Threaded Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Threaded

Command line: FLRT

Places a reducing threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).














.


Toolbars










Reducing Weld Neck Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Weld Neck

Command line: FLRW

Places a reducing weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).







Toolbars









.










Toolbars


Flgd/BW Valves Plant menu: Toolbars > Flgd/BW Valves

The commands on the Flgd/BW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Gate - Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Gate Valve (on page 376).

GATF

Ball - Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ball Valve (on page 377)

BALF

Globe - Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Globe Valve (on page 378).

GLBF

Plug - Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plug Valve (on page 378).

PLUF

Check - Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Check Valve (on page 379).

CHKF

Butterfly - Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Butterfly Valve (on page 380).

BFYF

Diaphragm - Places a diaphragm valve and flange gasket component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Diaphragm Valve (on page 380).

DIAF

Rotary - Places a rotary valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Rotary Valve (on page 381).

ROTF

Dual Check - Places a dual check valve and flange gasket components in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Dual Check Valve (on page 382).

DCHF

Control - Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Control Valve (on page 382).

CNTF

3 Way Plan - Places a three-way valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see 3-Way Plan Valve (on page 383).

3VF

4 Way Plan - Places a four-way valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see 4-Way Plan Valve (on page 384).

4VF

Relief Side - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Relief Side Valve (on page 384).

RELF

Angle Top - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Angle Top Valve (on page 385).

ANGF

Toolbars




3 Way Side - Places a three-way valve component with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see 3-Way Side Valve (on page 386)

H3VF

3 Way Vertical - Places a three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see 3-Way Vertical Valve (on page 386).

V3VF

4 Way Side - Places a four-way valve component with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. For. more information, see 4-Way Side Valve (on page 387)

H4VF

Relief Top - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Relief Top Valve (on page 387)

HRELF

Pressure Top - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Pressure Top Valve (on page 388).

VRELF

Angle Side - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Angle Side Valve (on page 388).

HANGF


Gate Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Gate

Command line: GATF

Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).

last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created component.

Middle - Places the valve at its center.

Toolbars


Place a valve

1. Click a valve component command.

2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.

Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.

The valve component is drawn.


Ball Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Ball

Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Ball Valve

Command line: BALF

Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).



Place a valve






Toolbars


Globe Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Globe

Command line: GLBF

Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).



Place a valve






Plug Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Plug

Victaulic toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve

Command line: PLUF

Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).


Center - Places the valve at its center.

Toolbars


Place a valve






Check Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Check

Sanitary toolbar: Victaulic Check Valve

Command line: CHKF

Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).




Place a valve






Toolbars


Butterfly Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Butterfly

Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Butterfly Valve

Command line: BFYF

Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).



Place a valve






Diaphragm Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Diaphragm

Command line: DIAF

Places a diaphragm valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).



Toolbars


Place a valve






Rotary Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Rotary

Command line: ROTF

Places a rotary component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).



Place a valve






Toolbars


Dual Check Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Dual Check

Command line: DCHF

Places a dual check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).




Place a valve






Control Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Control

Command line: CNTF

Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).


Length - Specifies the length of the valve.

Center - Places the valve at its center.

Toolbars


Place a valve






3-Way Plan Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Plan

Command line: 3VF

Places a three-way valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).

last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created component.

Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.

Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point.

Place a 3-way plan valve

1. Click a three-way valve command.

2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point and skip the next step.

3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. This prompt only appears when you are not connecting to a component in the model.

4. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve.


Toolbars


4-Way Plan Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 4 Way Plan

Command line: 4VF

Places a four-way valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).




1. Click a four-way plan valve command.

2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point.

3. Click in the direction of the valve.


Relief Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Relief Side

Command line: RELF

Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve in the X-Y plane.


Length - Defines the length of the pressure side and the relief side of the valve.

Pressure - Places the pressure end of the valve at the start point.


Relief - Places the relief end of the valve at the start point.

Toolbars


Place an angle valve

1. Click an angle or relief valve component command.



4. Click in the direction of the branch or relief end of the valve.


Angle Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Angle Top

Command line: ANGF

Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).










Toolbars



3-Way Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Side

Command line: H3VF

Places a three-way valve component with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).




Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.

Place a 3-way side valve

1. Click a three-way side valve component command.


3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve.



3-Way Vertical Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Vertical

Command line: V3VF

Places a three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).



Toolbars


Place a 3-way vertical valve

1. Click a three-way vertical valve component command.




4-Way Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 4 Way Side

Command line: H4VF

Places a four-way valve component with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).




1. Click a four-way side valve command.




Relief Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Relief Top

Command line: HRELF

Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane.



Relief - Places the relief end at the start point.




Toolbars


Place an angle side valve

1. Click an angle or relief side valve component command.





Pressure Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Pressure Top

Command line: VRELF

Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane.













Angle Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Angle Side

Command line: HANGF

Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 183). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47).





Toolbars








Lined Plant menu: Toolbars > Lined

The commands on the Lined toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Lined Pipe - Places a flanged and lined pipe component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Pipe (on page 391).

PIPFL

Lined 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged and lined elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).

90FL

Lined 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).

45FL

Lined Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page 404).

TEFL

Lined Reducing Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Plan (on page 421).

TERE

Lined Concentric - Places a flanged and lined concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Concentric Reducer (on page 405).

CNFL

Lined Eccentric - Places a flanged and lined eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Eccentric Reducer (on page 392).

ECFL

Lined Wye Plan - Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Wye Plan (on page 392).

YFL

Lined Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on page 422).

CRSE

Toolbars



Lined Reducing Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and lined reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Plan (on page 423).

CRRE

Lined Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Plan (on page 423).

LATE

Lined Spacer - Places a lined spacer in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on page 501).

BLD

Lined Reducing Flange - Places a lined reducing flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Slip-on Flange (on page 370).

FLRO

Lined Blind Flange - Places a lined blind flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 365).

FLGB



Lined 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree flanged and lined elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).

H90FL

Lined 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).

H45FL

Lined 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 411).

V45FL

Lined Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Side (on page 411).

HTEFL

Lined Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Vertical (on page 412).

VTEFL

Lined Reducing Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Side (on page 438)

HTERE

Lined Reducing Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Vertical (on page 438).

VTERE

Lined Wye Side - Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Wye Side (on page 393).

HYFL

Toolbars



Lined Wye Vert - Places a flanged and lined wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane For more information, see Lined Wye Vert (on page 393).

VYFL

Lined Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Side (on page 439).

HCRSE

Lined Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and lined reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side (on page 439).

HCRRE

Lined Reducing Cross Vert - Places a four-way flanged and lined reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Vertical (on page 440).

VCRRE

Lined Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Lateral Side (on page 440).

HLATE

Lined Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Vertical (on page 440).

VLATE

The specification for lined pipe components is delivered in the Lined.spc file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.

The FLGS column in the flanged component data files controls placement of flanges. A value of 1 places a flange on the first end of the component. 2 places a flange on the second end. 3 places flanges on both ends. 4 places a flange on the branch end of a tee or wye. Other combinations of flanges are based on adding these values. For example, if the flanges are needed on all ends of a tee, use 1 + 2 + 4 = 7.


Lined Pipe

Lined toolbar: Lined Pipe

Command line: PIPFL

Places a flanged and lined pipe component in the X-Y plane.


Flanged end - Places the flanged end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the pipe has a flange on one end.

Plain end - Places the plain end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the pipe has a flange on one end.

Toolbars


Length - Defines the length of the pipe. If no length is defined, the length is based on the start and end points.

Place a pipe





Lined Eccentric Reducer

Lined toolbar: Lined Eccentric

Command line: ECFL

Places a flanged and lined eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.



This command reverses the main and reduction sizes automatically after execution.




or




or



Lined Wye Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Plan

Command line: YFL

Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y plane.



Branch - Places the branch of the wye at the start point.

otherEnd - Places the component at the other end of the start point.

Toolbars


Place a plan wye






Lined Wye Side

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Side

Command line: HYFL

Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.



Place a side wye





Lined Wye Vert

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Vert

Command line: VYFL

Places a flanged and lined wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.



Toolbars







Fiberglass Plant menu: Toolbars > Fiberglass

The commands on the Fiberglass toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Pipe - Places a fiberglass pipe component. For more information, see Fiberglass Pipe (on page 397).

PIPF

FRP Bell 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow (on page 397).

90S

FRP Bell 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 398).

45S

FRP Bell Tee Plan - Places a straight threaded/socket tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan (on page 399).

TESS

FRP Bell Conc w/Hub - Places a threaded/socket concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer (on page 399).

SWGCS

FRP Bell Ecc w/Hub - Places an eccentric threaded/socket reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer (on page 400).

SWGES

FRP Bell Cross Plan - Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan (on page 400).

CRSS

FRP Bell Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan (on page 401).

LATS

FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan - Places a coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Coupling (on page 401).

CPS

Toolbars



FRP Cap - Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Cap (on page 402).

CAPS

FRP Bush/Insert - Places a bushing in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing (on page 402).

BUSS

Saddle in Plan - Places a soc-o-let in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Saddle in Plan (on page 402).

SOL

FRP Blind Flange - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 365).

FLGB

FRP Flange - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page 366).

FLGS

FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).

90FL

FRP Flanged 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 403).

45FL

FRP Flanged Tee Plan - Places a flanged tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page 404).

TEFL

FRP Flanged Concentric - Places a flanged concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Concentric Reducer (on page 405).

CNFL



FRP Bell 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow (on page 405).

H90S

FRP Bell 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side (on page 406).

H45S

FRP Bell 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 406).

V45S

FRP Bell Tee Side - Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side (on page 407).

HTESS

Toolbars



FRP Bell Tee Vert - Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert (on page 407).

VTESS

FRP Bell Cross Side - Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side (on page 408)

HCRSS

FRP Bell Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral Side (on page 408).

HLATS

FRP Bell Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert (on page 408).

VLATS

FRP Bell Full Clpg End - Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Full Coupling End (on page 409).

VCPS

Saddle in Vertical - Places a soc-o-let with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Saddle in Vertical (on page 409).

VSOL

FRP Flanged 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).

H90FL

FRP Flanged 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side (on page 410).

H45FL

FRP Flanged 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 411).

V45FL

FRP Flanged Tee Side - Places a flanged tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Side (on page 411).

HTEFL

FRP Flanged Tee Vert - Places a flanged tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Vertical (on page 412).

VTEFL

You must set the FRP.SPC default specification that is supplied with CADWorx for the icons to work on the toolbar.

Toolbars



Fiberglass Pipe

Fiberglass toolbar: Pipe

Command line: PIPF


Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.

Threaded

Bevel

Plain


Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.



Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

Place a fiberglass pipe


2. Click to select a starting point, or type the required coordinates in the command line, and press ENTER.

3. Click to select an ending point, or type the required coordinates in the command line, and press ENTER.

4. If prompted for an end type, type the required end type on the command line, and press ENTER.


Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 90 Ell Plan

Command line: 90S

Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane.


Start - Places the start point of the component at the default.



Toolbars








Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Plan

Command line: 45S






Place a plan elbow






Toolbars


Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Plan

Command line: TESS

Places a straight threaded/socket tee in the X-Y plane.




Place a plan tee






Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Conc w/Hub

Command line: SWGCS

Places a threaded/socket concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.








Toolbars


Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Ecc w/Hub

Command line: SWGES

Places an eccentric threaded/socket reducer component in the X-Y plane.








or




or



Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Cross Plan

Command line: CRSS

Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane.




Place a plan cross





Toolbars


Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Plan

Command line: LATS

Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane.












Coupling

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan

Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Coupling

Command line: CPS

Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.

Place a coupling

1. Click a coupling command.


3. Click in the direction of the coupling.

The coupling component is drawn.

Toolbars


Threaded/Socket Cap

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Cap

Command line: CAPS

Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane.



Place a cap





Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bush/Insert

Command line: BUSS

Places a bushing in the X-Y plane.


Large end - Places the large end at the start point of the component.

Small end - Places the small end at the start point of the component.

Place a bushing

1. Click a bushing component command.


3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing.

The bushing component is drawn.

Saddle in Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: Saddle in Plan

Command line: SOL

Places a sock-o-let in the X-Y plane.


Toolbars


Place a plan sock-o-let

1. Click a sock-o-let component command.


3. Click to select the direction of the sock-o-let.

The sock-o-let component is drawn.

Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined 90 Ell Plan

Command line: 90FL

Places a 90 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.







Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Plan

Command line: 45FL

Places a 45 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane.




Toolbars


Place a plan elbow






Flanged Tee Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Plan

Victaulic toolbar: Plan Strainer

Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Plan

Command line: TEFL

Places a flanged tee or strainer in the X-Y plane.


Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the component.

Branch - places the start point at the branch of the component.

Place a plan flanged tee

1. Click a plan flanged tee command.





Toolbars


Flanged Concentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Concentric

Lined toolbar: Lined Concentric

Command line: CNFL

Places a flanged concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.











Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 90 Ell Side

Command line: H90S

Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane.










Toolbars


Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Side

Command line: H45S

Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.










Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Vert

Command line: V45S











Toolbars


Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Side

Command line: HTESS

Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.





Place a side tee






Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Vert

Command line: VTESS

Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default.








Toolbars


Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Cross Side

Command line: HCRSS

Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.



Place a side cross





Threaded/Socket Lateral Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Side

Command line: HLATS

Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.











Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Vert

Command line: VLATS

Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default.




Toolbars








Full Coupling End

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg End

Command line: VCPS

Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.


Up - Places the coupling in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the coupling in the negative Z direction.

Place a coupling end

1. Click a coupling end component command.


3. Click to select the direction of the top of the coupling.


Saddle in Vertical

Fiberglass toolbar: Saddle in Vertical

Command line: VSOL

Places a soc-o-let with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default.


Up - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the negative Z direction.

Place a vertical soc-o-let

1. Click a vertical soc-o-let component command.




The soc-o-let component is drawn.

Toolbars


Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 90 Ell Side

Lined toolbar: Lined 90 Ell Side

Command line: H90FL

Places a 90 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane.










Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Side

Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Side

Command line: H45FL

Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.










Toolbars


Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Vert

Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Vert

Command line: V45FL

Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.










Flanged Tee Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Side

Victaulic toolbar: Side Strainer

Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Side

Command line: HTEFL

Places a flanged tee or strainer with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.


Middle - Places the strainer at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.



Toolbars


Place a side flanged tee

1. Click a side flanged tee component command.





Flanged Tee Vertical

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Vert

Victaulic toolbar: Vert Strainer

Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Vert

Command line: VTEFL

Places a flanged tee or strainer with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the strainer is placed at the start point by default.



Place a vertical strainer

1. Click a vertical flanged tee component command.




Sanitary Plant menu: Toolbars > Sanitary

The commands on the Sanitary toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Sanitary Tubing - Places a butt-welded sanitary tubing component. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333).

PIPW

Sanitary 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90 Ell Plan (on page 419).

90EN

Toolbars



Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan (on page 420).

90RE

Sanitary 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 45 Ell Plan (on page 420).

45EN

Sanitary Tee Plan - Places a straight sanitary tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Tee Plan (on page 421).

TESE

Sanitary Reducing Tee Plan - Places a sanitary reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Plan (on page 421).

TERE

Sanitary Cross Plan - Places a four-way sanitary cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on page 422).

CRSE

Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan - Places a four-way sanitary reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Plan (on page 423).

CRRE

Sanitary Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Plan (on page 423).

LATE

Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan (on page 424).

LARE

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan - Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan (on page 424).

22EN

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan (on page 425).

11EN

Sanitary U-Bend Plan - Places a 180 degree u-bend in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Plan (on page 426).

UBEN

Sanitary Concentric - Places a sanitary concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Concentric (on page 426).

CONCE

Sanitary Eccentric - Places a sanitary eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Eccentric (on page 427).

ECCE

Sanitary Stub - Places a sanitary stub coupling component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Stub (on page 427).

STUE

Toolbars



Sanitary Wye Plan - Places a sanitary wye in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Wye Plan (on page 428).

YE

Sanitary Cap - Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Cap (on page 428).

CAPE

Sanitary Nut/Coupling - Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Nut/Coupling (on page 429).

NUTE

Sanitary Gate Valve - Places a sanitary ball valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Gate Valve (on page 429).

GATE

Sanitary Ball Valve - Places a sanitary ball valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Ball Valve (on page 430).

BALE

Sanitary Globe Valve - Places a sanitary globe valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Globe Valve (on page 430).

GLBE

Sanitary Plug Valve - Places a sanitary plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Plug Valve (on page 431).

PLUE

Sanitary Check Valve - Places a sanitary check valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Check Valve (on page 431).

CHKE

Sanitary Butterfly Valve - Places a sanitary butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Butterfly Valve (on page 432).

BFYE

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan - Places a sanitary 3-way valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan (on page 432).

3VE

Sanitary Angle Valve Plan - Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Angle Valve Plan (on page 433).

ANGE

Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve - Places a one-port pneumatic actuator air valve. For more information, see Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve (on page 433).

AIR1

Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve - Places a two-port pneumatic actuator air valve. For more information, see Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve (on page 434).

AIR2

Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve - Places a three-port pneumatic actuator air valve. For more information, see Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve (on page 434).

AIR3


Toolbars



Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side (on page 435).

H90RE

Sanitary 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 45 Ell Side (on page 436).

H45EN

Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical (on page 436).

V45EN

Sanitary Tee Side - Places a straight sanitary tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Tee Side (on page 437).

HTESE

Sanitary Tee Vertical - Places a straight sanitary tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Tee Vertical (on page 437).

VTESE

Sanitary Reducing Tee Side - Places a sanitary reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Side (on page 438)

HTERE

Sanitary Reducing Tee Vertical - Places a sanitary reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee Vertical (on page 438).

VTERE

Sanitary Cross Side - Places a four-way sanitary cross with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Side (on page 439).

HCRSE

Sanitary Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way sanitary reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side (on page 439).

HCRRE

Sanitary Cross Reducing Vertical - Places a four-way sanitary reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Vertical (on page 440).

VCRRE

Sanitary Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Lateral Side (on page 440).

HLATE

Sanitary Lateral Vertical - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Vertical (on page 440).

VLATE

Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side (on page 441).

HLARE

Toolbars



Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical -Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical (on page 441).

VLARE

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side - Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side (on page 442).

H22EN

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical (on page 442).

V22EN

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side (on page 443).

H11EN

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical (on page 443).

V11EN

Sanitary U-Bend Side - Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Side (on page 444).

HUBEN

Sanitary U-Bend Vertical - Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Vertical (on page 444).

VUBEN

Sanitary Wye Side - Places a sanitary wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Wye Side (on page 445).

HYE

Sanitary Wye Vertical - Places a sanitary wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Wye Vertical (on page 445).

VYE

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side - Places a 3-way valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side (on page 446).

H3VE

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical - Places a sanitary 3-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical (on page 446).

V3VE

Sanitary Angle Valve Side - Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Angle Valve Side (on page 446).

HANGE

Toolbars


Sanitary fitting components can have many end types, such as butt-welded, flanged, ferrule, coupling, hub, square, bull, and a simple engagement used with threaded and socket-welded piping. The end types can also vary for each end of a fitting, as shown in the examples below.

The available end types are defined by the selected specification, and the prompts for each command reflect the end type used. Available end types are shown below.

Toolbars


End types are delivered in the files End1.dwg through End17.dwg in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder.

The multi-port valves have special port controls in the data files. Listed below are all the port types available for these valves. When all three ports are specified in the data file, all three ports are drawn on the drawing. When only one or two ports are required, place 0 in the last port entries and this supplies either a one or two port valve.

CADWorx end types are exported to ISOGEN as shown in the following table.

CADWorx End Type ISOGEN End Type

0 PL (Plain)

1 BW (Butt weld)

2 FL (Flanged)

3 LN (Liner/Nut)

4 LN (Liner/Nut)

5 MP (Male Part)

6 MP (Male Part)

7 MP (Male Part)

8 MP (Male Part)

9 CL (Clamped)

10 CL (Clamped)

11 CL (Clamped)

Toolbars


12 CL (Clamped)

13 CL (Clamped)

14 SW (Socket Weld)

15 SC (Screwed)


Sanitary 90 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Ell Plan

Command line: 90EN

Places a 90 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point.

The end type is defined by the current specification.







Toolbars


Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan

Command line: 90RE

Places a 90 degree sanitary reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.











Sanitary 45 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Plan

Command line: 45EN

Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.





Place a plan elbow





Toolbars



Sanitary Tee Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Plan

Command line: TESE

Places a straight sanitary tee in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.



Place a plan tee






Reducing Tee Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Plan

Command line: TERE

Places a reducing tee in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.



Toolbars


Place a plan tee






Cross Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Plan

Command line: CRSE

Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane.


Center - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.

otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point.

Branch1 - Places the first branch of the cross at the start point.

Branch2 - Places the second branch of the cross at the start point.


Place a plan cross





Toolbars


Cross Reducing Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Plan

Command line: CRRE

Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point.



Place a sanitary plan reducing cross

1. Click Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan .



4. Click in the direction of the branch end.


Lateral Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Plan

Command line: LATE

Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point.

Branch - Places the branch end of the lateral at the start point.








Toolbars


Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan

Command line: LARE

Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.








Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan

Command line: 22EN

Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.





Toolbars


Place a plan elbow






Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan

Command line: 11EN

Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.





Place a plan elbow






Toolbars


Sanitary U-Bend Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Plan

Command line: UBEN

Places a 180 degree u-bend in the X-Y plane. The bend also has a branch the projects up or down in the Z direction.


Middle - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.

otherEnd - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.

Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction.

Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

Place a sanitary u-bend

1. Click Sanitary U-Bend Plan .


3. Click in the direction of the bend.

4. Click in the direction of the end of the bend.


The bend component is drawn.

Sanitary Concentric

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Concentric

Command line: CONCE

Places a sanitary concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.


Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point.

Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point.


Toolbars







Sanitary Eccentric

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Eccentric

Command line: ECCE

Places a sanitary eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.


Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point.

Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point.







or




or



Sanitary Stub

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Stub

Command line: STUE

Places a sanitary stub coupling component in the X-Y plane.


Plan end - Places the plan end at the start point.

Face end - Places the face end at the start point.

Toolbars


Place a coupling

1. Click a coupling component command.


3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling.


Sanitary Wye Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Plan

Command line: YE

Places a sanitary wye in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the end of the wye at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.


Place a plan wye





Sanitary Cap

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cap

Command line: CAPE

Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane.



Toolbars


Place a cap





Sanitary Nut/Coupling

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Nut/Coupling

Command line: NUTE

Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the X-Y plane.


Place a coupling





Sanitary Gate Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Gate Valve

Command line: GATE

Places a sanitary gate valve component in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.

Place a valve






Toolbars


Sanitary Ball Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Ball Valve

Command line: BALE

Places a sanitary ball valve component in the X-Y plane.




Place a valve






Sanitary Globe Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Globe Valve

Command line: GLBE

Places a sanitary globe valve component in the X-Y plane.




Place a valve






Toolbars


Sanitary Plug Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve

Command line: PLUE

Places a sanitary plug valve component in the X-Y plane.




Place a valve






Sanitary Check Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Check Valve

Command line: CHKE

Places a sanitary check valve component in the X-Y plane.




Place a valve






Toolbars


Sanitary Butterfly Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Butterfly Valve

Command line: BFYE

Places a sanitary butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane.




Place a valve






Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan

Command line: 3VE

Places a sanitary three-way valve component in the X-Y plane.



otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point.



Toolbars








Sanitary Angle Valve Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Angle Valve Plan

Command line: ANGE

Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve in the X-Y plane.










Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve

Command line: AIR1

Places a one-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.


Up - Places the valve actuator in the positive Z direction.

Toolbars


Place a multi-port valve

1. Click a multi-port valve component command.


3. To place the valve actuator in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the actuator.

or

To place the valve actuator normal to the X-Y plane, select Up.

4. Type a value to rotate the valve about the actuator body axis.




Command line: AIR2

Places a two-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.







or






Command line: AIR3

Places a three-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.







or




Toolbars



Sanitary 90 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Ell Side

Command line: H90EN

Places a 90 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane.



Plan end - Places the plan end of the elbow at the start point.









Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side

Command line: H90RE

Places a 90 degree sanitary reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.



ENgagement end - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.








Toolbars




Sanitary 45 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Side

Command line: H45EN

Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane.



FErrule end - Places the ferrule end of the elbow at the start point.









Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical

Command line: V45EN

Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.






Toolbars








Sanitary Tee Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Side

Command line: HTESE

Places a straight sanitary tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.



FErrule End - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.



Place a side tee






Sanitary Tee Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Vertical

Command line: VTESE

Places a straight sanitary tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default.




Toolbars







Reducing Tee Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Side

Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Side

Command line: HTERE

Places a reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.



Plan end - Places the plan end of the tee at the start point.



Place a side tee






Reducing Tee Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Vertical

Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Vert

Command line: VTERE

Places a reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default.



Toolbars







Cross Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Side

Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Side

Command line: HCRSE

Places a four-way straight cross with the branches normal to the X-Y plane.



Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.

Place a side cross





Cross Reducing Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Cross Side

Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Side

Command line: HCRRE

Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane.



Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.

Place a sanitary side reducing cross

1. Click Sanitary Reducing Cross Side .



4. Click in the direction of the <type> end of the branch.


Toolbars


Cross Reducing Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Reducing Vertical

Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Vert

Command line: VCRRE

Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane.



ENgagement branch end point - Places the engagement branch at the start point.

Place a vertical reducing cross

1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command.




Lateral Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Side

Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Side

Command line: HLATE

Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.



coupLing End - Places the coupling end of the lateral at the start point.









Lateral Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Vertical

Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Vert

Command line: VLATE

Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default.




Toolbars








Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side

Command line: HLARE

Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.



coupLing end - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point.









Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical

Command line: VLARE

Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default.










Toolbars


Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side

Command line: H22EN

Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.











Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical

Command line: V22EN

Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.


FErrule end - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.









Toolbars


Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side

Command line: H11EN

Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.


FErrule End - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.









Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical

Command line: V11EN

Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.


FErrule end - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



Toolbars








Sanitary U-Bend Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Side

Command line: HUBEN

Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.


Center - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.

<Type> End - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend

1. Click Sanitary U-Bend Side or Sanitary U-Bend Vertical .




5. Click in the direction of the branch.


Sanitary U-Bend Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Vertical

Command line: VUBEN

Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.


Center - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.

<Type> End - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.



Toolbars


Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend

1. Click Sanitary U-Bend Side or Sanitary U-Bend Vertical .




5. Click in the direction of the branch.


Sanitary Wye Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Side

Command line: HYE

Places a sanitary wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.



Place a side wye





Sanitary Wye Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Vertical

Command line: VYE

Places a sanitary wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.








Toolbars


Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side

Command line: H3VE

Places a three-way valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.



ENgagement end - Places the engagement end of the valve at the start point.









Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical

Command line: V3VE

Places a sanitary three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the valve is placed at the start point by default.


FErrule branch end point - Places the ferrule end of the valve at the start point.






Sanitary Angle Valve Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Angle Valve Side

Command line: HANGE

Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.



ENgagement end - Places the engagement end of the valve at the start point.



Toolbars








Victaulic Plant menu: Toolbars > Victaulic

The commands on the Victaulic toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Pipe - Places a victaulic pipe component. For more information, see Pipe (on page 333).

PIPW

Plan 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 LR Ell (on page 333).

90LR

Plan 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 SR Ell (on page 334).

90SR

Plan 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335).

45LR

Plan 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 Reducing Ell (on page 335).

90RD

Side 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 Reducing Ell (on page 351).

H90RD

Plan 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 11.25 Ell (on page 347).

11LR

Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page 348).

22LR

Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Tee (on page 336).

TESW

Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee (on page 337).

TERW

Toolbars



Plan Cross - Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Cross (on page 340).

CRSW

Plan Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Cross (on page 341).

CCRW

Plan Wye - Places a wye in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Wye (on page 348).

YB

Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 341).

LATW

Plan Strainer - Places a strainer in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page 404).

TEFL

Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer (on page 339)

CONC

Ecc Reducer - Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ecc Reducer (on page 339).

ECC

Victaulic Cap - Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cap (on page 340).

CAPW

Victaulic Coupling - Places a coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Coupling (on page 401).

CPS

Victaulic Flange - Places a flange in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Slip-On Flange (on page 364).

FLGO

Victaulic Butterfly Valve - Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Butterfly Valve (on page 380).

BFYF

Victaulic Check Valve - Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Check Valve (on page 379).

CHKF

Victaulic Ball Valve - Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ball Valve (on page 377).

BALF

Victaulic Plug Valve - Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plug Valve (on page 378).

PLUF

Toolbars




Side 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 LR Ell (on page 349).

H90LR

Side 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 SR Ell (on page 350)

H90SR

Side 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 335).

H45LR

Vert 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 45 Ell (on page 351).

V45LR

Side 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 11.25 Ell (on page 358).

H11LR

Vert 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 11.25 Ell (on page 359).

V11LR

Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on page 359).

H22LR

Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page 360).

V22LR

Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on page 352).

HTESW

Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page 353).

VTESW

Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Reducing Tee (on page 353).

HTERW

Vert Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Reducing Tee (on page 354).

VTERW

Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Cross (on page 356).

HCRSW

Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 357).

HCCRW

Toolbars



Vert Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Reducing Cross (on page 357).

VCRRW

Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Wye (on page 360).

HYB

Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Wye (on page 361).

VYB

Side Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Side Lateral (on page 357).

HLATW

Vert Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Lateral (on page 358).

VLATW

Side Strainer - Places a strainer with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Side (on page 411).

HTEFL

Vert Strainer - Places a strainer with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Vertical (on page 412).

VTEFL

You must use one of the Victaulic default specifications that are supplied with CADWorx for the icons to work on the toolbar.

This toolbar provides components manufactured by Victaulic Corporation. The Victaulic specifications and data files have been provided by Victaulic and can be used to draw components supplied by this company. The specifications supplied are for AWWA, IPS, 304, 316, and PFCS type components.

Threaded/Socket Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Fittings

The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket

weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded and Socket

Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25) to switch between these two modes.

The commands on the Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Thrd/SW Pipe - Places a threaded/socket pipe component. For more information, see Thrd/SW Pipe (on page 455).

PIPF

Toolbars



Nipple - Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Nipple (on page 456).

NIP

Tube - Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. For more information, see Tube (on page 457).

TUBE

Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan (on page 457).

90S/90T

Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket street elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan (on page 458).

90SS/90ST

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan (on page 459).

45S/45T

Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan (on page 459).

90RS/90RT

Thrd/SW Tee Plan - Places a threaded/socket straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Plan (on page 460).

TESS/TEST

Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan - Places a straight threaded/socket reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan (on page 460).

TERS/TERT

Thrd/SW Conc Swage - Places a concentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Conc Swage (on page 461).

SWGC

Thrd/SW Ecc Swage - Places an eccentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ecc Swage (on page 461).

SWGE

Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub - Places a concentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub (on page 462).

SWGCT

Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub - Places an eccentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub (on page 462).

SWGET

Thrd/SW Cap - Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Cap (on page 463).

CAPS/CAPT

Thrd/SW Cross Plan - Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Cross Plan (on page 463).

CRSS/CRST

Thrd/SW Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Plan (on page 464).

LATS/LATT

Toolbars



Thrd/SW Plug - Places a threaded/socket plug in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Plug (on page 464).

PLGT

Thrd/SW Bush/Insert - Places a threaded/socket bushing in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Bush/Insert (on page 464).

BUSS/BUST

Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket full coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan (on page 465).

CPS/CPT

Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket half coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan (on page 465).

HCPS/HCPT

Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket reducing coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan (on page 465).

CPRS/CPRT

Weld in Plan - Places a weldolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Weldolet Weld in Plan (on page 466).

WOL

Thrd in Plan - Places a threadolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threadolet Thread in Plan (on page 466).

TOL

SW in Plan - Places a sockolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan (on page 466).

SOL

EOL-Weld in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Weld in Plan (on page 467).

EOLW

EOL-Thrd in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Thread in Plan (on page 467).

EOLT

EOL-SW in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan (on page 467).

EOLS

LOL-Weld in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Weld in Plan (on page 468).

LOLW

LOL-Thrd in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Thread in Plan (on page 468).

LOLT

LOL- SW in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan (on page 468).

LOLS

Toolbars



Weld in Plan - Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is plain. For more information, see Nipolet Weld in Plan (on page 469).

NOLP

Thrd in Plan - Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. For more information, see Nipolet Thread in Plan (on page 469).

NOLT

Thrd/SW Union - Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Union (on page 469).

UNS/UNT



Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side (on page 470).

H90S/H90T

Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket street elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side (on page 470).

H90SS/H90ST

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side (on page 471).

H45S/H45T

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert (on page 471).

V45S/V45T

Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side (on page 472).

H90RS/H90RT

Thrd/SW Tee Side - Places a threaded/socket straight tee normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Side (on page 472).

HTESS/HTEST

Thrd/SW Tee Vert - Places a threaded/socket straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Vert (on page 473).

VTESS/VTEST

Thrd/SW Tee Red Side - Places a straight threaded/socket reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Side (on page 473).

HTERS/HTERT

Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert - Places a threaded/socket reducing straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert (on page 474).

VTERS/VTERT

Toolbars



Thrd/SW Cross Side - Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Cross Side (on page 474).

HRCSS/HCRST

Thrd/SW Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Side (on page 474).

HLATS/HLATT

Thrd/SW Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Vert (on page 475).

VLATS/VLATT

Thrd/SW Full Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Full Clpg End (on page 475).

VCPS/VCPT

Thrd/SW Half Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket half coupling component end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Half Clpg End (on page 476).

VHCPS/VHCPT

Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket reducing coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End (on page 476).

VCPRS/VCPRT

Weld in Vertical - Places a weldolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Weldolet Weld in Vertical (on page 476).

VWOL

Thrd in Vertical - Places a threadolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threadolet Thread in Vertical (on page 477).

VTOL

SW in Vertical - Places a sockolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical (on page 477).

VSO:

EOL-Weld in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Weld in Side (on page 477).

HEOLW

EOL-Weld in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Weld in Vertical (on page 478).

VEOLW

EOL-Thrd in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Thread in Side (on page 478).

HEOLT

EOL-Thrd in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Thread in Vertical (on page 478).

VEOLT

EOL-SW in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side (on page 479).

HEOLS

Toolbars



EOL-SW in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical (on page 479).

VEOLS

LOL-Weld in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Weld in Side (on page 479).

HLOLW

LOL-Thrd in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Thread in Side (on page 480).

HLOLT

LOL- SW in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Socket Weld in Side (on page 480).

HLOLS

Weld in Vertical - Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is plain. For more information, see Nipolet Weld in Vertical (on page 480).

VNOLP

Thrd in Vertical - Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. For more information, see Nipolet Thread in Vertical (on page 481).

VNOLP

The arrow in the lower right corner of a command button indicates a fly-out menu with additional commands available.


Thrd/SW Pipe

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe

Command line: PIPF



If the drawing environment is set to threaded, the piping component has threaded ends. If the drawing environment is set to a socket weld, the piping component has plain ends.


Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25).

Bevel - Used when working with welded components.

Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25).



Toolbars



Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

Place a threaded/socket pipe




4. If you receive a prompt for end types, type the option on the command line and press ENTER.


Nipple

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Nipple

Command line: NIP

Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane.


Length - Defines the length of the fitting component.

Close - Reads the close distance as specified in the data file.


Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25).

Bevel - Used when working with welded components.

Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25).

Place a nipple

1. Click Nipple . Alternatively, type NIP on the command line and then press ENTER.

2. Click to select a starting point.

3. Click to select an ending point.

4. Specify the end option for the start of the component.

5. Specify the end option for the end of the component.

The end options default depends on which options you have set.

The pipe nipple is drawn.

Toolbars


Tube

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Tube

Command line: TUBE

Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. Different radii can be placed at each vertex of the polyline, or you can define a common radius for all corners.

Use the Router command on the RT Panel (on page 189) for useful 3D polyline routing capabilities.

Tubing uses the pipe component entry within the CADWorx Plant specifications. Pipe and tubing can be used concurrently. Tubing can occupy a range of 1/8” – 1/2”, whereas regular pipe can occupy 3/4” and above. Tubing can be set up as an optional component, or the specification can be set up to only handle tubing.

After tubing is placed in the drawing, other components can be inserted into it. Like normal piping, tubing also automatically breaks. Even after a component is inserted, the tubing remains as one piece. When edited with CEDIT, the tubing attached to a single polyline also acts as one piece.

Grouping is controlled by the PICKSTYLE environmental variable, which must be turned on for the tubing to act as one piece. Alternatively, you can use the CADWorx GROUPTOG command to turn the AutoCAD grouping control on or off. For more information, see Group On/Off (on page 150).

Enter corner radius - Defines the radius to be used at each vertex.

Manual - Places individual radii at each corner of the selected polyline. The software pauses at each vertex so that the radius can be defined. A rubber-banded line back to the actual vertex is shown in the drawing.

Tubing is exported to a live database, and appears in the CADWorx Bill of Material as one piece.

Tubing is exported to the CADWorx ISOGEN isometric generator and appears in the ISOGEN material list.

Tubing is not exported to CAESAR II.

Place tubing

1. Click Tube . Alternatively, type TUBE on the command line and then press ENTER.

2. Type the required radius.

3. Select the 2D or 3D polyline.

The tubing is attached.

Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan

Command line: 90/S90T



Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point.

Toolbars










Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan

Command line: 90SS/90ST

Places a 90 degree street elbow in the X-Y plane.


Female - Places the female end of the elbow first.

Male - Places the male end of the elbow first.


Female end direction - Specifies the direction of the female end of the elbow.

Male end direction - Specifies the direction of the male end of the elbow.

Place a 90 degree street plan elbow

1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan . Alternatively, type 90SS on the command line and then press ENTER.

If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type 90ST on the command line.

2. To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male.

3. Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.


5. Click in the direction of the male end of the elbow.

If the male end is placed first, the system prompts you for placement of the female end.

Toolbars



Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan

Command line: 45S/45T






Place a plan elbow






Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan

Command line: 90RS/90RT

Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.








Toolbars






Thrd/SW Tee Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Plan

Command line: TESS/TEST

Places a threaded/socket straight tee in the X-Y plane.




Place a plan tee






Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan

Command line: TESS/TERT

Places a threaded/socket straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane.




Toolbars


Place a plan tee






Thrd/SW Conc Swage

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Conc Swage

Command line: SWGC

Places a concentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane.


Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point


Large end type - Specifies the end type connection at the large end of the swage.

Small end type - Specifies the end type connection at the small end of the swage.


Place a concentric reducer swage

1. Click Thrd/SW Conc Swage . Alternatively, type SWGC on the command line and then press ENTER.



4. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer.

Type the required alpha description.

5. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer.


Thrd/SW Ecc Swage

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Ecc Swage

Command line: SWGE

Places an eccentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane.




Toolbars


Large end type - Specifies the end type connection at the large end of the swage.

Small end type - Specifies the end type connection at the small end of the swage.




Place an eccentric reducer swage

1. Click Thrd/SW Ecc Swage . Alternatively, type SWGE on the command line and then press ENTER.


3. Click in the direction of the small end of reducer.


or


5. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer.

Type the required alpha description.

6. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer.


Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub

Command line: SWGCT

Places a concentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane.








Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub

Command line: SWGET

Places an eccentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane.





Toolbars





or




or



Thrd/SW Cap

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cap

Command line: CAPS/CAPT

Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane.



Place a cap





Thrd/SW Cross Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cross Plan

Command line: CRSS/CRST

Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane.




Place a plan cross





Toolbars


Thrd/SW Lateral Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Plan

Command line: LATS/LATT

Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane.












Thrd/SW Plug

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug

Command line: PLGT

Places a plug in the X-Y plane.


Cap end - Places the cap end of the component at the start point.

Place a plug

1. Click a plug component command.


3. Click to select the end point.

The plug component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Bush/Insert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Bush/Insert

Command line: BUSS/BUST

Places a bushing in the X-Y plane.




Toolbars


Place a bushing

1. Click a bushing component command.


3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing.

The bushing component is drawn.

Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan

Command line: CPS/CPT

Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.



Middle - Places the component at the centerline.


Place a coupling





Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan

Command line: HCPS/HCPT

Places a half coupling in the X-Y plane.


Plan end - Places the start point at the plan end.

Place a coupling





Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan

Command line: CPRS/CPRT

Places a reducing coupling in the X-Y plane.


Large - Places the large end at the start point.

Middle - Places the start point of the component at the centerline.

Small - Places the small end at the start point.

Toolbars


Place a coupling





Weldolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Plan

Command line: WOL

Places a weldolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.


Place a plan fitting

1. Click a plan fitting component command.


3. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting.

The fitting component is drawn.

Threadolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Plan

Command line: TOL

Places a threadolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.







Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: SW in Plan

Command line: SOL

Places a sockolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.







Toolbars


Elbowlet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Plan

Command line: EOLW

Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is butt welded.


Place a plan elbowlet fitting

1. Click a plan elbowlet command.



4. Click in the direction of the butt weld end of the fitting.


Elbowlet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Plan

Command line: EOLT

Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is threaded.








Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Plan

Command line: EOLS

Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is socket welded.








Toolbars


Latrolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Weld in Plan

Command line: LOLW

Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.


Place a plan latrolet fitting

1. Click a plan latrolet command.


3. Click in the direction of the main end of the fitting.



Latrolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Thrd in Plan

Command line: LOLT

Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.








Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-SW in Plan

Command line: LOLS

Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.








Toolbars


Nipolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Plan

Command line: NOLP

Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.







Nipolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Plan

Command line: NOLT

Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.







Thrd/SW Union

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Union

Command line: UNT

Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y plane.


Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the union.






Toolbars



Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side

Command line: H90S/H90T

Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane.


Corner - Places the start point at the corner of the elbow.









Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe 90 Street Ell Side

Command line: H90S/H90ST

Places a 90 degree street elbow normal to the X-Y plane.


Male - Starts the elbow at the male end point of the selected component.


Male end direction - Specifies the direction of the male end of the elbow.

Place a 90 degree side street elbow

1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan . Alternatively, type H90SS on the command line and then press ENTER.

If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type H90ST on the command line.

2. To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male.

3. Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.




Toolbars


Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side

Command line: H45S/H45T

Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.











Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert

Command line: V45S/V45T












Toolbars


Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side

Command line: H90RS/H90RT

Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.



Small - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.










Thrd/SW Tee Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Side

Command line: HTESS/HTEST

Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.





Place a side tee






Toolbars


Thrd/SW Tee Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Vert

Command line: VTESS/VTEST

Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default.








Thrd/SW Tee Red Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Side

Command line: HTERS/HTERT

Places a threaded/socket straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.





Place a side tee






Toolbars


Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert

Command line: VTERS/VTERT

Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at the start point by default.








Thrd/SW Cross Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cross Side

Command line: HCRSS/HCRST

Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.



Place a side cross





Thrd/SW Lateral Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Side

Command line: HLATS/HLATT

Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.





Toolbars








Thrd/SW Lateral Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Vert

Command line: VLATS/VLATT

Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at the start point by default.










Thrd/SW Full Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Full Clpg End

Command line: VCPS/VCPT

Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.









Toolbars


Thrd/SW Half Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Half Clpg End

Command line: VHCPS/VHCPT

Places a half coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.









Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End

Command line: VCPRS/VCPRT

Places a reducing coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.









Weldolet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Vertical

Command line: VWOL

Places a weldolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.




Place a vertical fitting

1. Click a vertical fitting component command.




Toolbars


Threadolet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Vertical

Command line: VTOL

Places a threadolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.









Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: SW in Vertical

Command line: VSOL

Places a sockolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.









Elbowlet Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Side

Command line: HEOLW

Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.




Place a side elbowlet fitting

1. Click a side elbowlet component command.





Toolbars


Elbowlet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Vert

Command line: VEOLW

Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.


Place a vertical elbowlet fitting



3. Click in the direction of the buttweld end of the fitting.


Elbowlet Thread in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Side

Command line: HEOLT

Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.










Elbowlet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Vert

Command line: VEOLT

Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.







Toolbars


Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Side

Command line: HEOLS

Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.










Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Vert

Command line: VEOLS

Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.







Latrolet Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Weld in Side

Command line: HLOLW

Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.




Place a side latrolet fitting

1. Click a side latrolet component command.





Toolbars


Latrolet Thread in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Thrd in Side

Command line: HLOLT

Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.










Latrolet Socket Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-SW in Side

Command line: HLOLS

Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.










Nipolet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Vertical

Command line: VNOLP

Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.




Toolbars







Nipolet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Vertical

Command line: VNOLP

Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.









Thrd/SW Valves Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Valves

The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket

weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded and Socket

Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25) to switch between the two modes.

The commands on the Thrd/SW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Thrd/SW Gate - Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Gate (on page 484).

GATS/GATT

Thrd/SW Ball - Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ball (on page 484).

BALS/BALT

Thrd/SW Globe - Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Globe (on page 485).

GLBS/GLBT

Toolbars



Thrd/SW Plug - Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Plug (on page 485).

PLUS/PLUT

Thrd/SW Check - Places a threaded or socket weld check valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Check (on page 486).

CHKS/CHKT

Thrd/SW Needle - Places a threaded or socket weld needle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Needle (on page 486).

NEDS/NEDT

Thrd/SW Diaphragm - Places a threaded or socket weld diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Diaphragm (on page 487).

DIAS/DIAT

Thrd/SW Rotary - Places a threaded or socket weld rotary valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Rotary (on page 487).

ROTS/ROTT

Thrd/SW Dual Check - Places a threaded or socket weld dual check valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Dual Check (on page 488).

DCHS/DCHT

Thrd/SW Control - Places a threaded or socket weld control valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Control (on page 488).

CNTS/CNTT

Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan - Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan (on page 489).

3VS/3VT

Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan - Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan (on page 489).

4VS/4VT

Thrd/SW Relief Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Relief Top (on page 494).

RELS/RELT

Thrd/SW Angle Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Angle Top (on page 490).

ANGS/ANGT

Thrd/SW Gage - Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Gage (on page 491).

GAGS/GAGT

X-Body Gate BW - Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate BW (on page 491).

EGAB

X-Body Gate Thrd - Places a threaded X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate Thrd (on page 492).

EGAT

Toolbars



X-Body Gate SW - Places a socket weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate SW (on page 492).

EGAS



Thrd/SW 3 Way Side - Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Side (on page 493).

H3VS/H3VT

Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical - Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical (on page 493).

V3VS/V3VT

Thrd/SW 4 Way Side - Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 4 Way Side (on page 494).

H4VS/H4VT

Thrd/SW Relief Side - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree relief valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Relief Side (on page 490).

HRELS/HRELT

Thrd/SW Pressure Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Pressure Top.

VRELS/VRELT

Thrd/SW Angle Side - Places a threaded or socket weld angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Angle Side (on page 495).

HANGS/HANGT


Toolbars



Thrd/SW Gate

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gate

Command line: GATS/GATT

Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in the X-Y plane.



Place a valve






Thrd/SW Ball

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Ball

Command line: BALS/BALT

Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in the X-Y plane.



Place a valve






Toolbars


Thrd/SW Globe

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Globe

Command line: GLBS/GLBT

Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve in the X-Y plane.



Place a valve






Thrd/SW Plug

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug

Command line: PLUS/PLUT

Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in the X-Y plane.



Place a valve






Toolbars


Thrd/SW Check

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Check

Command line: CHKS/CHKT

Places a threaded or socket weld check valve in the X-Y plane.





Place a valve






Thrd/SW Needle

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Needle

Command line: NEDS/NEDT

Places a threaded or socket weld needle valve in the X-Y plane.



Place a valve






Toolbars


Thrd/SW Diaphragm

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Diaphragm

Command line: DIAS/DIAT

Places a threaded or socket weld diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane.



Place a valve






Thrd/SW Rotary

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Rotary

Command line: ROTS/ROTT

Places a threaded or socket weld rotary valve in the X-Y plane.



Place a valve






Toolbars


Thrd/SW Dual Check

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Dual Check

Command line: DCHS/DCHT

Places a threaded or socket weld dual check valve in the X-Y plane.





Place a valve






Thrd/SW Control

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Control

Command line: CNTS/CNTT

Places a threaded or socket weld control valve in the X-Y plane.


Length - Specifies the length of the component.


Place a valve






Toolbars


Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan

Command line: 3VS/3VT

Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve in the X-Y plane.



Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current specification.







Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan

Command line: 4VS/4VT

Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve in the X-Y plane.




1. Click a four-way plan valve command.

2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point.



Toolbars


Thrd/SW Relief Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Relief Side

Command line: RELS/RELT

Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree relief valve in the X-Y plane.




Relief - Places the relief end of the valve at the start point.


Place a relief side valve

1. Click a relief valve component command.



4. Click in the direction of the relief end of the valve.


Thrd/SW Angle Top

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Angle

Command line: ANGS/ANGT

Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane.





Place an angle top valve

1. Click an angle valve component command.



4. Click in the direction of the branch end of the valve.


Toolbars


Thrd/SW Gage

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gage

Command line: GAGS/GAGT

Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve in the X-Y plane



To pick the outlet locations of the gage valve, use the MIDpoint of OSnap command and then pick the sides on the outlet end.

Because there is no way to accurately locate the outlets in 3D, first draw the component in 2D and then use the CONVERTSOLID command to convert the valve component to 3D solids.

Place a valve






X-Body Gate BW

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate BW

Command line: EGAB

Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.


Place a valve






Toolbars


X-Body Gate Thrd

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: X-Body Gate Thrd

Command line: EGAT

Places a threaded X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.


Place a valve






X-Body Gate SW

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate SW

Command line: EGAS

Places a socket weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.


Place a valve






Toolbars



Thrd/SW 3 Way Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Side

Command line: H3VS/H3VT

Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane.









Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical

Command line: V3VS/V3VT

Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the main normal to the X-Y plane.








Toolbars


Thrd/SW 4 Way Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 4 Way Side

Command line: H4VS/H4VT

Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane.




1. Click a four-way side valve command.




Thrd/SW Relief Top

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Relief Top

Command line: HRELS/HRELT

Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane.



Relief - Places the start point at the relief end.




Place a relief top valve

1. Click a relief valve component command.





Toolbars


Thrd/SW Angle Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Angle Side

Command line: HANGS/HANGT

Places a threaded or socket weld angle valve in the X-Y plane.











Gaskets, Etc. Plant menu: Toolbars > Gaskets, Etc.


Tick Mark - Creates a dimension tick mark. For more information, see Tick Mark (on page 201).

TICK

Standard - Places standard stud bolts at the selected location. For more information, see Standard (on page 187).

STDBOLT

Non Standard - Places non standard stud bolts at the selected location. For more information, see Non Standard (on page 187).

NONSTDBOLT

Automatic - Sizes and places stud bolts automatically at each gasket. For more information, see Automatic (on page 184).

AUTOBOLT

Gasket - Places a gasket. For more information, see Gasket (on page 496).

GAS

Weld Gap - Creates weld gaps For more information, see Weld Gap (on page 497).

WELD


Toolbars


Gasket

Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Gasket

Command line: GAS

Places a gasket. The gasket is composed of two different entities. First is an inserted block that is located at the insert point. Another inserted block is placed on the other side of the gasket. The GASR contains Xdata information for Bill of Materials extraction. GASL is a plain insert without information. When you use mode conversion to convert components to another mode in a Z-plane position, the GASL insert is destroyed. When you convert the single GASR insert in the proper X and Y planes, both sides of the gasket are created again.

The shape of the gasket allows for other uses, as explained below.

The half circle on the outer portion of both inserts allow for easy picking for dimensioning. For example, when dimensioning, select Osnap, CENter of, and pick the center of circle which is the exact corner of the face of flange). You should find that it is relatively easy to select the center of the circle from a zoomed out view.

For placing a flange face against the gasket, you can select Osnap, ENDpoint of, and select the side of the gasket to place the flange perfectly in position. This provides a method of placing the flange when the last point option is no longer available.

This routine is also used for ring type joints. The data files for rings have an extra column indicating the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional column and adds this ring number to the bill of materials description. The distance between the faces of adjoining flanges (under compression) are used in this file instead of the actual depth of the ring.

Insert a gasket

1. Click Gasket .

2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to select the last point of the previously-placed component.

3. Click in the required direction.

The software inserts a gasket at the selected location.

The same procedure can be used to place ring type joints. The data files for rings have an extra column, which indicates the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional column, and adds this ring number to the Bill of Materials description. The distance between the faces of adjoining flanges (under compression) is used in this file instead of the actual depth of the ring.

You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the

Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 47) in Piping Rules under Setup .

Toolbars


Weld Gap

Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Weld Gap

Command line: WELD

Creates weld gaps for detailed pipe fabrication. Weld gaps are controlled by the currently defined specification and are placed according to size and/or schedule.

last point - Places the weld gap at the last point of the previously-created component.

Each specification has data files that provide different thicknesses.

Define a weld gap

1. Click Weld Gap .

2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to select the last point of the previously-placed component.

3. Click in the required direction.

The software creates a weld gap.

Use Osnap > Insert and select any portion of the weld gap symbol to start a new pipe or component from the weld gap.

You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the

Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 47) in Piping Rules under Setup .

Restraints Plant menu: > Toolbars > Restraints

The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below.


Translational - Creates a translational-type restraint. For more information, see Translational (on page 223).

TRANSLATIONAL

Anchor - Creates an anchor-type restraint. For more information, see Anchor (on page 224).

ANCHOR

Spring Hanger - Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. For more information, see Spring Hanger (on page 224).

SPRING

Rotational - Creates a rotational-type restraint. For more information, see Rotational (on page 225).

ROTATIONAL

Snubber - Creates a Snubber-type restraint. For more information, see Snubber (on page 226).

SNUBBER

Guide - Creates a Guide-type restraint. For more information, see Guide (on page 226).

GUIDE

The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can position a rotational restraint at any vector.

Toolbars


Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be re-drawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees.

The CAESARTolerance (on page 33) variable is useful when the bi-directional process encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is sloped.

All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on page 64) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID, SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.

You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.

Misc Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc

Use the Threaded and Socket Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 25) to switch between these two modes for SW/Thrd Plan and SW/Thrd Side.

The commands on the Misc toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling (on page 329).


Flanged Plan - Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Plan (on page 500).

STRF

SW/Thrd Plan - Places a socket weld/ threaded strainer component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see SW/Thrd Plan (on page 500).

STRT

Create - Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape components. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153).

USERCREATE

User Shape 1 - Places user created shape 1 in the X-Y plane. For more information, see User Shapes (on page 153).

USE1


USE2


USE3


USE4


USE5

Toolbars



Bleed Ring - Places a bleed ring in the drawing in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on page 501).

BLD

Spec Bld Side - Places a blind spectacle in the drawing normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle Blind Side (on page 501).

SPCT

Reinforcing Pad - Inserts information indicating a reinforcement pad. For more information, see Reinforcing Pad (on page 222).

REINFPAD

Reinforcing Saddle - Inserts information indicating a reinforcement saddle. For more information, see Reinforcing Saddle (on page 222).

REINFSAD

Expansion Joint - Places an expansion joint in the drawing in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Expansion Joint (on page 502).

EXPF

Rigid Element - Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing. For more information, see Rigid Element (on page 502).

ELEMENT

Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attach (on page 173).

GENERIC

Stop Sign - Places ISOGEN stop sign symbols in the drawing. For more information, see Stop Sign (on page 108).

STOPSIGN



Flanged Side - Places a flanged pipe component normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Side (on page 503).

HSTRF

SW/Thrd Side - Places a socket weld/ threaded strainer component normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see SW/Thrd Side (on page 503).

HSTRT

Spec Bld Vert - Places a blind spectacle with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle Blind Vertical (on page 504).

VSPCT

The arrow in the lower right corner of the button indicates a flyout for more options.

Toolbars



Flanged Plan

Misc toolbar: Flanged Plan

Command line: STRF

Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y plane.



Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component.


Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point.

Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.

Place a plan flange pipe

1. Click Flanged Plan . Alternatively, type STRF, and press ENTER.

2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.

3. Select a main end direction.

4. Select branch direction.

The flanged plan pipe is placed.

SW/Thrd Plan

Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Plan

Command line: STRT

Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component in the X-Y plane.




otherEnd - Place the start point of the component at the other end.

Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point.

Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.

Toolbars


Place a side socket weld threaded pipe

1. Click SW/Thrd Plan . Alternatively, type STRT, and press ENTER.


3. Select a main end direction.

4. Select branch direction.

The plan socket weld/threaded pipe is placed.

Bleed Ring or Spacer

Misc toolbar: Bleed Ring

Lined toolbar: Lined Spacer

Command line: BLD

Places a bleed ring or spacer in the X-Y plane.


Length - Specifies the length of the bleed ring.

Place a bleed ring

1. Click Bleed Ring . Alternatively, type BLD, and press ENTER.



The bleed ring is placed.

Spectacle Blind Side

Misc toolbar: Spec Bld Side

Command line: SPCT

Places a blind spectacle normal to the X-Y plane.


Open - Places the start point at the closed end.

Close - Places the start point at the closed end.

Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the blind spectacle.

Place a side blind spectacle

1. Click Spec Bld Side . Alternatively, type SPCT, and press ENTER.

2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.



The side blind spectacle is placed.

Toolbars


Reinforcing Saddle

Miscellaneous toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle

Command line: REINFSAD

Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.

For more information, see Insert a reinforcement saddle (on page 223).

Expansion Joint

Misc toolbar: Expansion Joint

Command line: EXPF

Places an expansion joint in the X-Y plane.


Length - Specifies the length of the expansion joint.

Place an expansion joint

1. Click Expansion Joint . Alternatively, type EXPF, and press ENTER.



The expansion joint is placed.

Rigid Element

Misc toolbar: Rigid Element

Command line: ELEMENT

Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing.

Used with CAESAR II (pipe stress analysis software) when a rigid component is required. This is convenient when using a rigid from the base of a pump to the pump discharge piping, or placing a rigid as a structural member that might be supporting the pipe.

When using the CAESAR II bi-directional link or importing a stress input file, rigids can be automatically placed. These rigids are used by the bi-directional link and should not be modified in any manner. They can be moved with a piping system, but they need to remain in their relative location. They are often used when the length of a CAESAR II component does not match the components contained within CADWorx.

These elements are represented with a polyline that has pointed ends. Specify where rigid elements display from the LayerByLineNumber (on page 35) configuration setting.

Place a rigid element

1. Click Rigid Element . Alternatively, type ELEMENT, and press ENTER.

2. Select a start point.

3. Select a second point.

The rigid element is placed.

Toolbars



Flanged Side

Misc toolbar: Flanged Side

Command line: HSTRF

Places a pipe component normal to the X-Y plane.






Down - Places the branch direction in the negative the Z direction.

Place a side flange pipe

1. Click Flanged Side . Alternatively, type HSTRF, and press ENTER.




The side flanged pipe is placed.

SW/Thrd Side

Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Side

Command line: HSTRT

Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component normal to the X-Y plane.







Place a side socket weld/threaded pipe

1. Click SW/Thrd Side . Alternatively, type HSTRT, and press ENTER.




The socket weld threaded pipe is placed.

Toolbars


Spectacle Blind Vertical

Misc toolbar: Spec Bld Vert

Command line: VSPCT

Places a vertical blind spectacle side in the X-Y plane.

Open - Places the start point at the closed end.

Close - Places the start point at the closed end.

Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the blind spectacle.

Place a vertical blind spectacle

1. Click Spec Bld Vert . Alternatively, type VSPCT, and press ENTER.

2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the start point.



The blind spectacle is drawn.

Operators Plant menu: Toolbars > Operators


Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn in the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on page 151).

TOPWORKSADD

Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or deletes top works already associated with a valve. For more information, see Top Works Change (on page 151).

TOPWORKSCHANGE

Line Numbers Plant menu: Toolbars > Line Numbers


Line Number Setup - Modifies any line number configuration. For more information, see Setup (on page 124).

NUMBERSETUP

Line Number Assign - Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. For more information, see Assign (on page 127).

NUMBERASSIGN

Line Number Annotate - Labels components with existing line numbers. For more information, see Annotate (on page 128).

NUMBERANNOTATE

Toolbars



Line Number By - Sets the line number from one of three sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a selected component. For more information, see Set (on page 125).

NUMBERSET

Line Number Count - Sets the present line number count value. For more information, see Count (on page 126).

NUMBERCOUNT

Line Number Increment - Increases the line number count value. For more information, see Increment (on page 127).

NUMBER+

Line Number Decrement - Decreases the line number count value. For more information, see Decrement (on page 127).

NUMBER-

UCS Plant menu: Toolbars > UCS


Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position. For more information, see Flat (on page 229).

VIEWFLAT

North - Places the current user coordinate system in the north position. For more information, see North (on page 230).

VIEWNORTH

South - Places the current user coordinate system in the south position. For more information, see South (on page 231).

VIEWSOUTH

East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east position. For more information, see East (on page 232).

VIEWEAST

West - Places the current user coordinate system in the west position. For more information, see West (on page 231).

VIEWWEST

Next - Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS positions. For more information, see UCS Next (on page 230).

UCSNEXT

UCS Object - Orients the UCS according to an object you select. For more information, see UCS Object (on page 232).

UCS

Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see Compass (on page 230).

COMPASS

Steel Plant menu: Toolbars > Steel


Wide Flange - Places a wide flange shape. For more information, see Wide Flange Shapes (on page 236).

WSHAPE

Toolbars



Channel - Places a channel shape. For more information, see Channel Shapes (on page 237).

CSHAPE

Angle - Places an angle shape. For more information, see Angle Shapes (on page 238).

LSHAPE

Double Angle - Places a double angle shape. For more information, see Angle Double Shape (on page 247).

2LSHAPE

Tee - Places a tee shape. For more information, see Tee Shapes (on page 239).

TSHAPE

Flat Bar - Places a flat bar shape. For more information, see Flat Bar Shapes (on page 242).

FBSHAPE

Round Bar - Places a round bar shape. For more information, see Round Bar Shapes (on page 243).

RBSHAPE

Structural Pipe - Places a pipe shape. For more information, see Pipe Shapes (on page 240).

PSHAPE

Structural Tubing - Places a rectangular tube shape. For more information, see Tube Shapes (on page 241).

TSSHAPE

Z Shape - Places a zee shape. For more information, see Z Shapes (on page 246).

ZSHAPE

Channel Lip - Places a channel shape with a lip. For more information, see Channel Shape with Lip (on page 244).

CLIPSHAPE

Angle Lip - Places an angle shape with a lip. For more information, see Angle Shape with Lip (on page 245).

LLIPSHAPE

Plate - Places plates in the drawing. For more information, see Plate (on page 250).

SPLATE

Base Plate - Places base plates in free space or at the end of a member. For more information, see Base Plate (on page 252).

SBPLATE

Cope - Cuts a member back to other members. For more information, see Cope (on page 280).

SCOPE

Cut - Cuts members by a plane that you define. For more information, see Cut (on page 281).

SCUT

Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For more information, see Miter (on page 280).

SMITER

Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union (on page 282).

SUNION

Local Edit - Edits a selected member. For more information, see Edit (on page 282).

SCEDIT

Set Size by Component - Sets the steel size by selecting an existing component in the model. For more information, see Set Size by Component (on page 257).

COMP2STEEL

Toolbars



C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected steel members. For more information, see CG Generator (on page 304).

SCG

Auto Cope - Turns on or off the automatic coping of members. For more information, see Auto Cope (on page 290).

SAUTOCOPE

Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can use to build structural steel models. For more information, see Steel - Frame Creation (on page 268).

SFRAME

Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 271).

SLADDER

Stair - Places stairs in the drawing. For more information, see Stair (on page 275).

SSTAIR

Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more information, see Handrail (on page 273).

SHRAIL

Settings Plant menu: Toolbars > Settings


Setup - Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawings. For more information, see Setup (on page 26).

SETUP

Specification - Specifies a drawing specification file. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

SETSPEC

Main Size - Specifies main and reduction sizes. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).

SETSIZE

Size - Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a component. For more information, see Size (on page 56).

COMP2SIZE

Spec - Specifies the current specification by selecting a component. For more information, see Spec (on page 56).

COMP2SPEC

Size-Spec - Specifies the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component. For more information, see Size-Spec (on page 57).

COMP2SIZESPEC

Line - Sets the current line number to match that of a component that you select. For more information, see Line (on page 129).

COMP2LINE

All - Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and line number by selecting a component with the needed values. For more information, see All (on page 57).

COMP2ALL

Toolbars



Settings - Displays the current drawing settings. For more information, see Settings (on page 73).

CURRENT

2D Double Line - Converts selected components to 2D double line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 2D Double Line (on page 71).

CONVERTDOUBLE

2D Single Line - Converts selected components to 2D single line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 2D Single Line (on page 71).

CONVERTSINGLE

3D Solids - Converts selected components to 3D solid mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and 3D Solids (on page 71).

CONVERTSOLID

Convert Isometric - Converts selected components to isometric mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 70) and Convert Isometric (on page 71).

CONVERTISO

Threaded - Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. For more information, see Threaded (on page 73).

—

Socket Weld - Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. For more information, see Socket Weld (on page 73).

—

Local Edit - Modifies the properties of an existing component. For more information, see Local Edit (on page 62).

CEDIT

Xref Component Edit - Views sizes or information within the component.XREF. For more information, see Xref Edit (on page 73)

XCEDIT

Global Edit - Modifies the properties of multiple components. For more information, see Global Edit (on page 68).

GCEDIT

Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For more information, see Auto Connect (on page 150).

CONNECTOG

Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more information, see Zoom Lock (on page 181).

ZOOMLOCK

Optional Items - Places a component when the component type in the specification has an optional component. For more information, see Optional Items (on page 55).

SPECOPTION

Group On/Off - Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics. For more information, see Group On/Off (on page 150).

GROUPTOG

Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off. For more information, Select Control (on page 290).

SELECTCONTROL

Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawings

Toolbars


Palettes Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc


Spec View - Filters the available components based on the size and specification settings. For more information, see Spec View Palette (on page 76).

SPECVIEW

Line View -Isolates components based on their line number or their specification. For more information, see Line View Palette (on page 79).

LINEVIEW

Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add, modify and remove insulation configurations that can be applied to CADWorx components. For more information, see Insulation View Palette (on page 88).

INSULATIONVIEW

Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D solids in the current drawing as well as any attached XREF drawings. For more information, see Clash View Palette (on page 97).

CLASHVIEW

Pipe Support Modeler Report - Generates a report of all pipe supports found in the selection or in the entire model. For more information, see Pipe Support Report (on page 93).

PIPESUPPORTREPORT

Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of modeling issues. For more information, see Discontinuity View Palette (on page 92).

DISCONTINUITYVIEW

P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database. For more information, see P&ID View Palette (on page 94).

PIDVIEW

Toolbars



A P P E N D I X A

CADWorx Plant specification files (.spc) are delivered in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.

You can relocate these files to other local or network folders:

Change the location of the Spec folder by modifying the SpecificationDirectory (on page 39) variable stored in the current configuration settings.

Editing Component Data Files CADWorx Plant uses a component data text file to determine the correct dimensions of components. When you select a component, the software checks the current specification, retrieves data from the correct data file, and draws the component.

Use the Spec Editor to create new data files for components and the needed component sizes. The data file structure that is required for each component is provided in the DataFile.tbl file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. This file is used to generate template data. For more information, see the Spec Editor documentation delivered with CADWorx.

Specification and Data Files

Specification and Data Files



A P P E N D I X B

In This Appendix Modifying a User Profile ................................................................. 513 Creating a Base Profile .................................................................. 514 Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant 514 Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database .......... 516

Modifying a User Profile You can run CADWorx Plant from any network or local folder by manually creating or modifying a user profile and modifying the search paths in the profile.

CADWorx runs within AutoCAD by using the AutoCAD user profile command line switch, /P. A user profile shortcut is created when Plant is installed. For example, if AutoCAD is installed in the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD folder, a shortcut is created for CADWorx Plant. The value of Target on the Shortcut tab of the Properties dialog box for the shortcut is:

"C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD\acad.exe" /P "Profile Name"

Manually create a profile by modifying the support file search paths and the template file location.

1. In Plant, click Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2. On the Files tab, expand Support File Search Path in the Search paths, file names, and file locations list.

The [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder is listed first, as shown in the example below.

The acad.rx file is in the support folder. AutoCAD uses acad.rx to load the Plant menus, toolbars, and panels.

3. Select the folder name and type the new folder path.

4. Manually create the new support folder and copy the acad.rx file to this folder.

5. On the Files tab, expand Template Settings > Drawing Template File Location.

AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant



The [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder is listed first, as shown in the example below.

6. Select the folder name and type the new folder path.

7. Click OK.

To set up a profile for another user login on the same computer, run Start > All Programs > CADWorx > Plant > Setup Profile - Plant.

Creating a Base Profile To create a base profile, you can copy the AutoCAD icon or CADWorx icon, and specify a profile. This profile is based on the default AutoCAD profile.

1. Make a copy of the Plant shortcut on the desktop.

2. Right-click the shortcut and select Properties.

The Properties dialog box appears.

3. On the Shortcut tab, replace the value after /P in Target with the new profile name. For example:

"C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD - English\acad.exe" /P UserBase

You can use any name that is not used on the Profile tab of the Options dialog box (Tools > Options) in AutoCAD. Use quotes around the profile name if it contains spaces.

4. Click OK.

5. Double- click the shortcut to start the software.

AutoCAD creates a new profile based on the software defaults.

Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant

You can run CADWorx Plant and the standalone version of CADWorx Equipment simultaneously within the same AutoCAD session. This is necessary when equipment created with Equipment needs to be modified while in the Plant drawing session.

1. In Plant, click Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box displays.

2. On the Files tab, expand the Support File Search Path item.



3. Click Add, and browse to the CADWorx Equipment support directory. An example is shown in the figure below.

4. Close CADWorx Plant.

5. Start Windows Explorer and browse to the CADWorx Plant support directory (for example, C:\CADWorx Version\ Plant\Support).

6. Locate the file acad.rx file, and open it using a text editor.

7. Type CADWorxEquipment.arx into this file below the entry for CADWorxPlant.arx.

If CADWorxEquipment.arx is above CADWorxPlant.arx, CADWorx Plant tool tips do not function.



8. Start CADWorx Plant.

CADWorx Equipment starts simultaneously.

9. If the Equipment menu does not load, run the LOADMENUEQUIP command.

Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database

This following AutoCAD commands are monitored by CADWorx for live external database synchronization. When any of the commands are used, CADWorx automatically updates a live external database.

Erase and Undo Commands

These commands remove and restore graphic entities and mark rows in the database. If a CADWorx component is deleted from the drawing, the row from the database is deleted when the drawing file is closed.

ERASE

U

UNDO

REDO

MREDO

OOPS

BLOCK

-WBLOCK

EXPLODE

CUTCLIP

GROUP

Copy Commands

These commands add new graphic entities to the model.

COPY

BREAK

ARRAY

GRIP_COPY

GRIP_MIRROR

EXPLODE

MIRROR

PASTECLIP

PASTEORIG

DROPGEOM

Move Commands

These commands move the graphic entities in the model.

MOVE

GRIP_STRETCH

STRETCH

DROPGEOM


2 2D Double Line • 71 2D Panel • 179 2D Representation • 179 2D Representation Hidden • 180 2D Single Line • 71

3 3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling • 329 3D Solids • 71 3-Way Plan Valve • 383 3-Way Side Valve • 386 3-Way Vertical Valve • 386

4 45 LR Ell • 346 4-Way Plan Valve • 384 4-Way Side Valve • 387

9 90 LR Ell • 345 90 SR Ell • 345

A Accessing and Docking the Toolbars • 327 Add a user shape to a specification • 171 Add an HVAC shape to the drawing • 308 Add or remove properties from BOM • 133,

293, 317 Adjust a dimension to match a pipe • 176 Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension •

176 Adjustable Bend • 344 Aliases and Command Names • 328 All • 57 AlphaSizeControl • 30 Anchor • 224 Angle Double Shape • 247 Angle Shape with Lip • 245 Angle Shapes • 238 Angle Side Valve • 388 Angle Top Valve • 385 Annotate • 128 Annotate Component • 289 Apply Auto Coupling Rule • 49

Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule • 48 Apply Bolt Insertion Rule • 47 Apply Branch Table Rule • 48 Apply Change Data Rule • 51 Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box • 51 Apply End Type Rule • 47 Apply Flange Insertion Rule • 48 Apply Gasket Insertion Rule • 47 Apply Line Number Rule • 50 Apply Pipe End Prep Rule • 49 Apply Pipe Healing Rule • 48 Apply Pipe Length Rule • 47 Apply Size Rule • 46 Apply Specification Rule • 46 Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View

Palette) • 90 Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule • 48 Apply Weld Insertion Rule • 47 Arrow • 210 Assembly View Palette • 99 Assign • 127 Assign line numbers • 128 Audit HVAC Database • 324 Audit Pipe Database • 145 Audit Steel Database • 302 Audit the HVAC database • 324 AuditDataOnStartup • 30 Auto Connect • 150 Auto Cope • 290 Auto Gasket • 183 Auto Route • 189 Auto Weld • 185 AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant • 513 AutoDimensionBox • 31 Automatic • 184, 196

B Ball Valve • 377 Base Plate • 252 Bill of Material Setup • 132 Bleed Ring or Spacer • 501 Blind Flange • 365 Bolt • 183 BoltRoundControl • 33 BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box

• 134 BomBoltControl • 31 BomScheduleDirection • 32 BomScheduleSpacing • 32

Index

Index


BomTagGridFactor • 32 BomTagOptimize • 32 BomTagRadiusFactor • 32 BomTagSpacingFactor • 32 Box • 180 Butterfly Valve • 380 Buttweld • 329 Buttweld LR • 192 Buttweld SR • 193 Buttweld Valves • 375

C C.G. Generator • 147 CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match

Specifications Dialog Box • 52 CADWorxMaterial • 33 CAESARMaterial • 33 CAESARMemory • 33 CAESARTolerance • 33 CAESARVersion • 34 Cap • 340 Center Line • 49 CG Generator • 304 Change • 199 Change Layer • 218 Change Size • 57 Change Specification • 60 Change text alignment in columns • 133,

293, 317 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation

• 134, 293, 317 Change the column order • 133, 293, 317 Change the Elevation • 199 Change the layer associated with an object

• 218 Change the layers associated with HVAC

components • 323 Change the size automatically • 58 Change the size manually • 58 Change the size of a model with branch

connections automatically • 60 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes

automatically • 59 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes

manually • 59 Change the specification automatically • 61 Change the specification manually • 61 Change the specification of a model with

branches automatically • 61 Channel Shape with Lip • 244 Channel Shapes • 237 Check Valve • 379 Clash View Palette • 97

Compass • 230, 328 Component • 199 Conc Reducer • 339 Configuration Layers • 44 Configuration Settings • 28 Connecting to components • 328 Continue Routing • 191 Control Valve • 382 Conventions • 15 Convert a component to a different mode •

71 Convert Existing • 72 Convert from project data • 72 Convert Isometric • 71 Convert Legacy Drawing • 51 Convert Solid • 289 Convert to 3D enhanced • 72 Coordinates • 200 Cope • 280 Count • 126 Count weld gaps automatically • 186 Coupling • 401 Create a 2D representation • 180 Create a 2D representation with hidden

lines • 180 Create a 2D single line user shape • 170 Create a 2D user shape • 168 Create a 3D user shape • 167 Create a new frame configuration • 269 Create a user shape file • 157 Create a user shape from a block • 165 Create a user shape from a polyline • 164 Create a user shape from points • 162 Create an assembly • 100 Creating a Base Profile • 514 Cross Plan • 422 Cross Reducing Plan • 423 Cross Reducing Side • 439 Cross Reducing Vertical • 440 Cross Side • 439 Cut • 281 Cut BOM using Automatic placement • 135,

295, 319 Cut BOM using Manual placement • 136,

295, 319 Cut HVAC Bill of Material • 318 Cut members by line • 281 Cut members by three-point plane • 281 Cut Pipe Bill of Material • 134 Cut Steel Bill of Material • 294 CWexplode • 72

Index


D Data Remove • 322 DataBaseCodesISOGEN • 34 Decrement • 127 Define a weld gap • 497 Delete a layer • 219 Delete an assembly from the Assembly

Manager • 101 Delete Bill of Material • 141 Delete Layer • 218 Detail • 207 Diaphragm Valve • 380 Dim Adjustment • 175 Dimension Panel • 195 DimensionsExcludedSlope • 34 DimensionsExistingISOGEN • 34 Discontinuity View Palette • 92 Display only the layer associated with an

object • 220 Dots • 215 Draw non-pipe components • 77 Draw pipe components • 77 Drawing Prototype • 30 Dual Check Valve • 382

E East • 232 Ecc Reducer • 339 Edit • 181, 282, 314 Edit a frame configuration • 270 Edit an assembly • 100 Edit an assembly path • 101 Edit an existing user shape • 158 Edit by redefining connection points • 159 Edit HVAC components globally • 315 Editing Component Data Files • 511 Editor • 57 Elbow Centerline • 175 ElbowCenterLine • 34 Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan • 467 Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side • 479 Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical • 479 Elbowlet Thread in Plan • 467 Elbowlet Thread in Side • 478 Elbowlet Thread in Vertical • 478 Elbowlet Weld in Plan • 467 Elbowlet Weld in Side • 477 Elbowlet Weld in Vertical • 478 Elevation • 200, 209 End Type Information • 121 Expansion Joint • 502 Export CADWorx HVAC data • 323

Export HVAC • 323 Export Pipe • 143 Export Pipe Bill of Material • 139 Export Steel • 301 Export Steel Bill of Material • 299 Export Steel Model • 303 Extract batch ISOGEN files • 106 Extract ISOGEN files • 105 Extract piping component files • 112

F Fiberglass • 394 Fiberglass Pipe • 397 Find Legacy Components Dialog Box • 54 Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) • 80 FittingWidth • 35 Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan • 403 Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side • 410 Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert • 411 Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan • 403 Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side • 410 Flanged Concentric Reducer • 405 Flanged Plan • 500 Flanged Side • 503 Flanged Tee Plan • 404 Flanged Tee Side • 411 Flanged Tee Vertical • 412 Flanges • 361 Flat • 229 Flat Bar Shapes • 242 Flgd/BW Valves • 375 Frame Annotation • 270 Frame Creation • 268 Full Coupling End • 409

G Gasket • 496 Gaskets, Etc. • 495 Gate Valve • 376 GC Edit • 315 Generate a CAESAR II input file • 152 Generic Attach • 173, 313 Generic Attachment • 257 Global Edit • 68, 286 Global Edit All • 287 Globe Valve • 378 Graphics / Pipe Ends • 203 Group On/Off • 150 Guide • 226

Index


H Handrail • 273 Height • 202 Horizontal • 196 Horizontal with Tail • 198 HVAC • 306 HVAC BOM Setup • 315 HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel • 305 HVAC Shapes Catalog • 308 HVACLibraryDirectory • 35

I Import CADWorx HVAC data • 324 Import HVAC • 324 Import Pipe • 145 Import Pipe Bill of Material • 141 Import Steel • 301 Import Steel Model • 303 Increment • 127 Insert a drawing into the project • 97 Insert a gasket • 496 Insert a pipe support • 83 Insert a reinforcement pad • 222 Insert a reinforcement saddle • 223 Insert an assembly into the drawing • 101 Insert an elbow support • 84 Insert multiple pipe supports • 84 Insert Tag • 142 Instrument • 214 Insulation View Palette • 88 ISO • 211 ISO Flag • 175 ISO Text • 202 ISOGEN Batch • 106 ISOGEN Data Dialog Box • 64 ISOGEN Export Options • 159 ISOGEN Information • 113 ISOGEN Out • 104 ISOGEN Panel • 103 ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure •

113 ISOGEN Start Point • 108 ISOGEN Supplemental • 107 ISOGENDefaultStyle • 35 Isolate Layer • 220

L Label components with line numbers • 128 Ladder • 271 LanguageFile • 35 Lap Joint Flange • 369

Lateral Plan • 423 Lateral Side • 440 Lateral Vertical • 440 Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan • 468 Latrolet Socket Weld in Side • 480 Latrolet Thread in Plan • 468 Latrolet Thread in Side • 480 Latrolet Weld in Plan • 468 Latrolet Weld in Side • 479 Layer Change • 290, 322 Layer Off • 219 Layer On • 219 LayerByLineNumber • 35 Layers Dialog Box • 99 Layers Panel • 217 LibraryDirectory • 37 Line • 129 Line Isolate • 129 Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View

Palette) • 79 Line Numbering System Dialog Box • 124 Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup

Dialog Box • 78 Line Numbers • 504 Line View Palette • 79 Lined • 389 Lined Eccentric Reducer • 392 Lined Pipe • 391 Lined Wye Plan • 392 Lined Wye Side • 393 Lined Wye Vert • 393 LineNumberSystem • 37 Link components • 96 LNum Panel • 123 Local Edit • 62 Loft • 260 Long Weld Neck • 370

M Match an object's layer • 220 Match Layer • 219 Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View

Palette) • 94 Material List Definition • 113 Misc • 213, 498 Misc Panel • 149 Miter • 280 Miters • 342 Mode Convert • 70 Modeling in 2D • 349, 386, 393, 405, 435,

470, 493, 503 Modeling in 3D • 333, 376, 391, 397, 419,

455, 484, 500

Index


Modify a component • 63 Modify a generic attachment • 314 Modify a user-defined HVAC shape • 313 Modify an HVAC shape • 308 Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog •

310 Modify multiple components • 69 Modifying a User Profile • 513 MVSetup • 24

N Nipolet Thread in Plan • 469 Nipolet Thread in Vertical • 481 Nipolet Weld in Plan • 469 Nipolet Weld in Vertical • 480 Nipple • 456 Non Standard • 187 North • 230

O Obsolete Commands • 20 Offset Tap • 108 Online Help • 21 Operators • 504 Optional Component Dialog Box • 55 Optional Items • 55 Options Dialog Box • 98

P P&ID View Palette • 94 Palette Panel • 75 Palettes • 509 PCF In • 112 PCF Out • 112 Pipe • 333 Pipe BOM / DB Panel • 131 Pipe Shapes • 240 Pipe Support Report • 93 PipeDescriptionCat • 38 PipeSupportDirectory • 38 PipeSupportSetting • 38 Piping Rules • 46 Place a 180 degree plan return • 338 Place a 180 degree side return • 354, 355 Place a 180 degree vertical return • 355,

356 Place a 3-way plan valve • 383, 433, 489 Place a 3-way side valve • 386, 446, 493 Place a 3-way vertical valve • 387, 446, 493 Place a 45 degree rolled elbow • 346 Place a 4-way plan valve • 384, 489

Place a 4-way side valve • 387, 494 Place a 90 degree plan elbow • 334, 398,

403, 419, 458 Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow •

336, 420, 459 Place a 90 degree rolled elbow • 345, 346 Place a 90 degree side street elbow • 470 Place a 90 degree street plan elbow • 458 Place a base plate • 254 Place a base plate with holes • 254 Place a bleed ring • 501 Place a bushing • 402, 465 Place a cap • 340, 402, 429, 463 Place a concentric reducer • 339, 399, 405,

427, 462 Place a concentric reducer swage • 461 Place a coupling • 401, 428, 429, 465, 466 Place a coupling end • 409, 475, 476 Place a detail graphic • 207 Place a fiberglass pipe • 397 Place a flange • 365, 369 Place a flange on a pipe • 363, 364, 366,

368, 371, 372, 374 Place a flange that mates with another

flange • 363, 365, 367, 368, 371, 373, 374

Place a frame in the drawing • 270 Place a gasket automatically • 183 Place a gasket manually • 184 Place a generic attachment in the drawing •

173, 314 Place a guide • 226 Place a ladder interactively • 272 Place a ladder using key-ins • 273 Place a ladder with a cage • 273 Place a miscellaneous graphic • 214 Place a mitered pipe • 343 Place a multi-port valve • 434 Place a nipple • 456 Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the

drawing • 172 Place a pipe • 333, 392 Place a plan cross • 340, 400, 422, 463 Place a plan elbow • 335, 347, 348, 398,

404, 420, 425, 459 Place a plan elbowlet fitting • 467 Place a plan fitting • 466, 469 Place a plan flange pipe • 500 Place a plan flanged tee • 404 Place a plan graphic • 208 Place a plan lateral • 342, 401, 423, 424,

464 Place a plan latrolet fitting • 468

Index


Place a plan reducing cross • 341 Place a plan soc-o-let • 403 Place a plan tee • 336, 337, 399, 421, 422,

460, 461 Place a plan wye • 349, 393, 428 Place a plug • 464 Place a relief side valve • 490 Place a relief top valve • 494 Place a rigid element • 502 Place a rolled pipe • 344 Place a rolled tee • 347 Place a rotational restraint • 225 Place a sanitary plan reducing cross • 423 Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend •

444, 445 Place a sanitary side reducing cross • 439 Place a sanitary u-bend • 426 Place a section graphic • 206 Place a side blind spectacle • 501 Place a side cross • 356, 408, 439, 474 Place a side elbowlet fitting • 477, 478, 479 Place a side flange pipe • 503 Place a side flanged tee • 412 Place a side lateral • 358, 408, 440, 441,

475 Place a side latrolet fitting • 479, 480 Place a side or vertical elbow • 349, 350,

351, 359, 360, 405, 406, 410, 411, 435, 436, 437, 442, 443, 444, 470, 471

Place a side reducing cross • 357 Place a side reducing elbow • 352, 435, 472 Place a side socket weld threaded pipe •

501 Place a side socket weld/threaded pipe •

503 Place a side tee • 352, 353, 407, 437, 438,

472, 473 Place a side wye • 361, 393, 445 Place a snubber • 226 Place a spring hanger • 225 Place a stub or weld neck • 369, 370 Place a symmetrical user shape in the

drawing • 172 Place a tap • 113 Place a threaded/socket pipe • 456 Place a translational restraint • 223 Place a user-defined HVAC shape • 313 Place a valve • 377, 378, 379, 380, 381,

382, 383, 429, 430, 431, 432, 484, 485, 486, 487, 488, 491, 492

Place a vertical blind spectacle • 504 Place a vertical elbowlet fitting • 478, 479 Place a vertical fitting • 476, 477, 481

Place a vertical lateral • 358, 409, 441, 475 Place a vertical reducing cross • 357, 440 Place a vertical soc-o-let • 409 Place a vertical strainer • 412 Place a vertical tee • 353, 354, 407, 438,

439, 473, 474 Place a vertical wye • 361, 394, 445 Place a weld dot graphic • 216 Place a weld symbol graphic • 211 Place an anchor • 224 Place an angle side valve • 388, 389, 447,

495 Place an angle top valve • 490 Place an angle valve • 385, 433 Place an arrow head graphic • 210 Place an eccentric reducer • 339, 392, 400,

427, 463 Place an eccentric reducer swage • 462 Place an elevation graphic • 209 Place an expansion joint • 502 Place an HVAC shape from the catalog •

310 Place an instrument graphic • 215 Place an isometric symbol graphic • 213 Place an offset tap • 111 Place automatic dimensions • 196 Place component annotation • 200 Place component elevation annotation • 200 Place coordinates • 201 Place hand rail by points • 274 Place hand rail by polyline • 275 Place horizontal dimensions • 196 Place horizontal tailed dimensions • 198 Place nonstandard stud bolts • 187 Place plate by closed polyline • 251 Place plate by curves • 252 Place plate by points • 251 Place rotated dimensions • 198 Place standard stud bolts • 187 Place stud bolts automatically • 184 Place stud bolts manually • 184 Place tick marks • 202 Place tubing • 457 Place vertical dimensions • 197 Place vertical tailed dimensions • 199 Place weld gaps automatically • 185 Place weld gaps manually • 186 Plan • 208 Plan 11.25 Ell • 347 Plan 180 LR Return • 337 Plan 180 SR Return • 338 Plan 22.5 Ell • 348 Plan 45 Ell • 335

Index


Plan 90 LR Ell • 333 Plan 90 Reducing Ell • 335 Plan 90 SR Ell • 334 Plan Cross • 340 Plan Lateral • 341 Plan Reducing Cross • 341 Plan Reducing Tee • 337 Plan Tee • 336 Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow •

397 Plan Wye • 348 Plane versus Isometrics view modes • 328 Plate • 250 Plug Valve • 378 Point and Shoot UCS • 227 Preface • 15 Pressure Top Valve • 388 Previous • 220

R Read a CAESAR II input file • 175 Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer

Off command • 219 Reducing Slip-on Flange • 370 Reducing Tee Plan • 421 Reducing Tee Side • 438 Reducing Tee Vertical • 438 Reducing Threaded Flange • 372 Reducing Weld Neck Flange • 373 Reinforcing Pad • 222 Reinforcing Saddle • 222, 502 Relief Side Valve • 384 Relief Top Valve • 387 Remove CADWorx data from components •

322 Restore XDATA • 31 Restraints • 497 Restraints Panel • 221 Rigid Element • 502 Rolled Pipe • 343 Rotary Valve • 381 Rotated • 198 Rotational • 225 Round Bar Shapes • 243 Router • 191 Router commands • 192 RT Panel • 189 Running CADWorx Equipment or PV

Fabricator with CADWorx Plant • 514

S Saddle in Plan • 402

Saddle in Vertical • 409 Sanitary • 412 Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan • 425 Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side • 443 Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical • 443 Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan • 424 Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side • 442 Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical • 442 Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan • 432 Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side • 446 Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical • 446 Sanitary 45 Ell Plan • 420 Sanitary 45 Ell Side • 436 Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical • 436 Sanitary 90 Ell Plan • 419 Sanitary 90 Ell Side • 435 Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan • 420 Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side • 435 Sanitary Angle Valve Plan • 433 Sanitary Angle Valve Side • 446 Sanitary Ball Valve • 430 Sanitary Butterfly Valve • 432 Sanitary Cap • 428 Sanitary Check Valve • 431 Sanitary Concentric • 426 Sanitary Eccentric • 427 Sanitary Gate Valve • 429 Sanitary Globe Valve • 430 Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan • 424 Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side • 441 Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical • 441 Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve • 433 Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve • 434 Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve • 434 Sanitary Nut/Coupling • 429 Sanitary Plug Valve • 431 Sanitary Stub • 427 Sanitary Tee Plan • 421 Sanitary Tee Side • 437 Sanitary Tee Vertical • 437 Sanitary U-Bend Plan • 426 Sanitary U-Bend Side • 444 Sanitary U-Bend Vertical • 444 Sanitary Wye Plan • 428 Sanitary Wye Side • 445 Sanitary Wye Vertical • 445 SaveLastProfileUsed • 39 Section • 206 Select Control • 290 Select Item Dialog Box • 144 Set • 125, 197 Set Layer • 218

Index


Set line numbers based on a component • 126

Set line numbers based on a P&ID project • 126

Set line numbers based on the current drawing • 126

Set Size by Component • 257 Set Specification & Size Dialog Box • 43 Set Specification and Size • 43 Set the active layer • 218 Set the current line number to that of a

component • 129 Set the Elevation • 197 Set the line count value • 127 Settings • 73, 507 Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View

Palette) • 89 Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette)

• 78 Setup • 23, 26, 124 Setup Live Database • 142 Setup Live Database Steel • 300 Setup Size/Spec Panel • 25 Shapes • 233 Show Removed XDATA • 30 Side 11.25 Ell • 358 Side 180 LR Return • 354 Side 180 SR Return • 355 Side 22.5 Ell • 359 Side 45 Ell • 350 Side 90 LR Ell • 349 Side 90 Reducing Ell • 351 Side 90 SR Ell • 350 Side Cross • 356 Side Lateral • 357 Side Reducing Cross • 357 Side Reducing Tee • 353 Side Tee • 352 Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow •

405 Side Wye • 360 Single BOM using Automatic placement •

139, 299, 322 Single BOM using Manual placement • 139,

299, 322 Single HVAC Bill of Material • 321 Single Line Steel • 261 Single Pipe Bill of Material • 138 Single Steel Bill of Material • 297 SingleLineWidth • 39 Size • 56 Size-Spec • 57 SKEY Information • 114

Slip-on Flange • 364 Snubber • 226 Socket Type Flange • 366 Socket Weld • 73, 194 Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan • 466 Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical • 477 South • 231 Spec • 56 Spec Editor • 77 Spec View Palette • 76 Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View

Palette) • 76 Special Monitored Commands Used With a

Live Database • 516 Specification and Data Files • 511 Specification and Size • 55 SpecificationDefaultProject • 39 SpecificationDirectory • 39 Specify the weld dot size for a single line

pipe • 151 SpecSizeOverride • 39 Spectacle Blind • 501 Spectacle Blind Vertical • 504 Spring Hanger • 224 Stair • 275 Standard • 187 Start a new route • 190 Startup Defaults • 23 Startup Variables • 28 Steel • 505 Steel Bolts • 255 Steel BOM / DB Panel • 291 Steel BOM Setup • 292 Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation

Dialog Box • 294 Steel Draw Panel • 249 Steel Edit Panel • 279 Steel Shapes Panel • 233 SteelCopeBoltDistance • 39 SteelCopeWeldDistance • 40 SteelLibraryDirectory • 40 SteelNeutralAxis • 40 SteelPartNumberFile • 40 SteelRoundControl • 40 SteelRoundUnit • 41 SteelToolTipSetting • 41 Stop Sign • 108 Stub End • 369 Support Directory • 23 Support Modeler Palette • 81 Support Parametric Data Files (*.SUP) • 84 SW/Thrd Plan • 500 SW/Thrd Side • 503

Index


Synchronize HVAC Database • 325 Synchronize Pipe Database • 146 Synchronize Steel Database • 302 Synchronize the HVAC database • 325 SyncOnStartUp • 41 System In • 174 System Out • 152 System Prompts • 204 System Visibility • 177 SystemMeasure • 41

T Tag Location • 141 Tag Toggle Bill of Material • 141 Tap • 112 Technical Support • 16 Tee • 346 Tee Shapes • 239 TemplateDatabaseFile • 41 Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan • 489 Thrd/SW 3 Way Side • 493 Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical • 493 Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan • 489 Thrd/SW 4 Way Side • 494 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan • 459 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side • 471 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert • 471 Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan • 457 Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side • 470 Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan • 459 Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side • 472 Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan • 458 Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side • 470 Thrd/SW Angle Side • 495 Thrd/SW Angle Top • 490 Thrd/SW Ball • 484 Thrd/SW Bush/Insert • 464 Thrd/SW Cap • 463 Thrd/SW Check • 486 Thrd/SW Conc Swage • 461 Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub • 462 Thrd/SW Control • 488 Thrd/SW Cross Plan • 463 Thrd/SW Cross Side • 474 Thrd/SW Diaphragm • 487 Thrd/SW Dual Check • 488 Thrd/SW Ecc Swage • 461 Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub • 462 Thrd/SW Full Clpg End • 475 Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan • 465 Thrd/SW Gage • 491 Thrd/SW Gate • 484 Thrd/SW Globe • 485

Thrd/SW Half Clpg End • 476 Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan • 465 Thrd/SW Lateral Plan • 464 Thrd/SW Lateral Side • 474 Thrd/SW Lateral Vert • 475 Thrd/SW Needle • 486 Thrd/SW Pipe • 455 Thrd/SW Plug • 464, 485 Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End • 476 Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan • 465 Thrd/SW Relief Side • 490 Thrd/SW Relief Top • 494 Thrd/SW Rotary • 487 Thrd/SW Tee Plan • 460 Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan • 460 Thrd/SW Tee Red Side • 473 Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert • 474 Thrd/SW Tee Side • 472 Thrd/SW Tee Vert • 473 Thrd/SW Union • 469 Thrd/SW Valves • 481 Threaded • 73, 193 Threaded Flange • 367 Threaded/Socket • 450 Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan •

398 Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side •

406 Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert •

406 Threaded/Socket Cap • 402 Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer • 399 Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer • 400 Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing • 402 Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan • 401 Threaded/Socket Lateral Side • 408 Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert • 408 Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan • 400 Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side • 408 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan • 399 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side • 407 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert • 407 Threadolet Thread in Plan • 466 Threadolet Thread in Vertical • 477 Tick Mark • 201 Toolbars • 327 ToolTipSetting • 41 Top Works Add • 151 Top Works Change • 151 TopWorksSetting • 42 Total BOM using Automatic placement •

137, 297, 320

Index


Total BOM using Manual placement • 137, 297, 320

Total HVAC Bill of Material • 319 Total Pipe Bill of Material • 136 Total Steel Bill of Material • 296 Translational • 223 Tube • 457 Tube Shapes • 241 Turn off a layer • 219 Turn off the zoom lock • 182 Turn on all layers • 220 Turn on the zoom lock • 182

U UCS • 505 UCS Next • 230 UCS Object • 232 UCS Panel • 227 Union • 282 Un-Isolate Layer • 220 Unlink components • 96 Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View

Palette) • 96 UseObjectsFromXrefs • 42 User Shape • 258, 310 User Shapes • 153

V Vert 11.25 Ell • 359 Vert 180 LR Return • 355 Vert 180 SR Return • 356 Vert 22.5 Ell • 360 Vert 45 Ell • 351 Vert Lateral • 358 Vert Reducing Cross • 357 Vert Reducing Tee • 354 Vert Tee • 353 Vert Wye • 361 Vertical • 197 Vertical with Tail • 198 Victaulic • 447 View Clip • 227

W Weld • 211 Weld Gap • 497 Weld Neck Flange • 362 Weld Size • 151 Weld Total • 186 WeldDotSize • 42 WeldGapToDB • 42

Weldolet Weld in Plan • 466 Weldolet Weld in Vertical • 476 West • 231 What's New in Plant • 18 Wide Flange Shapes • 236

X X-Body Gate BW • 491 X-Body Gate SW • 492 X-Body Gate Thrd • 492 XREF Edit • 73

Z Z Shapes • 246 Zoom Factors • 182 Zoom Lock • 181

CADWorx Plant User Guide

Documents

software product

intergraph corporation

reliability of software

restricted computer

applicable license agreement

valid signed license

terms of use use

unpublished rights